Sirona Orthophos XG Dental X-Ray - Service manual.pdf

båÖäáëÜ

loqelmelp=udmäìë=ap=L=`ÉéÜloqelmelp=ud=R=ap=L=`ÉéÜloqelmelp=ud=P=appÉêîáÅÉ=j~åì~ä

sÉêëáçå=NPKM

ORTHOPHOS XGPlus DS

Easypad

ORTHOPHOS XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE DS

T R

Prog. S kV mAP1

Multipad

About the Service Manual:

• This Service Manual is valid for the following unit versions:– ORTHOPHOS XGPlus DS / Ceph

– ORTHOPHOS XG 5 DS / Ceph

– ORTHOPHOS XG 3 DS*

NOTEiThese two system versions differ regarding the equipment offered by their user interfaces and their possible configuration levels (see page 1-5).

NOTEiBoard DX41 is no longer installed in units with hardware version BA or higher (as of November 2006).

In addition, you also require:

• Spare parts list: Order No. 59 38 423– ORTHOPHOS XGPlus DS / Ceph, ORTHOPHOS XG 5 DS / Ceph,

ORTHOPHOS XG 3 DS

• Wiring diagrams: Order No. 59 38 332– ORTHOPHOS XGPlus DS / Ceph, ORTHOPHOS XG 5 DS / Ceph,

ORTHOPHOS XG 3 DS

• Installation Instructions– ORTHOPHOS XGPlus DS / Ceph: Order No. 59 87 651

– ORTHOPHOS XG 5 DS / Ceph: Order No. 60 04 902

– ORTHOPHOS XG 3 DS: Order No. 60 51 416

• Tools– Screwdriver, medium sized

– Torx offset screwdrivers TX10, TX20, TX25

– Open-end wrench, 13 mm A/F

– Socket wrench, 13 mm A/F

– Side cutters

– Spirit level

• Auxiliary devices– Digital multimeter, Accuracy Class 1

– Soldering tool for repairing cables

– Cable ties

– Teflon tape

– Loctite

General information/Software update 1

Messages 2

Troubleshooting 3

Adjustment 4

Service routines 5

Repair 6

Maintenance 7

Contents

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 V

1 General information ..................................................................... 1-5

1.1 Safety .................................................................................. 1-5

1.2 XGPlus and XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE system classes ...................... 1-6

1.3 Programs and functions of the XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE system class ............................................ 1-8

1.4 Programs and functions of the XGPlus system class ........... 1-9

1.5 Operation notes ................................................................. 1-11

1.6 Demo mode – Operation without radiation release ........... 1-13

1.7 Demo mode – Repacking and transport ........................... 1-15

1.8 List of software versions .................................................... 1-16

1.9 Software update ................................................................ 1-22

1.10 Selecting More details ....................................................... 1-32

1.11 The most important modules and components ................. 1-34

1.12 Cabling overview ............................................................... 1-38

1.13 Illustrations of boards ........................................................ 1-42

1.14 Removing the covers ........................................................ 1-50

2 Messages .................................................................................... 2-3

2.1 Help messages ................................................................... 2-4

2.2 System messages ............................................................... 2-6

2.3 Status displays .................................................................... 2-6

2.4 Error messages ................................................................... 2-6

2.5 List of error messages ......................................................... 2-9

2.6 List of available service routines ....................................... 2-62

3 Troubleshooting .......................................................................... 3-3

3.1 Error logging memory .......................................................... 3-4

3.2 Check the CAN bus ............................................................. 3-6

3.3 Checking the boards ......................................................... 3-12

3.4 Checking the motors ......................................................... 3-14

3.5 Checking the light barriers ................................................ 3-15

3.6 Device leakage current too high ........................................ 3-16

3.7 Checking the cables .......................................................... 3-17

3.8 Error analysis of X-RAY control signal path: up to unit hardware revision AG(with board DX41) ............................................................. 3-18

3.9 Error analysis of X-RAY control signal path: unit HW version BA or higher(without board DX41) ........................................................ 3-22

3.10 Check data paths/Generate test images ........................... 3-25

Contents

59 38 399 D3352 VI D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

4 Adjustment ................................................................................... 4-3

4.1 Important information concerning adjustment ...................... 4-3

4.2 Diaphragm/system adjustment menu .................................. 4-5

4.3 Adjusting the panoramic X-ray unit ...................................... 4-9

4.4 Adjusting the cephalometer (XGPlus/ XG 5, if ceph is installed) ..................................... 4-56

4.5 TSA sensor adjustment(XGPlus full version only) .................................................. 4-107

4.6 Resetting the adjustment (XGPlus / 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) ..................................................... 4-115

5 Service routines ........................................................................... 5-9

5.1 Selecting the Service menu ............................................... 5-10

5.2 Selecting a service routine ................................................. 5-15

5.3 Service routines with SIDEXIS .......................................... 5-18

5.4 Service routine S001 ......................................................... 5-21










5.14 Service routine S018 ....................................................... 5-109

5.15 Service routine S020 (XGPlus only) .................................. 5-118

5.16 Service routine S021 (not for XG 3 / 3 PPE) ................... 5-121


5.18 Service routine S033 (not for XG 3 / 3 PPE) ................... 5-130



Contents

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 VII

6 Repair .......................................................................................... 6-5

6.1 Replacing the height adjustment motor (M1_4)/spindle ...... 6-6

6.2 Replacing the ring motor (M1_3) ....................................... 6-14

6.3 Replacing the PAN actuators (M1_1/2) ............................. 6-17

6.4 Replacing the headrest ..................................................... 6-19

6.5 Replacing the Easypad (XGPlus) or the Multipad (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) ..................................... 6-21

6.6 Replacing the control panel ............................................... 6-24

6.7 Replacing/adjusting the FH light localizer (PAN) .............. 6-26

6.8 Replacing/adjusting the MS light localizer laser module (PAN) ........................................................... 6-28

6.9 Replacing/adjusting the FH light localizer (Ceph) ............. 6-30

6.10 Removing the light localizers from the ring(for the XGPlus and XG 5, if present) ................................. 6-32

6.11 Replacing the support piece (bite block holder) ................ 6-33

6.12 Replacing the motor-driven diaphragm (for XGPlus / XG 5) ............................................................. 6-34

6.13 Replacing the fixed diaphragm (only XG 3 / 3 PPE) ........................................................... 6-37

6.14 Replacing the X-ray tube assembly .................................. 6-38

6.15 Replacing the fan (tube assembly) .................................... 6-42

6.16 Replacing the PAN (TSA) sensor holder ........................... 6-43

6.17 Replacing the ceph sensor holder ..................................... 6-47

6.18 Replacing the sensor ........................................................ 6-48

6.19 Replacing the light barriers ............................................... 6-49

6.20 Replacing circuit boards .................................................... 6-59

6.21 Replacing cables ............................................................... 6-91

Contents

59 38 399 D3352 VIII D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

7 Maintenance ................................................................................ 7-3

7.1 Checking the height adjustment .......................................... 7-4

7.2 Checking the forehead and temple supports ....................... 7-6

7.3 Checking the sensor holder (pan and ceph) ........................ 7-7

7.4 Checking the support piece (bite block holder) .................... 7-9

7.5 Checking the light localizers .............................................. 7-10

7.6 Checking the X-ray images ................................................ 7-12

7.7 Checking the tube data ...................................................... 7-13

7.8 Checking the diaphragm .................................................... 7-17

7.9 Checking the cables for damage ....................................... 7-35

7.10 Checking the idling rollers .................................................. 7-36

7.11 Checking the grounding straps .......................................... 7-37

7.12 Checking the cable shields ................................................ 7-38

7.13 Checking the protective ground wires ................................ 7-39

7.14 Checking the device leakage current ................................. 7-43

ORTHOPHOS XG 1General information

59 38 399 D33521 – 2 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

Tab 1

Contents

1.1 Safety ......................................................................1 – 5

1.2 XGPlus and XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE system classes..........1 – 61.2.1 Overview of the ORTHOPHOS XG system

classes and versions ............................................ 1 – 7

1.3 Programs and functions of the XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE system class ................................1 – 81.3.1 XG 5 system version ............................................ 1 – 8

1.3.2 XG 3 system version ............................................ 1 – 8

1.3.3 XG 3 PPE (pay per exposure) system version..... 1 – 8

1.4 Programs and functions of the XGPlus system class1 – 91.4.1 Programs and functions of the basic version ....... 1 – 9

1.4.2 Programs and functions of the full version ......... 1 – 10

1.5 Operation notes.....................................................1 – 11

1.6 Demo mode – Operation without radiation release1 – 131.6.1 Switching the demo mode ON............................ 1 – 14

1.6.2 Switching the demo mode OFF.......................... 1 – 14

1.7 Demo mode – Repacking and transport ...............1 – 15

1.8 List of software versions........................................1 – 161.8.1 ORTHOPHOS XG 3 PPE .................................. 1 – 16

1.8.2 ORTHOPHOS XG 3 .......................................... 1 – 17

1.8.3 ORTHOPHOS XG 5 / Ceph ............................... 1 – 18

1.8.4 ORTHOPHOS XGPlus / Ceph............................. 1 – 20

1.9 Software update ....................................................1 – 221.9.1 Important information on the software update.... 1 – 22

1.9.2 Permissible software updates ............................ 1 – 23

1.9.3 Performing a software update ............................ 1 – 24

1.9.4 Software update for ORTHOPHOS XG 5 to V02.30 or higher............................................. 1 – 29

1.9.5 Software Update for ORTHOPHOS XGPlus from V02.20 to V02.30 or higher ........................ 1 – 30

1.9.6 Software update for ORTHOPHOS XGPlus from V02.22 to V02.30 or higher ........................ 1 – 31

1.10 Selecting More details ...........................................1 – 32

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1 – 3

Tab 1

1.11 The most important modules and components .....1 – 341.11.1 Slide ................................................................... 1 – 35

1.11.2 Stand .................................................................. 1 – 36

1.11.3 Cephalometer(arm mounted on left side or on right side)......... 1 – 37

1.11.4 Remote control ................................................... 1 – 37

1.12 Cabling overview...................................................1 – 38

1.13 Illustrations of boards ............................................1 – 421.13.1 Boards in the slide.............................................. 1 – 42

1.13.2 Boards in the stand ............................................ 1 – 46

1.13.3 Boards in the cephalometer(arm mounted on right side or on left side)......... 1 – 47

1.13.4 Boards in the remote control .............................. 1 – 48

1.14 Removing the covers.............................................1 – 50

59 38 399 D33521 – 4 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

Tab 1

1.1

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1 – 5

Tab 1 1.1 Safety

1.11 General information

1.1 Safety

It is essential that you comply with the warning and safety information con-tained in this Service Manual.

All such information is highlighted by one of three signal words, i.e. CAUTION, WARNING or DANGER.

CAUTIONNonobservance may result in minor physical injuries or material damage and malfunctions.

WARNINGNonobservance may lead to serious physical injury or death.

DANGERImmediate danger to life and limb. Threat of serious physical injury or death.

59 38 399 D33521 – 6 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

1.2 XGPlus and XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE system classes Tab 1

1.2 XGPlus and XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE system classes

The XGPlus and XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE system versions differ with regard to their user interface. While the ORTHOPHOS XG (XGPlus) features a control panel with a color touchscreen (Easypad), the (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) basic class is equipped with a simpler control panel with a single-line display (Multipad).

Due to their different control panels, the operating procedures for these two system classes also vary.

All ORTHOPHOS XG units are digital systems (DS).

The ORTHOPHOS XGPlus and XG 5 system versions are suitable for opera-tion with a cephalometer (ceph). The cephalometer for the XGPlus system ver-sion is also available with the ceph arm mounted either on the left or the right side. Only the cephalometer version with the arm mounted on the left side is offered for the XG 5 system version. Operation of the XG 3/3 PPE system ver-sion is not possible with a cephalometer.

NOTEiThe version with the ceph arm mounted on the left side is basically described and illustrated in this Service Manual. Unless described separately, all dis-mantling and assembly steps must be performed laterally reversed for the ver-sion with the ceph arm mounted on the right side.

Remote control operation is possible in all system versions.

The (XGPlus) system class comes in a basic and a full version (see page 1-9), however, the basic system class (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) is available only in a basic version.

The XGPlus system class optionally includes TSA operation.

This Service Manual describes both system classes in the highest possible configuration.

For more information on the different installation versions, please refer to the Installation Instructions.

NOTEiThe empty digits in the single-line display of the Multipad are markedwith underscores in this Manual. They have been added to enhance clarity and are not present on the real Multipad.

Comfort class with Easypad (XGPlus)

Basic class with Multipad (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE)

T R

Prog. S kV mA

1 2 3

S005_______1____

1.2

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1 – 7

Tab 1 1.2 XGPlus and XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE system classes

1.21.2.1 Overview of the ORTHOPHOS XG system

classes and versions

T R

Prog. S kV mA

T R

Prog. S kV mA

T R

Prog. S kV mA

ORTHOPHOS XGPlus with ceph arm on right sidewith ceph arm on left side

Comfort class (Easypad, basic or full version, TSA option, remote control option)

ORTHOPHOS XG 5with ceph arm on left side

ORTHOPHOS XG 3

Basic class (Multipad, basic equipment, remote release optional)

T R

Prog. S kV mA

ORTHOPHOS XG 3 PPE

59 38 399 D33521 – 8 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

1.3 Programs and functions of the XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE system class Tab 1

1.3 Programs and functions of the XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE system class

1.3.1 XG 5 system version

8 panoramic programs P 1, P 1C, P 10

P 1L, P 1R

TM 1.1/TM 1.2

S 1

MS 1

5 Ceph programs C 1, C 2, C 3, C 3F, C 4

Functions Half-views of right/left side possible only with P1 (not upper/lower jaw).

Constant magnification factor of 1.25 possible only with program P 1.

No Quickshot function.

No "jaw shape" program presetting.

No artifact-free display mode.

No orthodontic image series P 1 - C 3 - C 4 without cooling periods.

No TSA configuration level.

No TSA operation possible.

No welcome screen.

1.3.2 XG 3 system version

5 panoramic programs P 1, P 1C

P 1L, P 1R

TM 1.1/TM 1.2







No TSA configuration level.

No TSA operation possible.

No welcome screen.

1.3.3 XG 3 PPE (pay per exposure) system version

ORTHOPHOS XG 3 with PPE concept (for USA only).

Functionality and programs identical to those of system version XG 3.

1.4

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1 – 9

Tab 1 1.4 Programs and functions of the XGPlus system class

1.41.4 Programs and functions of the XGPlus system

class

The XGPlus system class is available in two configuration levels:

Basic version

Full version

This Service Manual describes the full version of the system.

1.4.1 Programs and functions of the basic version

10 panoramic programs P 1, P 1C, P 2, P 10

P 1L, P 1R

P 12

TM 1.1/TM 1.2

S 1

MS 1

5 Ceph programs C 1, C 2, C 3, C 3F, C 4


Preselection of individual quadrants not possible.






No TSA configuration level (TSA operation retrofittable).

No welcome screen with patient data from SIDEXIS.

Ceph: No shadowing in upper head region with programs C3 and C3F.

Ceph: No shadowing in thyroid region with programs C1 and C2.

59 38 399 D33521 – 10 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

1.4 Programs and functions of the XGPlus system class Tab 1

1.4.2 Programs and functions of the full version

The full version offers the following programs and functions in addition to those featured in the basic version:

Additional Pan programs Constant magnification factor of 1.25 P 2C, P 10C

Artifact-free display P 1A, P 2A, P 10A

Additional functions Selectable right/left partial view and individual quadrantsP 1A, P 2/A/C, P 10/A/C, P12.

Selectable upper/lower jaw partial view and individual quadrantsP 1/A/C, P 2/A/C, P 10/A/C.

Temporomandibular joint views TM 2, TM 3, TM 4, TM 5, TM 6

Sinus views S2, S3, S4.

Selectable "jaw shape" program setting.

Quickshot function possible (for Pan and Ceph).

Orthodontic image series P 1 - C 3 - C 4 without cooling periods possible.

TSA configuration level

TSA operation possible (optional)

Welcome screen with patient data from SIDEXIS (SIDEXIS V01.50 and higher).

Ceph: Shadowing in upper head region with programs C3 and C3F.

Ceph: Shadowing in thyroid region with programs C1 and C2.

1.5

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1 – 11

Tab 1 1.5 Operation notes

1.51.5 Operation notes

Rated line voltage The ORTHOPHOS XG X-ray unit can be operated in the following rated line voltage ranges:

200 V - 240 V

50/60 Hz

The permissible line voltage fluctuations are as follows:

200 - 230 V: ± 10 %

The internal line impedance must not exceed max. 0.8 Ω.

NOTEiOnly permanent electrical connection of the system is allowed in Germany.

Remote control The system can be equipped with...

a 1 - 3 m coiled cable with release button inside the treatment room or ...

a remote control with or without coiled cable located outside the X-ray room (see installation instructions).

Warm-up time After it is switched ON, the system requires a warm-up time of approx. 1 min.

Self-adjustment routine At the same time, a mechanical and electronic self-adjustment routine is exe-cuted. If a button is pressed during the self-adjustment routine, an error mes-sage is displayed on the Multipad (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) or Easypad (XGPlus).

Cooling period The cooling period between two exposures is maintained by an automatic exposure blocking function according to the pulse/pause ratio. A countdown of the waiting time is displayed on the Multipad (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) or Easypad (XGPlus).

Turn-off time The turn-off time must amount to at least 60s.

Demo units If the X-ray unit is to be presented as a demo unit at trade fairs or exhibitions, it must be ensured that radiation release is blocked (see “Demo mode – Operation without radiation release” on page 1-13).

Software version The overall system software version is determined by the software statuses of the EEPROMs on the boards (see “List of software versions” on page 1-16).

Wireless phone interference with medical electrical equipment

To ensure safe operation of medical electrical equipment, the use of mobile wireless phones in practice or hospital environments is prohibited.

Disposal The X-ray tube assembly contains a tube with potential implosion hazard, a small amount of beryllium, a lead lining as well as mineral oil.

Error messages Error messages are displayed on the single-line display of the Multipad (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) or on the touchscreen of the Easypad (XGPlus).

59 38 399 D33521 – 12 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

1.5 Operation notes Tab 1

Help messages in case exposure readiness cannot be attained

Help messages are displayed on the single-line display of the Multipad (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) or on the touchscreen of the Easypad (XGPlus).

If you have to remove covers from the unit

Proceed according to section "1.14 Removing the covers".

When removing covers, always remember that direct sunlight or bright room lighting can cause system malfunctions due to activated light barriers.

Therefore: avoid direct sunlight and bright room lighting above the unit!

When attaching the covers: be sure to screw the sheet metal cover back on.

CAUTIONFor reasons of electromagnetic compatibility, be sure to fasten all screws.

Reattach the covers.

Secondary diaphragm Do not manually move or otherwise exert force on the secondary diaphragm (e.g. when removing it from its packaging).

Measurements Always switch the unit OFF before connecting a measuring instrument.

Select the correct current/voltage type and adjust the measuring range to match the expected readings.

Perform continuity tests only on units which are switched off.

If several exposures with radiation must be taken to check a measurement, make sure that the prescribed cool-down intervals are observed. They are maintained by an automatic exposure blocking function (see operating instructions).

The pulse/pause ratio is 1: 10, i.e. a 10-second pause is maintained for each second of radiation emission. The pulse/pause ratio is automatically main-tained (automatic exposure blocking).

A pulse/pause ratio of 1:20 is better for the X-ray tube.

WARNINGIt is essential that you observe the radiation protection regulations ap-plicable in your country prior to radiation release.

The test rotations triggered by pressing the T key on the Easypad and then the release button are executed without radiation.

When replacing parts Switch the unit OFF before replacing parts.

The unit must be disconnected from the junction box of the building installa-tion before replacing any parts near the power supply, power switch, board DX 32 or the X-ray tube assembly!

Please always wear an ESD wrist band to protect sensitive components on printed circuit boards (ESD).

Always check the system and adjust it as required after replacing a board or the X-ray tube assembly.

The article numbers for ordering spare parts can be found in the spare parts list, Order No. 59 38 423. The diagrams contained in the spare parts list pro-vide a useful guide when replacing parts.

1.6

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1 – 13

Tab 1 1.6 Demo mode – Operation without radiation release

1.61.6 Demo mode – Operation without radiation

release

NOTEiStarting with system SW version V02.28, the complete possible functionality of the system class is simulated, regardless of the current configuration.

4.3.

1. 2.

A

B

S2

Board DX6J6

59 38 399 D33521 – 14 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

1.6 Demo mode – Operation without radiation release Tab 1

1.6.1 Switching the demo mode ON

When operated in demo mode, the unit must not release any radiation. For this reason, you must take the following safety measures:

Switch the unit OFF.

1. Remove the cover of the tube assembly.

2. Loosen screws A and remove cover plate B.

3. Set dip switch S2 (DX6) to position 2.

4. Pull cable L5 (X-RAY) off of connector J6 (DX6).

Radiation release is now no longer possible.

5. Switch the unit ON and check the mode with theinfo menu (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) or the info screen (XGPlus).

Demo mode: ON means that: The demo mode is switched ON (Radiation release is not possible)

Demo mode: OFF means: The demo mode is switched OFF (Radiography, X-ray radiation are possible!)

Switch the unit OFF again and reattach cover plate B and the tube assem-bly covers by following the dismantling procedure in reverse order.

1.6.2 Switching the demo mode OFF

Switch the unit OFF.

1. Remove the cover of the tube assembly.

2. Loosen screws A and remove cover plate B.

3. Set dip switch S2 (DX6) to position 1.

4. Pull cable L5 (X-RAY) off of connector J6 (DX6).

Radiation release is now once again possible.

5. Switch the unit ON and check the mode with the info menu (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) or the info screen (XGPlus).

Demo mode: ON means that: The demo mode is switched ON (Radiation release is not possible)

Demo mode: OFF means: The demo mode is switched OFF (Radiography, X-ray radiation are possible!)

Switch the unit OFF again and reattach cover plate B and the tube assem-bly covers by following the dismantling procedure in reverse order.

5.Info menu for XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE

65

Mac adress : 010001200000IP adress : 192.168.15.19Subnet mask : 155.155.255.0Default Gateway : 192.168.15.1Net API version : 1Net API revision : 14Demomode : ONTube Exposures : 2217

Orthophos XG configuration

Info screen for XGPlus

1 2 3

P1______14.1__64_8

1 2 3

SYSTEM SOFTWARE____

Scroll through the list until the demo mode is displayed

2/2

1.7

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1 – 15

Tab 1 1.7 Demo mode – Repacking and transport

1.71.7 Demo mode – Repacking and transport

Panoramic X-ray unit Switch the panoramic X-ray unit ON and move it to its packing height by pressing the UP/DOWN keys on the Multipad (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) or Easypad (XGPlus).

– Bite block height = 965 mm (displayed as height on Multipad (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) or Easypad (XGPlus)

– Bottom edge of slide cover = 702 mm

NOTEiThe bottom edge of the slide cover must be at the same height as the mark-ings A in the column.

Cephalometer Start service routine S034, test step 6.

Move the cephalometer to the packing position (see page 5-143).

For information on packing the units and on the packing condition, see the relevant installation instructions.

1.

A

NOTEiIf the unit is installed with a floor stand, its height in-creases by 30 mm. The bite block height value dis-played on the Multipad (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) or Easypad (XGPlus) remains the same, however!

59 38 399 D33521 – 16 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

1.8 List of software versions Tab 1

1.8 List of software versions

NOTEiAny software combinations other than those listed here are not allowed. If the software version of any particular module does not match the overall software version, the overall software version will be marked with an asterisk on the info screen (e.g. 02.20*).

1.8.1 ORTHOPHOS XG 3 PPE

Panoramic unit Remarks

Board DX6 DX71 DX11 DX81

Overall softwareV 02.28 02.60 02.33 02.40 02.33 compatible with SIDEXIS versions

V01.61 and higher

Overall softwareV 02.28.2 02.60 02.33 02.40.01 02.33 compatible with SIDEXIS versions

V01.61 and higher


V01.61 and higher


V01.61 and higher


V01.61 and higher

Remote control Remarks

Board DX42

Overall softwareV 02.28 02.30

Overall softwareV 02.28.2 02.30

Overall software V 02.30 02.31



Sidexis XG Remarks Database

V 01.53 requires ORTHOPHOS XG 3 PPEOverall Software Version V02.28.2 or higher

old Database




new Database




1.8

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1 – 17

Tab 1 1.8 List of software versions

1.81.8.2 ORTHOPHOS XG 3

* As of hardware version BA (from November 2006) new systems will be delivered withoutboard DX41 (see also page 1-44).

Panoramic unit Remarks

Board DX6 DX71 DX11 DX41 DX81

Overall softwareV 02.25 02.57 02.29 02.37 02.22 02.30 compatible with SIDEXIS versions

V01.45 and higher

Overall softwareV 02.27 02.60 02.31 02.39 02.23 02.32 compatible with SIDEXIS versions

V01.53 and higher

Overall softwareV 02.28 02.60 02.33 02.40 (02.23*) 02.33 compatible with SIDEXIS versions

V01.53 and higher

Overall softwareV 02.28.2 02.60 02.33 02.40.01 (02.23*) 02.33 compatible with SIDEXIS versions

V01.53 and higher


V01.53 and higher


V01.53 and higher


V01.53 and higher


Board DX42









V 01.51 requires ORTHOPHOS XG 3 Overall Soft-ware Version V02.25 or higher

old Database





new Database




59 38 399 D33521 – 18 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


1.8.3 ORTHOPHOS XG 5 / Ceph

Panoramic unit Cephalometer Remarks

Board DX6 DX71 DX11 DX41 DX61 DX81 DX91

Overall softwareV 02.18.1 02.45 02.23 02.31 02.19 02.20 02.25 02.32 compatible with SIDEXIS versions

up to and incl. V01.44

Overall softwareV 02.20 02.56 02.28 02.33 02.22 02.26 02.29 02.34 compatible with SIDEXIS versions

V01.45 and higher


V01.45 and higher


V01.45 and higher


V01.53 and higher

Overall softwareV 02.28 02.60 02.33 02.40 (02.23*) 02.33 02.33 02.42 compatible with SIDEXIS versions

V01.53 and higher

Overall softwareV 02.28.2 02.60 02.33 02.40.01 (02.23*) 02.34 02.33 02.43 compatible with SIDEXIS versions

V01.53 and higher


V01.53 and higher


V01.53 and higher


V01.53 and higher


Board DX42











1.8

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1 – 19


1.8



V 01.33 - V01.44 requires ORTHOPHOS XG 5 Overall Software Version < V02.20

old Database

V 01.45 requires ORTHOPHOS XG 5 Overall Software Version V02.20 or higher







new Database




59 38 399 D33521 – 20 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


1.8.4 ORTHOPHOS XGPlus / Ceph

Panoramic unit Cephalometer Remarks

Board DX6 DX7 DX11 DX41 DX61 DX81 DX91






V01.45 and higher


V01.45 and higher


V01.45 and higher


V01.53 and higher


V01.53 and higher

Overall softwareV 02.28.2 02.60 02.44 02.40.01 (02.23*) 02.34 02.33 02.43 compatible with SIDEXIS versions

V01.53 and higher


V01.53 and higher


V01.53 and higher


V01.53 and higher


Board DX42












1.8

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1 – 21


1.8



V 01.33 - V01.44 requires ORTHOPHOS XGPlus Overall Soft-ware Version < V02.20

old Database

V 01.45 requires ORTHOPHOS XGPlus

Overall Software Version V02.20 or higher












Overall Software Version V02.20 or highernew Database







59 38 399 D33521 – 22 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

1.9 Software update Tab 1

1.9 Software update

1.9.1 Important information on the software update

NOTEiRead the information provided on the ORTHOPHOS XG Software CD and on the SIRONA dealer page on the internet very carefully. It always con-tains the latest information on the software update.

NOTEiBefore performing a software update, it is essential to read the program-ver-sion-specific information in sections 1.9.4 to 1.9.6.

CAUTIONImportant for TSA operation:For downgrading from a software version ≥ V2.20 to one < V2.20 with the TSA mode activated, the TSA sensor holder must be equipped with the transport safety device and set to the PAN position!

CAUTIONImportant for XGPlus units with serial numbers21007 (without Ceph) or 41001 (with Ceph):A downgrade to a software version V02.25 must not be performed on these units in any case. Such a downgrade would result in permanent and irreparable failure of the user interface!

CAUTIONImportant for units with the following serial numbers or higher:

A downgrade to a software version < V02.32 cannot be performed on these units.

ohne Ceph mit Ceph

XG 3 PPE 104000 –

XG 3 104000 –

XG 5 63500 83500

XGPlus 23500 43500

1.9

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1 – 23

Tab 1 1.9 Software update

1.91.9.2 Permissible software updates

Not all software versions are suitable for both system classes. The following table gives you an overview of the software version permissible for each sys-tem class.

CAUTIONIf an update is nevertheless performed accidentally, the version must be downgraded again immediately before acknowledging any error messages or executing any service routines!

Overall software XG 3 PPE XG 3 XG 5 XGPlus

V 02.17 – – – X

V 02.18.1 – – X –

V 02.19 – – – X

V 02.20 – – X X

V 02.22 – – X X

V 02.25 – X X X

V 02.27 – X X X

V 02.28 X X X X

V 02.28.2 X X X X

V 02.30 X X X X

V 02.31 X X X X

V 02.32 X X X X

59 38 399 D33521 – 24 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


1.9.3 Performing a software update

Opening SIXABCON.exe 1. Open the SIXABCON utility program in the SIDEXIS XG program folder.

Click on SIXABCON.exe (see screen shot) or

use the pull-down menus PROGRAMS ‡ SIDEXIS ‡ CONFIGURATION OF X-RAY COMPONENTS.

to open the SOFTWARE UPDATE menu 2. Open the SOFTWARE UPDATE menu.

Click the ATTRIBUTES tab and then SOFTWARE UPDATE.

The dialog box for entering the service password appears on the screen.

Entering the password 3. Enter the service password.

NOTEiAs servicepassword, enter the first 4 digits of the current system date in reverse order (e.g. on 05/24/1995, 5042 must be entered as the service password.

If an incorrect service password or no password at all is then entered, the lim-ited update menu for users will then be started. This includes only the possi-bility for an automatic update (see page 1-26).

The dialog box for selecting the installation source opens.

1.

2.

1.9

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1 – 25


1.9Selecting an installation source 4. IMAGE FILE is preset as the installation source for the software update.

5. Select the path and the desired update file and confirm your selection by clicking OPEN.

Click on NAME UPDATE and OPEN.

NOTEiThe update file can be found on the ORTHOPHOS XG Software CD. It is de-livered with each DX11 replacement board and also included in the country set. The contents of the CD can be downloaded from the Dealer domain of the SIRONA Internet home page (under Product Info ‡ X-ray Systems): www.sirona.com

Selecting the update mode 6. Select the mode for the software update.

You can select two different update modes via the index tabs:

Automatic

The software of all components is automatically updated to a higher soft-ware version.

Main version

The software can be upgraded or downgraded to the desired version.

This update mode is required e.g. if a replacement component delivered out of stock has a newer status than the prevailing overall system status. In this case, a main version update to the overall system status (displayed on the info screen) must be performed for the corresponding component with the appropriate update file (*.SUI). The module is then repro-grammed.

(For more information on the update mode, see the next page.)

4. 5.

59 38 399 D33521 – 26 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


7. Select the update mode and the update or component.

Automatic

A list of modules, their installed soft-ware version and the latest software version offered by the update func-tion is displayed in the right pane.

Main version

(E.g. if modules have a newer ver-sion status than the overall system following module replacement.)

Automatic

(Accessible without password.)

NOTEi

Modules which are connected and whose program status agrees with that of the current main program version are marked by a continuous green bar.

Modules which are not elements of the current system configuration (e.g. DX71 with XGPlus) or, as a removable medium (e.g. sensors) are not connected, are marked by a broken red bar.

If the actual status of the module could not be polled forthe update, the actu-al SW version will then be displayed as = V00:00.

If a module has a hardware incompatibility to the program status to be pro-grammed or the software version on the module is newer than the one in the update file, this will be indicated by a red triangle with an exclamation mark.

If the version of the selected update file is lower than the current software ver-sion of the unit, then there will be no display in the right window. The down-grade required in this case is possible only via the MAIN VERSION mode.

User domain Service domain

1.9

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1 – 27


1.9Starting the update 8. Start the update by clicking START UPDATE.

NOTEiBefore starting the software update, make sure that no unit movements are active (especially any diaphragm movements)! Otherwise the system may be-come inoperable in rare cases.

All of the sensors located in the unit (Pan or Ceph) must be inserted in the cor-responding slots. Exposure readiness must be deselected in SIDEXIS and the system must not be in the service mode already.

The update is started. A message box informs you when the update pro-cess is completed. Confirm the update with OK.

Checking the log file 9. Check the log file to make sure that the update was completed success-fully.

Click SHOW LOGFILE.

NOTEiIf messages such as Update of DXxx failed! appear there, please perform the update again. Repeat this procedure as often as necessary until the “failed” messages no longer appear.

7.

59 38 399 D33521 – 28 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


10. Reboot the system.

CAUTIONIt is always necessary to reboot the system after any software update. (The new DX11 version will run only after the system has been reboo-ted (see also Section 6.20.1, "Measures following replacement of boards").

NOTEiAny errors with the consecutive numbers 01, 03, 04, 06 and/or 07 displayed immediately following the software update may be ignored. If these messages appear again after the unit is rebooted, perform troubleshooting according to Section 2.5.

If anything conspicuous occurs in connection with system handling on com-pletion of the software update, please repeat the software update as the first measure. Also check whether the system software version is displayed with-out an asterisk (*) on the info screen.

Checking the program versions 11. Check whether all modules contain the current program version via the SW Update Manager or service routine S008.2 (see page 5-48). Program version included.

NOTEi

Modules which are connected and whose program status agrees with that of the current main program version are marked by a continuous green bar.

Modules which are not elements of the current system configuration (e.g. DX71 with XGPlus) or, as a removable medium (e.g. sensors) are not connected, are marked by a broken red bar.

If the actual status of the module could not be polled forthe update, the actual SW version will then be displayed as = V00:00.

If a module has a hardware incompatibility to the program status to be pro-grammed or the software version on the module is newer than the one in the update file, this will be indicated by a red triangle with an exclamation mark.

If the version of the selected update file is lower than the current software ver-sion of the unit, then there will be no display in the right window. The down-grade required in this case is possible only via the MAIN VERSION mode.

12. Open the "Extended Details“ via SIXABCON.

This generates an XML file (with the system parameters) which is filed un-der the network name of the system in the PDATA/P2K_Config folder (see also section 1.10 on page 1-32).

SW Update Manager

1.9

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1 – 29


1.91.9.4 Software update for ORTHOPHOS XG 5 to

V02.30 or higher

NOTEiIf the sensors previously used are to be used in the future as well, plug them into the slots on the panoramic unit and/or cephalometer before you begin the update.

1. Switch the unit ON.

2. Execute the software update to Version V02.30 or higher (automatic up-date) as described on page 1-24.

3. Switch the unit OFF.Wait for approx. 1 minute. Then switch the unit ON again.

Error message E6 15 04 (undefined activation data) is displayed.

4. Acknowledge the error message with the R key .

5. Perform a ceph adjustment if a cephalometer is installed (see chapter 4.4).


The process is completed.

E6 15 04 RR

59 38 399 D33521 – 30 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


1.9.5 Software Update for ORTHOPHOS XGPlus from V02.20 to V02.30 or higher







5. Open the Service menu (see page 5-10).

6. Start service routine S008.3 and confirm the unit serial number (see page 5-50).

NOTEiThe unit serial number is located on the rating plate of the unit.

CAUTIONIn case of a wrong serial number, cancel the update and contact the SIRONA Customer Service Center!

7. Start service routine S008.3 and enable the function activation. Exit the Service menu again.


9. Perform the complete system adjustment (see chapter ):

– PAN adjustment

– For TSA units: TSA adjustment

– CEPH adjustment if cephalometer is installed


E6 15 04 RR

1.9

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1 – 31


1.91.9.6 Software update for ORTHOPHOS XGPlus from

V02.22 to V02.30 or higher





– Perform a ceph adjustment if a cephalometer is installed (see chapter 4.4).


59 38 399 D33521 – 32 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

1.10 Selecting More details Tab 1

1.10 Selecting More details

Opening SIXABCON.exe 1. Open the SIXABCON utility program in the SIDEXIS XG program folder.

Click on SIXABCON.exe (see screen shot) or

use the pull-down menus PROGRAMS ‡ SIDEXIS ‡ CONFIGURATION OF X-RAY COMPONENTS.

Opening the EXTENDED DETAILS menu 2. Open the EXTENDED DETAILS menu.

Click the ATTRIBUTES tab and then EXTENDED DETAILS.

The current parameters are read from the unit and stored as an XML file under the network name of the unit in the PDATA/P2K_Config folder.

This process can take up to 30 seconds.

After the parameters are read, an editor displaying the XML file is opened automatically.

1.

2.

1.10

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1 – 33

Tab 1 1.10 Selecting More details

1.10NOTEi

You can scroll down further in the file using the scroll bar. The "Changed system parameters", i.e. the system parameters that were modified in relation to the factory setting, are displayed there. This is especially interesting after a module change. The parameter settings can thus be easily traced.

1951C59C.txt----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Changed Systemparameter -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The following systemparameters have been changed compared to the factorysettings.After replacing an DX11-PCB, the listed values must be reconfigured.

--- Changed System Configuration Settings ---Setting of system version (configured in S17.2) actual value: 0x0043Setting of head rest type (configured in S17.10) actual value: 1Setting of language index (configured in S17.4) actual value: 0x0001Setting of language-set index (configured in S17.5) actual value: 0x0002Setting of remote control activation (configured in S17.6) actual value: active (01)Setting of DX41 configuration (configured in S17.9) actual value: mounted (01)Setting of image format (configured in S17.11) actual value: enabled (01)Settings of welcome-screen configuration (configured in S17.14) actual value: 01=1, 02=1, 03=1, 04=1, 05=0, 06=0, 07=0, 08=0Settings of CEPH-adjustment (Stored by the adjustment-routines) actual value: DAlpha = 2810 | DX = 0 | DY = 35160Settings of CEPH-adjustment QuickShot (Stored by the adjustment-routines) actual value: DAlpha = 2810 | DX = 0 | DY = 35160Settings of PAN- and TSA-adjustment (Stored by the adjustment-routines) actual value: DAlpha = -202 | DX = -191 | DY = -6044 | A1 = 0 | A2 = 0 | C1 = -77Setting of ring type (configured in S34.7) actual value: 100Setting of kVmA level series (configured in S17.8) actual value: FIFO_2ASettings of network configuration actual value: IP: 192.168.15.176 | Subnet: 255.255.255.0 | Gateway: 192.168.15.1

--- Changed User Preference Settings ---Settings of patientensymbols PAN (configured in 'select basic settings')Settings of patientensymbols CEPH (configured in 'select basic settings')Setting of anomaly default (configured in 'select starting settings')Setting of default patientsymbol PAN (configured in 'select starting settings')Setting of default patientsymbol CEPH (configured in 'select starting settings')

59 38 399 D33521 – 34 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

1.11 The most important modules and components Tab 1

1.11 The most important modules and components

The X-ray system comprises the following main modules:

Slide with rotary unit

Stand

Cephalometer, arm on right side or on left side (optional)

Remote control (optional)

Cephalometer,arm on right side or on left side(see section 1.11.3)

Remote control(see section 1.11.4)

Slide(see section 1.11.1)

Stand(see section 1.11.2)

1.11

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1 – 35

Tab 1 1.11 The most important modules and components

1.111.11.1 Slide

DX11

DX1

DX5*

DX6*

DX61**

DX7*

DX81P*, DX85P*

LS*

M1*, M2*M ULS

LS

M AK1, M AK2

*) not available as individual spare part (see spare parts list)

**) not for XG 3 / 3 PPE (fixed diaphragm)

DX71

Easypad (XGPlus)

Multipad (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE)

Component Designation Function

Boards DX1 Open-loop/automatic control in general

DX11 Controller board

DX5* Headrest adapter

DX6* Open-loop/automatic control for tube assembly

DX7* Touchscreen on the Easypad (XGPlus)

DX71 LED display on Multipad (XG 5)

DX61** Diaphragm control

DX81P Digital sensor

DX85P* Digital sensor power supply

Motors M1*, M2* Linear movement of headrest

M U Rotary movement of rotating element

AK1, AK2 Linear movement of rotating element

Light barriers LS Position check

59 38 399 D33521 – 36 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

1.11 The most important modules and components Tab 1

1.11.2 Stand

* As of hardware version BA (from November 2006) new systems will be delivered withthe new version of board DX32 (see Section 1.9).

** As of hardware version BA (from November 2006) new systems will be delivered withoutboard DX41.

DX41**

DX32*

M HA


Boards DX32* Power supply board

DX41** Interface board

Motors M HA Linear movement of height adjustment

1.11

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1 – 37

Tab 1 1.11 The most important modules and components

1.111.11.3 Cephalometer

(arm mounted on left side or on right side)

1.11.4 Remote control

DX91

M S

LS


Boards DX91 Cephalometer control

Motors M S Stepping motors:linear movement of secondary diaphragm and sensor

Light barriers LS Position check

DX42


Boards DX42 Display board for remote control

59 38 399 D33521 – 38 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

1.12 Cabling overview Tab 1

1.12 Cabling overview

DX

32

/ X

2

DX

6 /

X3

DX

32

/ X

1

DX

1 /

X1

00

DX1

/ J30

2

DX6

/ J6

1

2

3

4

5

4

DX1

DX6

5

3

1

2Line filter

DX32

Power switch

Wago terminal

DX

1 / J

306

– J3

02

DX

6 / J

2 –

J3

DX

1 / J

901

DX

41

DX

1 / X

303

DX

41 /

X10

0

DX

1 / X

104

DX

7 / X

102

DX

1 / X

302

DX

7 / X

103

DX

1 / X

102

DX

61 /

X50

1

6

7

8*

9

10

11

10

DX1

DX41**

DX61

DX6

DX7/DX71

6

11

7

8/108*

9

* Unit HW version BA and higher** Board DX 41 omitted in unit HW version

BA and higher

108*

1.12

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1 – 39

Tab 1 1.12 Cabling overview

1.12

DX

1 / X

306

DX

61 /

X10

1

DX

1 / X

404

DX

5 / X

1

DX

1 / X

610

DX

1 / X

403

18

DX5

DX61

12DX1

DX81

M HA

LS sensor

1319

16

12

1316

18

19

59 38 399 D33521 – 40 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

1.12 Cabling overview Tab 1

DX123

21

38DX61

25DX41**

DX42

DX81 35

22/24***

212131

PotentiometerDX91

M U

LS SensorDX

42 /

X10

0

DX

41 /

X10

3

DX

61D

X91

DX

5D

X41

Med

ia K

onv

erte

rD

X81

/ X

100

DX1 / X503

17

17/117*

21

22

23

25

31

35

38

* Unit HW version BA and higher** Board DX 41 omitted in unit HW version

BA and higher

117*/24***

DX

61

24***

Media converter

Laser module

1.12

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1 – 41

Tab 1 1.12 Cabling overview

1.12DX91

36 39DX1

40

37

DX

91 /

X6

DX

91 /

X10

1

DX

1 / X

103

DX

1 / X

309

36

37

39

40

59 38 399 D33521 – 42 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

1.13 Illustrations of boards Tab 1

1.13 Illustrations of boards

1.13.1 Boards in the slide

Boards DX1 / DX11

To facilitate cable routing to the side, RJ 45 connectors with a 45° incline were introduced in August 2006.

Board DX5

DX1

DX11

X500

X307X503X303

X104X403

X611X607

X306X302J307J306

J302X402

X1000

X102

X103

X404

X804

X802

X803

X100

X811X812

X813

X610

X309

J309 only with GALILEOS

X3

X4 X6 X1 X2

X5X7

1.13

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1 – 43

Tab 1 1.13 Illustrations of boards

1.13

Board DX6 (not available as spare part)

Board DX61 (not for XG 3 / 3 PPE)

X2X1 X306X305

J2

J3

J6

S2

X3

F201

X501

X101

X203

X202

X406 X405 X402 X401 X400 X304 X303 X302 X301 X300 X200X201

59 38 399 D33521 – 44 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


Board DX7 (XGPlus only, not available as repair part)

NOTEiBoard DX7 is shown here only for enhanced clarity. The Easypad may be replaced only as a complete unit!

Board DX7 (XG 5/3/3 PPE only, not available as repair part)

NOTEiBoard DX71 is shown here only for enhanced clarity. The Multipad may be replaced only as a complete unit!

X104

X203

X202

X106

X103 X102

1.13

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1 – 45


1.13

Boards DX81P / DX85P (not available as repair parts)

NOTEiBoards DX81 and DX85 are shown here only for enhanced clarity.

CAUTIONIt is not allowed to open the sensor! The sensor may be replaced only as a complete unit!

DX81

DX85

59 38 399 D33521 – 46 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


1.13.2 Boards in the stand

Board DX32

up to unit hardware version AG

Board DX32

as of unit hardware version BA(from November 2006)

X100

F100X1

F101 F102 F103 X2

X100

F100X1

F101 F102 X2

1.13

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1 – 47


1.13

Board DX41

omitted as of unit hardware version BA(from November 2006)

1.13.3 Boards in the cephalometer(arm mounted on right side or on left side)

Board DX91

X100

X103X104X102

X501

X101

X202

X304 X302X201

X407

X306X307X308

59 38 399 D33521 – 48 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


1.13.4 Boards in the remote control

Board DX42

up to unit hardware version AG

X200

X201

X107

X101

X100 X105

V103

V100

V101

1.13

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 1 – 49


1.13

Board DX42

as of unit hardware version BA(from November 2006)

X200

X201

X107

X101

X108 X105 Jumper X109 und X110

V100

V103

V101

59 38 399 D33521 – 50 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

1.14 Removing the covers Tab 1

1.14 Removing the covers

13

12

6

7

1

2

8

9

3

4

11

10

5

14

1. Profile cover

2. Intermediate piece

3. Arm cover, top

4. Slide cover, top rear

5. Slide cover, bottom rear

6. Support cover, top

7. Support cover, bottom

8. Tube assembly cover, front

9. Tube assembly cover, rear

10. Slide cover, center rear

11. Sensor holder cover

12. Slide cover, front complete

13. Ring cover

14. Cephalometer cover

ORTHOPHOS XG 2 Messages

59 38 399 D33522 – 2 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

Tab 2

Contents

2.1 Help messages .......................................................2 – 3

2.2 System messages...................................................2 – 6

2.3 Status displays ........................................................2 – 6

2.4 Error messages.......................................................2 – 62.4.1 Ex yy zz................................................................ 2 – 7

2.4.2 Ex yy zz................................................................ 2 – 8

2.4.3 Ex yy zz ................................................................ 2 – 8

2.4.4 General handling of error messages .................... 2 – 8

2.5 List of error messages.............................................2 – 9

2.6 List of available service routines ...........................2 – 62

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 3

Tab 2

2 Messages

The different message texts are displayed...

For XGPlus: on the Easypad touchscreen

For XG5/3/3 PPE: on the Multipad display

on the display of the remote control

There are 3 groups of message texts:

Help messages (Hxxx)

– Help messages are caused by operator errors

– The user must take action

Error messages (Exyyzz)

– Error messages indicate system faults

– The user must take action to eliminate the fault(s)

System messages (Sxxx)

– System messages inform the user about the current operating status of the system

– The user is not required to take action

59 38 399 D33522 – 4 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

2.1 Help messages Tab 2

2.1 Help messages

Help messages are displayed as help codes (Hxxx) on the touchscreen of the Easypad (XGPlus), on the display of the Multipad (XG5/3/3 PPE) or on the remote control display (if available). The codes tell you how to operate the system if radiation release is not possible due to a previous operator error.

The following list provides you with an overview of all help codes, their mean-ing and the action required to eliminate the corresponding problems:

Help code Description Actions required

H3 01 The rotating element on the panoramic unit is not located in its starting position.

Press the R key:The panoramic unit moves to the starting position.

H3 10 The system is performing an action. Wait until the system is ready.

H3 20 The exposure parameters have not been acknowledged yet.

Press the R key:The exposure parameters are confirmed.

H3 21 The X-ray room door contact is not detected. Close the door or check door contact.

H3 22(for XGPlus only)

Quadrant for TSA exposure is not selected. Select quadrant via Easypad.

H3 30(XG 3 PPE only)

Indicates number of exposures remaining (PPE concept).

1. After each switch-on (see S017.22)2. After each exposure if the number of expo-sures remaining is below the defined warning level (see S017.23)

Request new activation code via Sirona Customer Service Center (CSC) in due time.

H3 31(XG 3 PPE only)

No further exposures available. Enter new activation code.

H4 01 The sensor on the panoramic unit is not properly plugged in or is missing.

Plug sensor into PAN slot.

HINWEISiIf this message does not disappear after the sensor is plugged in, this indicates a system er-ror. Perform error diagnosis according to Section 3.2.

H4 02 The sensor on the cephalometer is not properly plugged in or is missing.

Plug sensor into Ceph slot.

HINWEISiIf this message does not disappear after the sensor is plugged in, this indicates a system er-ror. Perform error diagnosis according to Section 3.2.

H4 03 SIDEXIS is not ready for exposure. Make SIDEXIS ready for exposure.

H4 04 The sensor does not match the selected expo-sure type

Plug in the ceph sensor.

H4 05 The sensor does not match the selected expo-sure type

Plug in the TSA sensor.

H4 06 The cephalometer is not located in its starting position.

Press the R key:The cephalometer moves to the starting po-sition.

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 5

Tab 2 2.1 Help messages

2.1

HINWEISiThe above measures clear those help messages that result from operator er-rors. If it is not possible to clear the help message by taking the above mea-sures, another type of error is the cause. To identify the error, proceed as de-scribed in section 2.5 .

H4 07 Unit supports default settings for this exposure, since the settings specified by SIDEXIS cannot be taken over.

Perform alternative program setting.

H4 10 The sensor is being polled. Wait until the message disappears.

H4 20 The image could not be transferred to SIDEXIS.

VORSICHTDo not switch the system off until the help mes-sage has disappeared.

Retrieve the exposure with SiRescue (see SIDEXIS Operator’s Manual).

Help code Description Actions required

59 38 399 D33522 – 6 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

2.2 System messages Tab 2

2.2 System messages

2.3 Status displays

2.4 Error messages

Error messages are displayed as error codes (Ex yy zz) on the touchscreen of the Easypad (XGPlus), on the display of the Multipad (XG 5/3/3 PPE) or on the remote control display (if available). The codes provide you with error type, error location and troubleshooting information.

Error code: Ex yy zz The error messages are encoded according to the following pattern:

The error messages are sorted by modules in the table on page 2-7.

System code Description Actions required

S100 ORTHOPHOS XG is started Wait, no action required

S110 Exposure cannot be performed. Quit readiness for exposure, switch unit OFF, wait for 30 sec., switch unit back ON and observe error messages dis-played after switch-on.

Repeat procedure if necessary

Status displays (for XGPlus only) Description

ORTHOPHOS is ready for exposure The unit is ready for operation.

Wait until ORTHOPHOS is ready Unit waiting on readiness for operation.

ORTHOPHOS is ready in XX s The cooling time countdown is running.

X-RAY active! Exposure in progress.

Ex yy zz

Error type

“Troubleshooting” classification for the

Location

Module, subsystem or logi-cal function unit

Consecutive number

with error ID

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 7

Tab 2 2.4 Error messages

2.4

2.4.1 Ex yy zz

Identifier x is supposed to help you quickly reach a decision on how to pro-ceed with this error.

x Description Error group Actions required

1 System warning; system message

This error group includes all errors that indi-cate still acceptable tolerance variations, or messages about states which do not directly affect system operation.

Acknowledge the error message to con-tinue system operation. If the error oc-curs repeatedly, switch the system OFF and back ON. If the error occurs again: Identify the error by proceeding as described in section 2.5.

2 Errors caused by sys-tem overload

This error group includes states that indicate e.g. temporary overtemperatures or the like. The cause of the error disappears automati-cally after a certain waiting time.

Acknowledge the error message.

Repeat the procedure step after a certain waiting time.

– If the error message reappears, pro-long the waiting time.

– If the error state persists: Identify the error by proceeding as described in section 2.5.

3 The system detects that a key was pressed during power-on

This error group includes all errors that indi-cate invalid signal states of keys and safety signals during power-on.

Switch unit OFF and ON again. If the error occurs again, identify the error by proceeding as described in section 2.5.

4 Malfunction or mechanical obstruction of unit movements

This error group includes all errors that indi-cate problems with the motor-controlled movements on the outside of the unit.

Acknowledge the error message and make sure that the movements of the unit are not obstructed.

Repeat the last procedure step or expo-sure. If the error reoccurs without any identifiable cause: Identify the error by proceeding as described in section 2.5.

5 Malfunction during the exposure or during exposure preparation

This error group includes all errors resulting from a certain system action triggered by the user which could not be performed because a required (internal) partial function (soft-ware or hardware) is not ready or fails.


Repeat the last procedure step or expo-sure. If the error occurs again: Identify the error by proceeding as described in section 2.5.

6 Error during system self-test

This error group includes all errors which may occur spontaneously and without any related operator action. They may be caused by system self-tests.


Identify the error by proceeding as de-scribed in section 2.5.

Note:Operation of the unit can be continued.

7 Unrecoverable sys-tem error

This error group includes all errors which may occur spontaneously and without any related operator action. They may be caused by system self-tests. In this case it is absolutely sure that continued system oper-ation is not possible.

Identify the error by proceeding as de-scribed in section 2.5.

59 38 399 D33522 – 8 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

2.4 Error messages Tab 2

2.4.2 Ex yy zz

Identifier yy defines the location or logical function unit where the error has occurred.

The location may be a DX module number standing for an entire HW function unit, or a logical SW function unit on board DX11 (central control).

2.4.3 Ex yy zz

Identifier zz constitutes a consecutive number with the error identification.

2.4.4 General handling of error messages

Error messages always must be acknowledged with the R key.

If failure-free operation is possible after the error is acknowledged, then no further action is necessary.

If error messages reoccur or occur frequently, identify the error as described in section 2.5 and take appropriate action to eliminate the corresponding error or fault.

In some cases, it may make sense to obtain more information on the history and frequency of errors via the error logging memory (S007) and SIXAB-CON‡PROPERTIES‡EXTENDED DETAILS (see section 1.10 on page 1-32) (see also section 3.1).

yy Location/Function unit Board

06 Tube assembly DX6

61 Diaphragm control (not for XG 3/3 PPE, fixed diaphragm) DX61

07 User interface on the Easypad (XGPlus) DX7

71 User interface on the Multipad (XG5/3/3 PPE) DX71

10 System hardware DX11/DX1

11 System software DX11/DX1

12 CAN bus DX11/DX1

13 Stand peripherals DX11/DX1

14 Digital extension DX11/DX1

15 Configuration/update (wrong software, wrong module constellation, etc...) DX11/DX1

41 Media interface card (omitted as of HW version BA, November 2006) DX41

42 Remote control DX42

81 Sensor (Pan slot: zz=1-23 ; ceph slot: zz= 51-73) DX81

91 Cephalometer DX91

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 9

Tab 2 2.5 List of error messages

2.5

2.5 List of error messages

HINWEISiIn the following table, the error codes are sorted by the location or function unit where the error has occurred. For enhanced clarity, the corresponding ID in the error code is printed in bold type.

Location 06: Tube assembly / Board

Error code Description Actions required see page

E6 06 01 General error during module initializa-tion

Please contact the Sirona Customer Service Center (CSC) to find out whether a bugfix by means of a software update is possible and per-form such an update if necessary.

1-22

If the error occurs frequently,replace the X-ray tube assembly

6-38

E6 06 02 Invalid system data or uninitialized module storage data

Perform service routines S005.2 5-29Please contact the Sirona Customer Service Center (CSC) to find out whether a bugfix by means of a software update is possible and per-form such an update if necessary.

1-22

E6 06 03 Invalid commanding of control data, CAN bus error

Note:This error may also occur in connec-tion with other causal error messages! Please also observe the causal error message! It appears only after you acknowledge the first error message.

Checking the CAN bus 3-6Please contact the Sirona Customer Service Center (CSC) to find out whether a bugfix by means of a software update is possible and per-form such an update if necessary.

1-22

E6 06 04 Data transfer error or dialog error to module (master side)


1-22

E6 06 05 Data transfer error or dialog error to bootloader of module

Note:Occurs only in connection with soft-ware update

Repeat software update 1-22Checking the CAN bus 3-6If the error occurs repeatedly or the module is no longer addressable, replace the tube assembly

6-38

E6 06 06 Module failed in TTP* (detected on master side)

Note:This error may also occur in connec-tion with other causal error messages. Please also observe the causal error message! It appears only after you acknowledge the first error message.


1-22

If the error occurs repeatedly or the module is no longer addressable, replace the tube assembly

6-38

59 38 399 D33522 – 10 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

2.5 List of error messages Tab 2

E6 06 07 TTP* timeout error(detected on slave side)

Note: The module was temporarily not addressed by the master:- Undervoltage on the master side- Procedure error in the software- Master (DX11) receives no

return commanding from the module


Checking the CAN bus 3-6Check power supply of board DX11; measuring point 3.3 V on board DX1 (see wiring diagrams).

– If 3.3 V are present, replace board DX11 6-59

– If 3.3 V are not present, replace board DX1 6-59

– Check cable L6, 3-17replace if necessary 6-91

– Check tube assembly (DX6)

replace if necessary 6-38

E6 06 08 General fault detected locally on mod-ule (slave side). CAN controller being reinitialized.

Checking the CAN bus 3-6Check software versions via info screen or ser-vice routine S008.2,

5-48

perform a software update if necessary 1-22Please contact the Sirona Customer Service Center (CSC) to find out whether a bugfix by means of a software update is possible and per-form such an update if necessary.

1-22

Replace the X-ray tube assembly 6-38

E7 06 10 Module is stuck in bootloader stage Check board DX6 (note LED states) 3-12

If the board remains in the bootloader stage...

Repeat software update 1-22


E7 06 12 Unit is not ready for operation


Checking the CAN bus 3-6

If this error occurs in combination with other errors

Unit restart:Switch the unit OFF. Wait 30 sec.Switch unit ON.

Repeat procedure and observe causal error messages.


E6 06 13 Error when writing to EEPROM

Note: Stored data may be lost

Acknowledge error and repeat procedure

If the error occurs again...


E2 06 20 Overtemperature of single tank/power pack

Wait until the X-ray tube assembly has cooled down.

Check fan function using service routine S005.4;

5-31

replace fan if necessary 6-42Check temperature sensor in single tank using service routine S005.5,

5-33

replace tube assembly if necessary 6-38


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 11


2.5

E6 06 21 Hardware signal of release button not detected

Check cable L5 (fiber optic cable), 3-17replace if necessary 6-91Replace board DX1 6-59Replace the X-ray tube assembly 6-38

E6 06 22 Broken temperature sensor Replace the X-ray tube assembly 6-38

E3 06 23 Hardware signal of release button applied during power-on

Check cable L5:

– Switch unit OFF

– Pull cable L5 off of tube assembly

– Switch the unit ON

– Perform optical check of L5:

- If light is visible: Replace board DX1 6-59- If no light is visible, replace the tube as-

sembly6-38

E5 06 30 Total radiation time exceeded If a CAN bus error had been reported before...


1-22

E5 06 31 Partial radiation time exceeded If a CAN bus error had been reported before...


1-22

E5 06 32 Minimum preheating time not observed

If a CAN bus error had been reported before...


1-22

E1 06 40 Tolerance exceeded: Preheating (VH) - nom.

Perform service routines S005.2 5-29Replace the X-ray tube assembly 6-38

E1 06 41 Tolerance exceeded: kV - nom. Perform service routines S005.2 5-29Replace the X-ray tube assembly 6-38

E1 06 42 Tolerance exceeded: mA - nom. Perform service routines S005.2 5-29Replace the X-ray tube assembly 6-38

E1 06 43 Tolerance exceeded: Preheating (VH) - act.

Perform service routines S005.2 5-29Replace the X-ray tube assembly 6-38

E1 06 44 Tolerance exceeded: kV - act. Perform service routines S005.2 5-29Replace the X-ray tube assembly 6-38

E1 06 45 Tolerance exceeded: mA - act. Perform service routines S005.2 5-29Replace the X-ray tube assembly 6-38


59 38 399 D33522 – 12 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


DX6 *) TTP = Time Trigger Protocol

E6 06 50 Undervoltage in intermediate circuit (400 V)

Check fuse F201 on board DX6 (see wiring dia-grams), replace if necessary

Check cable L3 (tube assembly), 3-17replace if necessary 6-91Check electronic fuse on board DX32:

– Switch unit OFF

– Wait for at least 7 minutes (due to electronic fuse)

– Switch unit back ON

– Check functioning


Check board DX32, 3-12replace if necessary 6-59

E6 06 51 VHmax Perform service routines S005.2 5-29Replace the X-ray tube assembly 6-38

E6 06 52 MAmax Perform service routines S005.2 5-29Replace the X-ray tube assembly 6-38

E6 06 53 KVmax Perform service routines S005.2 5-29Replace the X-ray tube assembly 6-38

E7 06 54 Basic heating pulses not applied Replace the X-ray tube assembly 6-38

E6 06 56 Error during auto-compensation Please contact the Sirona Customer Service Center (CSC) to find out whether a bugfix by means of a software update is possible and per-form such an update if necessary.

1-22

Let the tube assembly cool down for approx. 30 min and repeat this procedure.




båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 13


2.5

Location 07 (XGPlus): Easypad/Board DX7




1-22


Check user interface with electronics (DX7) or 3-12Replace Easypad 6-21



1-22




E6 07 03 Invalid commanding or control data



1-22



1-22


Note:Occurs only in connection with software update

Repeat software update 1-22Checking the CAN bus 3-6Check user interface with electronics (DX7) or 6-59Replace Easypad 6-21




1-22

Replace Easypad 6-21

59 38 399 D33522 – 14 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008











5-48

perform a software update if necessary 1-22Check user interface with electronics (DX7) or 6-59Replace Easypad 6-21Please contact the Sirona Customer Service Center (CSC) to find out whether a bugfix by means of a software update is possible and per-form such an update if necessary.

1-22

E7 07 10 Module is stuck in bootloader stage Check user interface with electronics (DX7)(note LED states)

3-12


Repeat software update 1-22


E7 07 12 Unit is not ready for operation

Note:Therefore, the error can be displayed only on the remote control (DX42).


This error is a sequential fault.



E6 07 20 Contact to DX11 interrupted during operation.

Note error message on remote control (DX42) and check log memory (via extended details)

Checking the CAN bus 3-6Check cable L9, 3-17replace if necessary 6-91


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 15


2.5

*) TTP = Time Trigger Protocol

E7 07 21 No CAN bus connection.DX11 does not start.

Note:Occurs after power-on in the start screen.

Start the detail query via Sixabcon

If DX11 responds...

Check signal path to DX7,

repair or replace cable/connector if necessary 6-91Replace DX1 6-59

If DX11 does not respond...

Replace DX11 6-59

E3 07 30 Height adjustment keys actuated dur-ing power-on

Unit restart:Switch the unit OFF. Wait for 30 sec.Switch unit ON, making sure that the Easypad is not actuated during boot-up.


Check user interface with electronics (DX7) or

Replace Easypad6-59

6-21

E3 07 31 Forehead support key pressed during power-on

E3 07 32 Temple support keys actuated during power-on

E3 07 33 Light localizer key actuated during power-on

E3 07 34 Test key actuated during power-on

E3 07 35 Return key actuated during power-on

E3 07 36 Touchscreen actuated during power-on

E6 07 40 No valid language set found Check selected language set using service rou-tine S017.5, correct if necessary

5-86

HINWEISiCheck whether selected language set is already in-stalled, perform software update if necessary.

1-22


1-22


59 38 399 D33522 – 16 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


Location 10: System hardware

*) FPGA = Field Programmable Gate Array


E7 10 01 EEPROM cannot be written. Acknowledge error and repeat procedure


Replace board DX11 6-59

E7 10 02 FPGA* of DX1 is not addressable. Replace board DX1 6-59

E1 10 03 The flash file system must be format-ted.

Note:Occurs after replacement of board DX11.

Acknowledge error

HINWEISiThe flash file system is formatted and error message E1_10_04 is displayed.

E1 10 04 Flash file system formatting in progress.

Wait until the message automatically disap-pears (approx. 2 - 3 min.)

E1 10 05 Flash file system is not ready for oper-ation.

Execute service routine S009.4 and format flash file system.

HINWEISiThe contents of the error memory are thus lost.

5-56



båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 17


2.5

Location 11: Power PC, board DX11


E6 11 01 Program sequence error Please contact the Sirona Customer Service Center (CSC) to find out whether a bugfix by means of a software update is possible and perform such an update if necessary.

1-22



Reset the entire unit adjustment (Pan, Ceph, TSA) and readjust the unit

4-3


E6 11 02 Watchdog error Acknowledge error and repeat procedure



E6 11 03 Operating system/resource error Acknowledge error and repeat procedure



E7 11 04 Implausible data in EEPROM Check the device configuration via service rou-tines S017 and S018 and reconfigure if neces-sary

5-77, 5-109

Check adjustment with diaphragm test expo-sures

7-17

If the adjustment is not OK...

Readjust the unit 4-3

If the adjustment is OK...

perform the individual system settings again (e.g. programming of the patient symbol keys; see operating instructions)

E6 11 05 RAM allocation failed Replace board DX11 6-59

E7 11 07 Unknown or invalid definition of system class

Note:Occurs during first power-on after replacement of board DX6 or DX11.

Perform actions required according to Chapter "Replacing circuit boards".

6-59

E7 11 08 The user interface connected to this unit does is not compliant with the unit's system class configuration

Install the user interface compliant with the system class configuration of this unit

6-21

E5 11 09 Internal error in program flow of board DX11

Acknowledge error


Perform a software update (bug fix) 1-22

59 38 399 D33522 – 18 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


E1 11 10 The system is operating with default settings; exposure is possible

Note:If this error occurs in combination with errors E1 61 02, E1 91 02 or E1 11 04 (see error logging memory), these additional errors provide an indication of the module involved.

Read out log memory and take the appropriate actions

Readjust the unit


4-3

Replace the defective module (DX61, DX91 or DX11).

6-5

E7 11 11 Wrong device configuration Check the device configuration via service rou-tine S017.2 and reconfigure if necessary

5-78

E7 11 12 Internal error in data management of board DX11

If the error occurs after a module has been replaced...

display "Extended Details" via SIXABCON and coordinate all further action with the Sirona Customer Service Center.

If no module has been replaced...

switch the unit off, wait for 30 seconds and then switch it back on.

Check software versions via info screen or ser-vice routine S008.2,

5-48

perform a software update if necessary 1-22


Perform a software update (bug fix) 1-22

E6 11 13 Up to HW version AG:Short circuit in radiation release signal path between board DX42 and board DX41 (cable L17).

The release signal was detected on boards DX11 and DX41, but not on board DX42.

Up to HW version BA (from 11.2006):Short circuit in radiation release signal path between board DX42 and board DX11 (cables L117 and L108).

The release signal was detected on board DX11, but not on board DX42

see section entitled "Error analysis of X-RAY control signal path" up to unit hardware version AG (with board DX41)"

3-18

E7 11 14 Wrong remote control for this unit

HINWEISiThis error message blocks all unit func-tions. Work is possible at the unit again after the remote control is unplugged and the unit is switched off and on again.

Install the correct remote control.

If necessary, obtain new remote control from the manufacturer.

(A remote control from GALILEOS or from an outside manufacturer might have been con-nected)


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 19


2.5

Location 12: CAN bus

E1 11 88 The unit is set to the demo mode

Note:Occurs when the unit is switched on.

If the user mode is expressly required...

Switch the demo mode OFF

VORSICHTRadiation can be released after the demo mode is switched off!

1-13



E6 12 01 CAN controller init error on DX1 Checking the CAN bus 3-6

E6 12 02 CAN malfunction (cannot be assigned to module)


59 38 399 D33522 – 20 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


Location 13: Stand, peripherals


E4 13 01 Actuator 1 has not reached pan home position

Check the actuator mechanisms manually for smooth and easy running.

In case of stiffness...

manually reset the actuators to the zero position and run a test cycle via P1.


Check light barrier V1_1 (X802) with service routine S015.5,

5-74

replace light barrier if necessary 6-49Check electric drive and jolt-free running with service routine S015.5 (free travel),

5-74

replace the actuators and/or spindles and 6-17replace board DX1 if necessary 6-59

E4 13 02 Actuator 1 has not left pan home posi-tion






5-74


5-74


E5 13 03 Malfunction of actuator 1 during operation






5-74


5-74


E4 13 04 Actuator 1; position counter error Check the actuator mechanisms manually for smooth and easy running.



båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 21


2.5



5-74


5-74


E6 13 05 Actuator 1 is not ready for operation This error is a sequential fault.



E6 13 07 Error when activating actuator 1 Unit restart:Switch the unit OFF. Wait 30 sec.Switch unit ON and check functioning.


1-22

E4 13 11 Actuator 2 has not reached pan home position






5-74


5-74


E4 13 12 Actuator 2 has not left pan home posi-tion






5-74


5-74



59 38 399 D33522 – 22 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


E5 13 13 Malfunction of actuator 2 during operation






5-74


5-74


E4 13 14 Actuator 2; position counter error






5-74


5-74


E6 13 15 Actuator 2 is not ready for operation This error is a sequential fault.



E6 13 17 Error when activating actuator 2 Unit restart:Switch the unit OFF. Wait 30 sec.Switch unit ON and check functioning.


1-22

E4 13 21 Ring motor has not reached pan home position

Check the actuator mechanisms manually for smooth and easy running, reset actuators to zero position of necessary.

Check the ring drive mechanism manually for smooth and easy running,

replace the ring motor or mechanism if neces-sary

6-14


5-73


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 23


2.5

replace light barrier if necessary 6-49Check electric drive and jolt-free running with service routine S014.3,

5-71

replace board DX1 if necessary 6-59

E4 13 22 Ring motor has not left pan home position




6-14


5-73


5-71


E5 13 23 Malfunction of ring motorduring operation

Acknowledge error



E4 13 24 Ring motor; position counter error




6-14


5-73


5-71


E4 13 25 Ring motor has not reached ceph home position




6-14


5-73


5-71



59 38 399 D33522 – 24 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


E4 13 26 Ring motor has not left ceph home position




6-14


5-73


5-71


E6 13 27 Ring motor is not ready for operation This error is a sequential fault.



E6 13 28 Error when activating ring motor Unit restart:Switch the unit OFF. Wait 30 sec.Switch unit ON and check functioning.

Repeat procedure and observe causal error messages


1-22

E4 13 30 No height adjustment motor pulses Check cable L16 (X402), 3-17replace if necessary 6-91Check board DX1, 3-12replace if necessary 6-59Check filter between HA motor and L16 (acc. to circuit diagram on filter) (current and voltage).

replace if necessary

Check height adjustment motor incl. pulse gen-erator,

3-14

replace if necessary 6-6Replace board DX1 6-59


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 25


2.5

E5 13 31 Unit has traveled to upper limit switch Check max. travel height with service routine S018.2, adjust if necessary

Run HA motor in the other direction with the UP/DOWN keys and reference (value approx. 1500)

5-110

Check light barriers V1_4 3-15 replace if necessary 6-49Check HA motor for overtravel,

replace DX1 if necessary 6-59


check the limit switch or wiring,

correct or replace the limit switch if necessary

E5 13 32 Unit has traveled to lower limit switch Run HA motor in the other direction with the UP/DOWN keys and reference (value approx. 1500)

5-110

Check light barriers V1_4 3-15 replace if necessary 6-49Check HA motor for overtravel,

replace DX1 if necessary 6-59


check the limit switch or wiring,

correct or replace the limit switch if necessary

E5 13 33 Height adjustment motor position counter too small for current position

Note:Error may occur after replacement of board (DX11)

Run HA motor in the other direction with the UP/DOWN keys and reference (value approx. 1500)

Check max. travel height using service routine S018.2, adjust if necessary

5-110

Check light barriers V1_4, 3-15replace if necessary 6-49

E5 13 34 Height adjustment motor position counter too large for current position

Note:Error may occur after replacement of board (DX11)

Run HA motor in the other direction with the UP/DOWN keys on the Easypad (XGPlus) or the Multipad (XG5/3/3 PPE) and reference (value approx. 1500)

Check light barriers V1_4, 3-15replace if necessary 6-49

HINWEISiAs an aid, the current switching state can be queried via service routine S018.4.

5-113

E5 13 35 Height adjustment motor; wrong direction of rotation

Check connector assignment on filter or in front of HA motor,

correct if necessary



59 38 399 D33522 – 26 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


E5 13 36 Software signal of key is applied, but hardware signal is not

Check cables L9 and L10, 3-17replace if necessary 6-91Check limit switches SE1_1 and SE1_2, 7-4replace if necessary 6-6Replace the user interface(Easypad for XGPlus, Multipad for XG5 / XG 3)

6-21

E7 13 37 Overtravel of HA motor occurs or height adjustment power transistor defective

Check HA motor for overtravel,

replace board DX1 if necessary 6-59Unit restart:Switch the unit OFF. Wait 30 sec.Switch unit ON and check functioning.


E6 13 38 Height adjustment motor is not ready for operation




E6 13 39 Error when activating height adjust-ment motor

Unit restart:Switch the unit OFF. Wait 30 sec.Switch unit ON and check functioning.


1-22


E3 13 40 Release signal applied during power-on.

Unit restart:Switch the unit OFF. Wait for 30 sec.Switch unit ON, making sure that the release button is not pressed during boot-up.


Check the X-ray signal path 3-18


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 27


2.5

E3 13 41 Release signal not applied on DX11 Check signal path for interruption according to wiring diagrams, replace component if neces-sary

Deactivate remote control with service routine S017.6; connect release button directly to DX41 (instead of cable L17) and check for proper functioning

5-78

Check release button

If the release button is functioning...

Check cable L17, 3-17replace if necessary 6-91

If the release button is not functioning...


E6 13 42 The hardware signal for radiation release is applied on board DX1 dur-ing unit operation even when no actu-ated X-RAY release button is reported via the CAN bus.


E5 13 43 The door was opened during the exposure.


E5 13 50 Forehead support; has not left home position despite movement pulses

Check light barriers V5_1 to V5_4, 3-15replace headrest or 6-19light barrier if necessary 6-49Check cable L18, 3-17replace if necessary 6-91Check board DX5, 3-12replace if necessary 6-59

E4 13 51 Forehead support; has not left home position and no motor movement

Check motor M5_1, 3-14replace headrest if necessary 6-19Check light barriers V5_1 to V5_4, 3-15replace headrest or 6-19light barrier if necessary 6-49Check cable L18, 3-17replace if necessary 6-91Check board DX5, 3-12replace if necessary 6-59

E5 13 52 Forehead support; has left home posi-tion without detected movement pulses

Check light barriers V5_1 to V5_4, 3-15replace headrest or 6-19light barrier if necessary 6-49Check cable L18, 3-17replace if necessary 6-91Check board DX5, 3-12


59 38 399 D33522 – 28 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008



E5 13 53 Forehead support; system does not block within setting range

Check headrest mechanics,


E6 13 54 Forehead support is not ready for operation




E6 13 57 Error when activating forehead sup-port motor



1-22



E6 13 58 Error when activating forehead sup-port motor

Timeout of FPGA* module on board DX1.

Acknowledge error


Replace board DX1 6-59Replace board DX11 6-59

E4 13 59 Forehead support drive defective Replace the headrest 6-19

E5 13 60 Temple supports; have not left home position despite movement pulses


E4 13 61 Temple supports; have not left home position and no motor movement

Check motor M5_2, 3-14replace headrest if necessary 6-19Check light barriers V5_1 to V5_4, 3-15replace headrest or 6-19light barrier if necessary 6-49Check cable L18, 3-17replace if necessary 6-91Check board DX5, 3-12replace if necessary 6-59


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 29


2.5

E5 13 62 Temple supports; have left home posi-tion without detected movement pulses


E5 13 63 Temple supports; system does not block within setting range

Check headrest mechanics, replace if neces-sary

6-19

E6 13 64 Temple supports are not ready for operation




E6 13 67 Error when activating temple support motor



1-22



E6 13 68 Error when activating temple support motor

Timeout of FPGA* module on board DX1.

Acknowledge error


Replace board DX1 6-59Replace board DX11 6-59

E4 13 69 Forehead support drive defective Replace the headrest 6-19

E5 13 73 Malfunction of height adjustment during operation

Acknowledge error



1-22

If the error occurs repeatedly...



59 38 399 D33522 – 30 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


*) FPGA = Field Programmable Gate Array

E5 13 83 Error while generating pulse for sen-sor



1-22

If the error occurs repeatedly...


E6 13 87 Error when activating pulse genera-tion



1-22


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 31


2.5

Location 14: Digital extension, SIDEXIS XG


E5 14 01 Cancellation caused by SIDEXIS XG Check network connection, SIDEXIS installa-tion and software version

5-48

E7 14 02 Interface version not compatible with SIDEXIS XG.

Check software versions of unit (S008.2) and SIDEXIS XG and perform software update if necessary

5-48

1-22

E6 14 03 Inappropriate or incorrect data input from SIDEXIS XG

Send in Xab.ini and raw image of last exposure to the Customer Service Center (CSC) (check the binning setting) and coordinate with CSC

E5 14 04 The network connection was inter-rupted

Note:This error often occurs when SIDEXIS is selected and the unit is not yet ready for selection.

Acknowledge error and quit service domain from unit and SIDEXIS end.

Switch unit OFF and ON again and reselect SI-DEXIS.


Perform network diagnosis in coordination with the Sirona Customer Service Center and check the setting of the network card in coordination with the Sirona CSC if necessary.(Checksum-offload for patient name with 15 characters for some network cards (prefera-bly for onboard systems))

Check and, if necessary, replace network com-ponents (PC network card, Cat5 cable, hub/switch/router, media converter, L25/26)

Check software versions of unit (info screen or service routine S008.2) and of SIDEXIS XG and

5-48

perform a software update if necessary 1-22

E6 14 05 Service of DHCP server is not avail-able.

Have network configuration of dental practice checked by the administrator in charge

Ensure proper functioning of the DHCP server

E6 14 06 The bootline of board DX11 had to be preassigned with default values.

Reconfiguration of network data via sixab-con.exe required.

59 38 399 D33522 – 32 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


E6 14 10

E6 14 11

E6 14 12

Clock signals for sensor image trans-fer not received on board DX1/DX11 (...10).

Faulty detection of sensor image transfer data signals on board DX1/DX11; nonrecurring (...11)

Faulty detection of sensor image transfer data signals on board DX1/DX11; recurring (...12)

Acknowledge error and, if possible, check func-tion at another slot (PAN/CEPH) via test image (PAN/CEPH).

3-25

If both test images indicate the error ...

- Check image signal on board DX1 (does the image LED on DX1 switch on when the ring cycle starts in the test im-age mode?), replace DX1 if necessary

5-128

6-59

If only the PAN test image is not OK...

- Check cable L13 for crushed spots and check for kinks and connectors, repair or replace if necessary

- Check board DX1, replace if necessary

- Perform service routine S032.10.In this way it can be determined whether the fault is stationary or permanent; re-place sensor or cable if necessary.

6-91

6-595-126

6-91

If only the CEPH test image is not OK...

For E06 14 10 and Ceph exposure:

- Check board DX91 and cables (L37, L40), replace if necessary


Otherwise:

- Check cable L35/L38 for crushed spots and check for kinks and connectors, repair or replace if necessary

- Check board DX1, replace if necessary


3-176-91

5-130

6-91

3-17

6-916-59

5-130

6-91


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 33


2.5

Location 15: Configuration, update


E7 15 01 Wrong memory modules. If a DRAM memory module is plugged into board DX11...

Replace memory module or DX11 6-59

If no DRAM memory module is plugged into board DX11...

Replace DX11 6-59

E7 15 02 Wrong module constellation for this unit.

Incompatible modules were used.

Refer to list of software versions

Check to make sure the correct modules are in-stalled (e.g. after replacing modules)

Perform a software update 1-22


Contact the Sirona Customer Service Center (CSC)

E7 15 03 Wrong software constellation of mod-ules.

Check software versions of unit (info screen or service routine S008.2) and of SIDEXIS XG and

5-48

Perform or repeat software update or down-grade if necessary

1-22

E6 15 04 Product activation keys invalid or not available.

Note:Occurs after replacement of tube assembly (DX6) or DX11 and possibly after software updates.

See also chapter "Measures following replacement of boards" starting on page 6-60.

Execute service routine S008.4 and confirm the existing activation profile of the unit.

5-54

E6 15 05 Unit serial number invalid or not avail-able.

Note:Occurs during first power-on after replacement of board DX6 or DX11.

See also chapter "Measures following replacement of boards" starting on page 6-60.

Execute service routine S008.3 and confirm or enter the unit serial number at the unit.

5-50

E6 15 06 Wrong or invalid manufacturer code on an module was detected.

Replace board DX11 6-59Replace the X-ray tube assembly 6-38

E6 15 07 The user interface or the remote con-trol is not compatible with the unit.

HINWEISiAn Orthophos XG5 (Multipad) or XG-Plus (Easypad) as well as an Ortho-phos remote control must be installed.

Install the correct user interface or remote control.

If necessary, obtain a new user interface or re-mote control from the manufacturer.

59 38 399 D33522 – 34 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


Location 41: Media interface card Board DX41 is omitted as of unit hardware version BA(see page 1-34).

E6 15 10 Update file for module is corrupt Obtain current update file from the Sirona CSC and perform software update via the SIRONA home page

1-22


E6 41 01 General module initialization error If the error is a software error known to the Siro-na Customer Service Center, a software update (bugfix) must be performed

1-22



If the error is a software error known to the Siro-na Customer Service Center, a software update (bugfix) must be performed

1-22







1-22



1-22



Repeat software update 1-22Checking the CAN bus 3-6Replace board DX41 6-59



Checking the CAN bus 3-6Replace board DX41 6-59Please contact the Sirona Customer Service Center (CSC) to find out whether a bugfix by means of a software update is possible and per-form such an update if necessary.

1-22

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 35


2.5










5-48

perform a software update if necessary 1-22Replace board DX41 6-59Please contact the Sirona Customer Service Center (CSC) to find out whether a bugfix by means of a software update is possible and per-form such an update if necessary.

1-22

E6 41 09 Board DX41 is installed in the unit, but not configured

Perform device configuration via service routine S017.9

5-91

E7 41 10 Module is stuck in bootloader stage Check operating status of board (note LED states)

3-12


Repeat software update 1-22Replace board DX41 6-59

E7 41 12 Unit is not ready for operation This error is a sequential fault.


Check unit configuration (with or without DX41) via service routine S017.9,

5-91

configure correctly if necessary 5-91If the error occurs again...



59 38 399 D33522 – 36 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008



E3 41 20 Release signal applied during power-on

Unit restart:Switch the unit OFF. Wait for 30 sec.Switch unit ON, making sure that the release button is not pressed during boot-up.


Check signal path for short-circuit according to wiring diagrams (see section "Error analysis of X-RAY control signal path: up to unit hardware revision AG (with board DX41)"),

replace component if necessary

E6 41 21 CAN bus connection to board DX41 interrupted.

Board DX41 cannot address board DX42 via the separate CAN bus con-nection.

Check cable L17, 3-17replace if necessary 6-91Check board DX42, 3-12replace if necessary 6-59Check board DX41, 3-12replace if necessary 6-59

E6 41 23 Hardware fault at controller input on board DX41.

Board DX41 detects a wrong signal level of the hardware signal for radia-tion release.

See section "Error analysis of X-RAY control signal path: up to unit hardware revision AG (with board DX41)"

3-18

E6 41 24 Short circuit in radiation release signal path between board DX42 and board DX41 (cable L17).

The release signal was detected on boards DX11 and DX41 but not on board DX42.

See section "Error analysis of X-RAY control signal path: up to unit hardware revision AG (with board DX41)"

3-18

E6 41 25 X-Ray hardware signal present, software signal not present

Check cable L17, 3-17replace if necessary 6-91Check board DX42, 3-12replace if necessary 6-59Check board DX41, 3-12replace if necessary 6-59


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 37


2.5

Location 42: Remote control, board DX42


E6 42 01 General module initialization error

Note:Error generated during module self-test


5-91

configure correctly if necessary 5-91Please contact the Sirona Customer Service Center (CSC) to find out whether a bugfix by means of a software update is possible and per-form such an update if necessary.

1-22




1-22






Check software version of DX42 (in comparison to overall software version) via service routine S008.2,

5-48

perform a software update if necessary 1-22Checking the CAN bus 3-6Check the signal path from board DX1 to board DX42,

replace module DX42 if necessary


1-22



1-22





Checking the CAN bus 3-6Check the signal path from board DX1 to board DX42, replace module, if necessary

Replace board DX42 6-59Please contact the Sirona Customer Service Center (CSC) to find out whether a bugfix by means of a software update is possible and per-form such an update if necessary.

1-22

59 38 399 D33522 – 38 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008






Checking the CAN bus 3-6Check power supply (3.3V) of board DX11, replace board DX1 or DX11 if necessary

6-59Check the signal path from board DX1 to board DX42, replace module, if necessary



Note:Occurs if software of boards is incom-patible.

Check software versions via info screen or ser-vice routine S008.2,

5-48

perform a software update if necessary 1-22Checking the CAN bus 3-6Replace board DX42 6-59Please contact the Sirona Customer Service Center (CSC) to find out whether a bugfix by means of a software update is possible and per-form such an update if necessary.

1-22

E7 42 10 Module is stuck in bootloader stage Check board DX42 (note LED states) 3-12


Repeat software update 1-22Replace remote control, see installation instructions




5-91

configure correctly if necessary 5-91Repeat procedure and observe causal error messages.

Check the signal path from board DX1 to board DX42, replace module, if necessary


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 39


2.5

E6 42 20 Contact to DX11 interrupted during operation

Check the signal path from board DX1 to board DX42, replace module, if necessary

Check connection of remote control,see installation instructions

Checking the CAN bus 3-6Check cable L17, 3-17replace if necessary 6-91Check board DX42, 3-12replace if necessary 6-59Check board DX41, 3-12replace if necessary 6-59

HINWEISiIf the error cannot be eliminated immediately, the unit can be temporarily reconfigured and operated with a release button located directly on the unit (see installation instructions)



Check configuration (with or without DX41) via service routine S017.9,

5-91

configure correctly if necessary 5-91Check the signal path from board DX1 to board DX42,

replace module if necessary

Checking the CAN bus 3-6Check remote control via service routine 17.6, configure if necessary

5-87


If DX11 responds...

Check the signal path to DX42,



Replace DX11 if this error persists 6-59

E3 42 30 R key actuated during power-on Unit restart:Switch the unit OFF. Wait for 30 sec.Switch unit ON, making sure that the remote control is not actuated during boot-up.


Replace remote control, see installation instructions


59 38 399 D33522 – 40 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008



E3 42 31 Release button actuated during power-on.

The hardware signal for radiation release is applied on board DX42 when the unit is switched on.

see section entitled "Error analysis of X-RAY control signal path"

3-18, 3-22


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 41


2.5

Location 61: Diaphragm control, board DX61 (not for XG 3/3 PPE, fixed diaphragm)




1-22

Check board DX61, replace if necessary 3-12

Replace board DX61 or 6-59

Replace diaphragm unit 6-34



1-22








If the error occurs during the acceptance/constancy test:

Check filter offset Bf in the "Reset values" menu. If the value is < -500 (e.g. -502), repeat the adjustment of the pan symmetry and check the position of the diaphragm.

HINWEISiFor software versions ≤ V02.22, the filter offset value must be < 500 (e.g. ± 450).

4-3

If the error occurs in the normal mode:


1-22



1-22



Repeat software update 1-22Checking the CAN bus 3-6Check board DX61, replace if necessary 3-12



59 38 399 D33522 – 42 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008



Checking the CAN bus 3-6Check board DX61, replace if necessary 3-12


Replace diaphragm unit 6-34Please contact the Sirona Customer Service Center (CSC) to find out whether a bugfix by means of a software update is possible and per-form such an update if necessary.

1-22










5-48

perform a software update if necessary 1-22Check board DX61, replace if necessary 3-12


Replace diaphragm unit 6-34Please contact the Sirona Customer Service Center (CSC) to find out whether a bugfix by means of a software update is possible and per-form such an update if necessary.

1-22


3-12


Repeat software update 1-22Check board DX61, replace if necessary 3-12




båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 43


2.5




Checking the CAN bus 3-6Replace diaphragm unit 6-34

E5 61 15 Drive overtemperature

Note: Can occur after frequent diaphragm travel, e.g. during demo operation at a fair

Allow unit to cool down.





E5 61 20 Horizontal motor malfunction during operation

Note: Can occur after frequent diaphragm travel, e.g. during demo operation at a fair



Check board DX61, replace if necessary

3-12



E5 61 21 Horizontal motor limit switch error Check light barrier V61_1 and connectors, re-place if necessary

3-156-49

Perform diaphragm adjustment 4-3Please contact the Sirona Customer Service Center (CSC) to find out whether a bugfix by means of a software update is possible and per-form such an update if necessary.

1-22


Check board DX61, replace if necessary 3-12Replace board DX61 or 6-59Replace diaphragm unit 6-34

E5 61 22 Horizontal motor movement error Acknowledge error and repeat procedure


Check board DX61, replace if necessary

3-12



E5 61 30 Vertical motor malfunction during operation







59 38 399 D33522 – 44 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


E5 61 31 Vertical motor limit switch error Check light barrier V61_2 and connectors, re-place if necessary

3-156-49

Perform diaphragm adjustment 4-3Please contact the Sirona Customer Service Center (CSC) to find out whether a bugfix by means of a software update is possible and per-form such an update if necessary.

1-22



E5 61 32 Vertical motor movement error Acknowledge error and repeat procedure





E5 61 40 Filter motor malfunction during opera-tion






E5 61 41 Filter motor limit switch error Check light barrier V61_1 and connectors, 3-15

replace if necessary 6-49Perform diaphragm adjustment 4-3Please contact the Sirona Customer Service Center (CSC) to find out whether a bugfix by means of a software update is possible and per-form such an update if necessary.

1-22



E5 61 42 Filter motor movement error Acknowledge error and repeat procedure






båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 45


2.5

E5 61 50 Sensor positioning drive malfunction during operation

Allow unit to cool down


Check connector of TSA motor and TSA-LS (V61_4) for correct position, replug if necessary

Check pan sensor holder mechanics (TSA) for smooth and easy movement, replace sensor holder if necessary

6-43

E5 61 51 Sensor positioning drive limit switch error

Check light barrier V61_4, replace if necessary

3-156-49

Check connector of TSA motor and TSA-LS (V61_4) for correct position, replug if necessary

Check extension cord to light barrier, replace if necessary

Check pan sensor holder mechanics (TSA) for smooth and easy movement, replace sensor holder if necessary

6-43




E5 61 52 Sensor positioning drive movement error



Check to make sure TSA transport safety de-vice has been removed (see TSA installation in-structions), remove if necessary

Check cable L20, 3-17replace if necessary 6-91Check pan sensor holder mechanics (TSA) for smooth and easy movement,

replace sensor holder if necessary 6-43Check board DX61, 3-12



E5 61 53 Limit switch sensor adjustment for TSA defective

Check light barrier V61_4 and connector, replace if necessary

3-153-176-49

E5 61 54 Limit switch sensor adjustment for PAN/CEPH defective

Check light barrier V61_5 and connector, replace if necessary

3-153-176-49


59 38 399 D33522 – 46 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008



E1 61 60 Voltage error on DX61, 40 V or 28 V

Note: If several drives are operated simulta-neously under unfavorable circum-stances, this may cause voltages to fall below their minimum tolerances.



Check height adjustment (soft start),

replace DX1 if necessary 6-59Check voltages at X501 on board DX61 accord-ing to wiring diagrams,

replace diaphragm unit if necessary 6-34Check cable L11, 3-17replace if necessary 6-91Check voltage path from DX32 to DX1 (X102) according to wiring diagrams, replace component if necessary

E6 61 70 Error during the configuration of the diaphragm unit

If this error occurs after board DX11 has been replaced:

Check configuration of diaphragm unit via service routine S017.17

5-103,5-105

Configure correctly if necessary 5-103,5-105

If this error occurs after the diaphragm unit has been replaced:

Check order number of inserted diaphragm unit

Replace diaphragm unit if necessary 6-34,6-38


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 47


2.5

Location 71 (XG5/3/3 PPE): Multipad/Board DX71




1-22


Check board DX71 or 6-59replace Multipad 6-21



1-22



Check board DX71 or 6-59 replace Multipad 6-21




1-22



1-22



Repeat software update 1-22Checking the CAN bus 3-6Check board DX71 or 6-59replace Multipad 6-21



5-9

59 38 399 D33522 – 48 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008











5-48

perform a software update if necessary 1-22Check board DX71 or 3-59replace Multipad 6-21Please contact the Sirona Customer Service Center (CSC) to find out whether a bugfix by means of a software update is possible and per-form such an update if necessary.

1-22

E7 71 10 Module is stuck in bootloader stage Check board DX71 3-12


Repeat software update 1-22Check board DX71 or 6-59replace Multipad 6-21

E7 71 12 Unit is not ready for operation Checking the CAN bus 3-6




E6 71 20 Contact to DX11 interrupted during operation.

Note error message on remote control (DX42) and check log memory (via extended details)

Checking the CAN bus 3-6Check cable L9, 3-17replace if necessary 6-91


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 49


2.5





If DX11 responds...

Check signal path to DX71,



Replace DX11 6-59

E3 71 30 Height adjustment keys actuated dur-ing power-on

Unit restart:Switch the unit OFF. Wait for 30 sec.Switch unit ON, making sure that the Multipad is not actuated during boot-up.


Replace board DX71 or Multipad

6-596-21

E3 71 31 Forehead support key pressed during power-on

E3 71 32 Temple support keys actuated during power-on

E3 71 33 Light localizer key actuated during power-on

E3 71 34 Test key actuated during power-on

E3 71 35 Return key actuated during power-on

E3 71 36 Service key actuated during power-on

E3 71 37 Memory key actuated during power-on

E3 71 38 Program selection key actuated during power-on

E3 71 39 Radiation time key actuated during power-on

E3 71 40 kV/mA key actuated during power-on

E3 71 41 Patient symbol key actuated during power-on


59 38 399 D33522 – 50 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


Location 81, zz = 1-23: Board DX81, pan slot


E6 81 01 PAN

General error during module initializa-tion


1-22

Check pan sensor, replace if necessary

E6 81 02 PAN

Invalid system data or uninitialized module storage data


1-22




E6 81 03 PAN

Invalid commanding or control data


Checking the CAN bus 3-6If the error is a software error known to the Siro-na Customer Service Center (CSC), a software update (bugfix) must be performed

1-22

E6 81 04 PAN

Data transfer error or dialog error to module (master side)


1-22

E6 81 05 PAN

Data transfer error or dialog error to bootloader of module


Repeat software update 1-22Checking the CAN bus 3-6Check pan sensor, replace if necessary

E6 81 06 PAN

Module failed in TTP* (detected on master side)

Checking the CAN bus 3-6Check pan sensor, replace if necessary


1-22

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 51


2.5

E6 81 07 PAN

TTP* timeout error(detected on slave side)




Checking the CAN bus 3-6Check cable L13, 3-17replace if necessary 6-91Check power supply of board DX11; measuring point 3.3 V on board DX1 (see wiring diagrams).



E6 81 08 PAN

General fault detected locally on mod-ule (slave side). CAN controller being reinitialized.


5-48

perform a software update if necessary 1-22Check pan sensor, replace if necessary


1-22

E7 81 10 PAN

Module is stuck in bootloader stage

Check sensor or board DX81 (replacement sen-sor), replace sensor if necessary


Repeat software update 1-22Check pan sensor, replace if necessary

E7 81 12 PAN

Unit is not ready for operation




E5 81 13 PAN

Error when writing to EEPROM





Check log memory (via extended details)



59 38 399 D33522 – 52 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


E6 81 20 PAN

The sensor type on the panoramic unit is not compatible with SIDEXIS speci-fications

Check with the Sirona Customer Service Cen-ter (CSC) for SIDEXIS specifications

Check version compatibility of XG software and Sidexis,

1-16

perform a software update if necessary 1-22Pull sensor out of slot and plug it back in, repeat procedure

E7 81 21 PAN

File system error on DX81P

Perform a software update 1-22Check sensor or board DX81 (replacement sen-sor), replace sensor if necessary

E6 81 23 PAN

Sensor in pan slot active on CAN bus, but no hardware detection

Check cable L13, replace if necessary 3-176-91

Check Pan LED (V500) on DX1(hardware detection of sensor)

3-12


Check connector X500 on DX1,replace DX1 or DX11 if necessary 6-59Replace board DX1 or DX11 6-59

E5 81 24 PAN

Sensor in PAN slot not detected.

Check cable L13, replace if necessary

3-176-91

Check Pan LED (V500) on DX1(hardware detection of sensor)

3-12


Check plug X500 on DX1,

replace DX1 if necessary 6-59Checking the CAN bus 3-6

E5 81 25 PAN

Error while synchronizing image data




E5 81 27 PAN

Voltage error detected on sensor.(CCD voltages on board DX81P)

Note:If this error occurs in connection with other causal error messages (e.g. E6 6160, E6 9150), take appropriate action

Check cable L13, 3-17replace if necessary 6-91Check plug X500 on DX1,

replace DX1 if necessary 6-59Check pan sensor, replace if necessary


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 53


2.5


E5 81 28 PAN

Invalid data at start of exposure.



Perform a software update 1-22Check version compatibility of XG software and Sidexis,

1-16

perform a software update if necessary 1-22Contact the Sirona Customer Service Center for the settings/sensor information in the Xab.ini file


59 38 399 D33522 – 54 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


Location 81, zz = 51-73: DX 81, ceph slot


E6 81 51 Ceph

General error during module initializa-tion


1-22

Check ceph sensor, replace if necessary

E6 81 52 Ceph

Invalid system data or uninitialized module storage data


1-22




E6 81 53 Ceph

Invalid commanding or control data



1-22

E6 81 54 Ceph

Data transfer error or dialog error to module (master side)


1-22

E6 81 55 Ceph

Data transfer error or dialog error to bootloader of module


Repeat software update 1-22Checking the CAN bus 3-6Check ceph sensor, replace if necessary

E6 81 56 Ceph

Module failed in TTP* (detected on master side)

Checking the CAN bus 3-6Check ceph sensor, replace if necessary


1-22

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 55


2.5

E6 81 57 Ceph

TTP* timeout error(detected on slave side)







E6 81 58 Ceph

General fault detected locally on mod-ule (slave side). CAN controller being reinitialized.

Checking the CAN bus 3-6Check software versions via info screen or service routine S008.2,

5-48

perform a software update if necessary 1-22Check ceph sensor, replace if necessary


1-22

E7 81 60 Ceph

Module is stuck in bootloader stage

Check sensor or board DX81 (replacement sen-sor)

3-12


Repeat software update 1-22Check ceph sensor, replace if necessary

E7 81 62 Ceph

Unit is not ready for operation




E5 81 63 Ceph

Error when writing to EEPROM





E7 81 71 Ceph

File system error on DX81C



59 38 399 D33522 – 56 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008



E6 81 73 Ceph

Sensor in ceph slot active on CAN bus, but no hardware detection

Check cable L35/L38, 3-17replace if necessary 6-91Check plug X500 on board DX1,

replace board DX1 if necessary 6-59Check Ceph sensor holder,


E5 81 74 Ceph

Sensor in ceph slot not detected.

Check cables L35 and L38, 3-17replace if necessary 6-91Checking the CAN bus 3-6Check connector X503 on board DX1,replace board DX1 if necessary 6-59Check ceph sensor holder, replace if necessary 6-47

E5 81 75 Ceph

Error while synchronizing image data




E5 81 77 Ceph

Voltage error detected on sensor.(CCD voltages on board DX81P)

Note:If this error occurs in connection with other causal error messages (e.g. E6 6160, E6 9150), take appropriate action

Check cable L35/L38, 3-17replace if necessary 6-91Check plug X503 on board DX1,

replace board DX1 if necessary 6-59Check ceph sensor holder, replace if necessary 6-47Perform a software update 1-22Check ceph sensor, replace if necessary

E5 81 78 Ceph

Invalid data at start of exposure.



Perform a software update 1-22Check version compatibility of XG software and Sidexis,

1-16

perform a software update if necessary 1-22Contact the Sirona Customer Service Center for the settings/sensor information in the Xab.ini file


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 57


2.5

Location 91: Cephalometer, board DX91




1-22




1-22







1-22



1-22






1-22

59 38 399 D33522 – 58 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008











5-44

perform a software update if necessary 1-22Replace board DX91 6-59Please contact the Sirona Customer Service Center (CSC) to find out whether a bugfix by means of a software update is possible and per-form such an update if necessary.

1-22


3-12


Repeat software update 1-22Check DX91, 3-12replace if necessary 6-59




E3 91 13 Error when writing to EEPROM


Complete unit adjustment 4-3incl. check of center position of Ceph scan via service routines S034.4 and S034.5,readjust if necessary

5-135,5-139




E5 91 15 Drive overtemperature Allow unit to cool down.



båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 59


2.5

Check complete mechanics/spindle of motor M91_3 for smooth and easy running,



E5 91 16 Motor control timeout (M91_2/3) Replace board DX91 6-59

E5 91 20 Sensor drive malfunction during oper-ation



Check complete mechanics/spindle of motor M91_3 for smooth and easy running,


Check light barrier V91_2, 3-15

E5 91 21 Sensor drive, opposite light barrier reached prematurely

replace if necessary 6-49Check cable to light barrier (L21/L24),

replace if necessary 6-49Check board DX91, 3-12replace if necessary 6-59Please contact the Sirona Customer Service Center (CSC) to find out whether a bugfix by means of a software update is possible and per-form such an update if necessary.

1-22

E5 91 22 Sensor drive timeout Check motor M91_3 incl. cable and connector,


Check cable to light barrier (L21/L24),


E5 91 30 Secondary diaphragm drive malfunc-tion during operation



Check motor M91_2 incl. cable and connector,




E5 91 31 Secondary diaphragm drive, opposite light barrier reached prematurely

Check light barrier V91_2, 3-15replace if necessary 6-49Check cable to light barrier (L21/L24),

replace if necessary 6-49Check board DX91, 3-12

replace if necessary 6-59Please contact the Sirona Customer Service Center (CSC) to find out whether a bugfix by means of a software update is possible and per-form such an update if necessary.

1-22


59 38 399 D33522 – 60 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008



E5 91 32 Secondary diaphragm drive timeout Check motor M91_2,




E6 91 40 Rotary table pot compensation not yet performed

Perform software update to version V02.25 or higher

1-22


Replace DX91, 6-59

E6 91 41 Ear plug pot compensation not yet performed


1-22


Replace DX91 6-59

E6 91 42 Nose support pot compensation not yet performed


1-22


Replace DX91 6-59

E1 91 50 Voltage error on DX91, 40V or 28V

Note: If several drives are operated simulta-neously under unfavorable circum-stances, this may cause voltages to fall below their minimum tolerances.

Check height adjustment (soft start),

replace DX1 if necessary 6-59Check cables L36, L39 and adapter, replace if necessary

3-176-91

Check voltages at X103 on board DX91 accord-ing to wiring diagrams, replace DX91 if neces-sary

6-59

Check boards DX1 and DX91, replace if necessary

3-126-59

If multiple boards report errors...

Check DX32, 3-12replace if necessary 6-59


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 61

Tab 2 2.6 List of available service routines

2.6

2.6 List of available service routines

Routine Description Required... see page

S001 Radiation without rotary movement: Fixed radiation time of 14.0 s

for tube assembly test and testing kV/mA levels

HINWEISiThis routine enables the service engineer to release radiation without having to attain exposure readi-ness for the entire system.

5-21

S002 Radiation without rotary movement: Max. radiation time selectable

Test step 1:Radiation from any position;last primary diaphragm setting

Test step 3:Radiation from any position;Primary diaphragm opened fully

Test step 4:Radiation from any position;Step filter in beam path;Primary diaphragm symmetrically widened to PAN setting

for system test, final testing, tube voltage mea-surement, reproducibility measurement, equiv-alent dose measurement

5-23

S005 General X-ray tube assembly service

Test step 2:Automatic alignment of preheating (board DX6) with display of setpoint values

Test step 4:Fan test (board DX6)

Test step 5:Temperature sensor test (board DX6)

after error messages or component replacement

5-28

Test step 6 (from V02.22):Switch off the pulse/pause monitoring

only if expressly requested by the customer!

VORSICHTThe execution of this service routine is irrevers-ible. The system is operated beyond its specifica-tions afterwards. This may result in an X-ray tube as-sembly failure. This entails a loss of warranty for the X-ray tube assembly!The performance of this service function can be proven by Sirona following a system failure.

5-34

Test step 7 (from V02.27):Switch tube assembly fan to continu-ous operation

only if expressly requested by the customer!

VORSICHTThe execution of this service routine is irrevers-ibly documented on the tube assembly!

5-37

59 38 399 D33522 – 62 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

2.6 List of available service routines Tab 2

S007 Error logging

Test step 1:Display error logging memory

Test step 2:Clear error logging memory

after error messages 5-40

Test step 5 (from V02.27):Activation of CAN bus logging in the miniweb

only after consulting with the Sirona Customer Service Center!

S008 Update service

Test step 2:Display of module software version statuses

for checking the configuration 5-48

Test step 3:Input/confirmation of unit serial number

Test step 4 (not for XG3 and XG3PPE):Initializing the function activation

after error messages

S009 Flash file system

Test step 4:Format flash file system

after error messages 5-56

S012(V02.27 or higher)

CAN bus service

Test step 2:Query of CAN status register of mod-ules

on suspicion of unstable CAN bus

in case of accumulated error messages EX yy 12; Ex yy 06, Ex yy 07, Ex yy 03

not suitable as an accompanying measure e.g. "check connector of CAN bus" or "check bus ter-minations"

5-59

Test step 3:Query of CAN status register of mod-ules

to be executed prior to service routine S012.2 if required

Test step 4:Display of CAN bus cycle on LEDs of modules

in case of sporadic failures of modules on CAN bus (after Ex yy 06, Ex yy 07,Ex yy 08, Ex yy 12)

as accompanying measure during check of plugs (wiggle) for firm seating


Rotation motor service

Test step 1:Travel of rotational drive to the Pan home position

Test step 2:Travel of rotational drive to the Ceph home position

Test step 3:Free travel of rotational drive

Test step 4:Display of light barrier signals of rota-tional drive

for electromechanical problems with the ring motor or the ring rotation system

5-67


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 63


2.6


Actuator service

Test step 5:Functional test of actuators 1 + 2

for electromechanical problems with the actua-tors or the actuator movement

5-74

S017 Configuration serviceUnit ID

Test step 2:Configure hardware version

Test step 3:Select the country group code

Test step 4 (XGPlus only):Select language index within lan-guage set

Test step 5 (XGPlus only):Select language set index within lan-guage set

for changing the configuration 5-77

Test step 6:Activate remote control

for installation and removal of remote control

Test step 8:Select kV/mA level ID

for changing the configuration

Test step 9 (V02.28 and higher):Configuration of unit with or without board DX41

for software updates and replacement of DX11

Test step 10 (V02.28 or higher):Configuration of headrest

for replacement of board DX11 or the headrest

Test step 11 (for XG 5 only):Select image format

for changing the configuration

Test step 12 (V02.22 or higher, XGPlus only):Activate/deactivate the preview image

At the customer's request: Switch the preview image ON and OFF (after update to version V02.22)

Test step 13 (V02.22 or higher, XGPlus full version only):Enable/disable the welcome screen

At the customer's request: Enabling or disabling the welcome screen (after update to V02.22)

Test step 14 (V02.22 or higher, XGPlus full version only):Activate/deactivate certain lines of the welcome screen

At the customer's request or compliant to legal regulations: Configure the appearance of the welcome screen.

Test step 15 (V02.25 or higher, XGPlus full version only):Activate/deactivate the acoustic signal for the end of exposure

At the customer's request: Switch the acoustic signal for the end of exposure ON or OFF.

Test step 17 (V02.32 and higher):

After replacing the diaphragm:

– RöV FRG: Configuration of standard for ac-ceptance/constancy test

– Worldwide: Check/accept the diaphragm configuration


59 38 399 D33522 – 64 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S017 Test step 18 (V02.28 or higher, for XGPlus only):in preparation!

VORSICHTThis routine must not be selected, since it would cause malfunctions of the unit!

Test step 22 (V02.28 or higher, for XG 3 PPE only):Configuration of PPE display

Configuration of display of remaining exposures after power-on

Test step 23 (V02.28 or higher, for XG 3 PPE only):Configuration of warning level for PPE display

Configuration of warning level for display of re-maining exposures after an exposure

S018 Set travel height

Test step 2:Limit maximum travel height

Test step 3:Undo limit of maximum travel height setting

if room height is lower than 2.27 m (2.30 m with floor stand)

5-109

Test step 4:Test of the height adjustment sensor system

Check of the sensor system for the height ad-justment (upper and lower limit switches, cor-rection switch, pulse counter)

Test step 5 (V02.27 and higher):Limit minimum travel height

Test step 6 (V02.27 and higher):Undo limit of minimum travel height setting

if the minimum travel height must be limited

S020 Service for temple support

Test step 1 (V02.22 or higher, XGPlus only):Activate/deactivate switching thresh-olds of the temple supports

in case of complaints regarding the allocation of the temple support distances to the jaw widths

5-118

S021 Diaphragm service: motor-driven dia-phragm

Test step 1:Initialization of diaphragm axis

following replacement of diaphragm unit 5-121

Test step 3:Function test of TSA sensor adjustment

Important for TSA Ready units:after replacing the sensor holder

S032 Test function for sensor in PAN slot

Test step 10 (from V02.27):Test function for sensor in PAN slot

for troubleshooting HSI problems (E6 14 10, E6 14 11, E6 14 12)

5-126

S033 Test of CEPH image path without SIDEXIS

Test step 10 (V02.27 or higher, not for XG 3 / 3 PPE):Test of CEPH image path without SIDEXIS

for troubleshooting HSI problems (E6 14 10, E6 14 11, E6 14 12)

5-130


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 2 – 65


2.6

S034 Service for the digital cephalometer after replacing ceph module 5-134

Test step 4:Calibrate center position of ceph scan (sensor side)

Test step 5:Calibrate center position of ceph scan (diaphragm side)

for adjustment problems (only after consulting the Sirona Customer Service Center

Test step 6:Move cephalometer to packing posi-tion

to repack the cephalometer

Test step 7 (for XGPlus only):Set the ring type

for PAN units up to serial number 20056,for PAN/CEPH units up to serial number 40104

Test step 8:User-specific definition of shadowing limit for C1 and C2

at customer's request

Test step 9:User-specific definition of shadowing limit for C3 and C3F

at customer's request

S037 Network service, PC service

Test step 1:Display network data

Test step 2:Reset IP address

Test step 3:Toggle DHCP and UDP boot mode

Test step 4:Manual input of IP address, default gateway address and subnet mask

for problems with exposure readiness

for changing the network configuration5-151


59 38 399 D33522 – 66 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


ORTHOPHOS XG 3 Troubleshooting

59 38 399 D33523 – 2 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

Tab 3

Contents

3.1 Error logging memory..............................................3 – 43.1.1 Example of error logging data .............................. 3 – 5

3.2 Check the CAN bus.................................................3 – 63.2.1 Checking the CAN bus with the diagnostic

function of board DX1........................................... 3 – 9

3.2.2 Jumper positions in the CAN bus ....................... 3 – 10

3.3 Checking the boards .............................................3 – 123.3.1 Checking board DX32 ........................................ 3 – 13

3.4 Checking the motors .............................................3 – 14

3.5 Checking the light barriers ....................................3 – 15

3.6 Device leakage current too high............................3 – 16

3.7 Checking the cables..............................................3 – 17

3.8 Error analysis of X-RAY control signal path: up to unit hardware revision AG(with board DX41) .................................................3 – 183.8.1 Error and help messages with remote

control installed .................................................. 3 – 18

3.8.2 Error messages without installed remote control .................................................... 3 – 20

3.8.3 Error messages with and without installed remote control ...................................... 3 – 21

3.9 Error analysis of X-RAY control signal path: unit HW version BA or higher(without board DX41) ............................................3 – 223.9.1 Error and help messages with remote

control installed .................................................. 3 – 22

3.9.2 Error messages without installed remote control .................................................... 3 – 23

3.9.3 Error messages with and without installed remote control ...................................... 3 – 24

3.10 Check data paths/Generate test images...............3 – 25

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 3 – 3

Tab 3

3 Troubleshooting

DANGERShock hazard! It is essential that you switch the X-ray unit OFF before replacing any components!

CAUTION– Switch the X-ray unit OFF before connecting a measuring instrument.– Select the correct current/voltage type and adjust the measuring range to

match the expected readings.– Perform continuity tests only on units which are switched off.– Observe the prescribed cool-down intervals if several exposures must be

taken to check a measurement.

CAUTIONPlease observe the usual precautionary measures for han-dling printed circuit boards (ESD).

Touch a ground point to discharge static electricity before touching any boards.

CAUTIONCAN bus cable: When unplugging CAN bus cables, it is essential to unplug the power supply as well.

59 38 399 D33523 – 4 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

3.1 Error logging memory Tab 3

3.1 Error logging memory

The error logging memory is a component of the EXTENDED DETAILS (see section 1.10 on page 3-4).

Data which might be expected to occur in the logging memory are explained below to help you interpret them better:

System time Entry type Entry data

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 3 – 5

Tab 3 3.1 Error logging memory

3.1

3.1.1 Example of error logging data

System time 2006-03-06, 20:13:02 : System time (clock on DX11)

Entry type [Message] : General system event

[Error] : Error event

[Error Sidexis] : Network error event

[Stringname] : Free status texts

[Stringsegment] : Additional data (string names)

Entry data [Message] Recording started : Beginning of a recording

Value: 9000 : Sequence ID of recording

Recording stopped : End of a recording

Recording cancelled : Recording cancellation

Logbook started : Corresponds to power-on of unit

Image state switched to Released : Recording has been delivered toand confirmed by SIDEXIS

Other entry data which document the occurrence of a rescue event include:

– Image state switched to Rescue

– Rescue request Sidexis Error

– Rescue request Sidexis TrackEpilogue

– Rescue request Sidexis Timeout

These entry data may also occur after "Recording stopped" or "Cancel" and indicate an exceptional circumstance. You can supply important information for error diagnosis in coordination with the Sirona Customer Service Center.

Entry data [Error] E6 07 06 : Error code

ERR_DX7_TTP_LOST : Cleartext display of error

Entry data [Error Sidexis] SidErr: ERR_SOCKET_ERROR : Details onnetwork error(for Sirona only)

SockErr: : Details onnetwork error (for Sirona only)

Entry data [Stringname] Key Act : Activation transaction

Key Ok : Activation transaction

Counter (XG 3 PPE) : Current counter reading

Entry data [Stringsegment] 7YFWDUFV- : e.g. activation orE4MMRJBW confirmation code

(for activation transaction)

061-00133 : e.g. counter (ID counter reading)

59 38 399 D33523 – 6 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

3.2 Check the CAN bus Tab 3

3.2 Check the CAN bus

CAUTIONWhen unplugging CAN bus cables, it is essential that the voltage supply is ap-plied at the module!

Measure ohmic resistance between pins 1 and 2 of connector X310 on board DX1 (unit HW version < AG) or the measuring pins CAN H and CAN L (unit HW version >= AG)

Unit HW version BA and higher:Check jumpers on board DX42 (if present) for correct setting, see section 6.20.4.Are the jumpers plugged in correctly?

Insert jumpercorrectly.

no

Continue on page 3-8

yes

< 50 Ω

120/0 Ω

Fault in the electric CAN bus connection

Only for unit hardware versions ≥ BA:Check cable L117 and manual release A2 (without remote control).Are cable L117 and manual release A2 properly connected?

noPlug in L117/manual release A2 (unit HW version ≥ BA) properly, or replace if necessary.

yes

Check jumpers for correct position on board DX1, see section 5.13.1.

• Are the jumpers plugged in correctly?

yes

Cabling fault in the connec-tors or modules

no Plug in jumpers correctly.

Check CAN plug connections from board DX1 to the connected mod-ules!

• Are the plug connections OK?(see also service routine S012.4 (LED test), page 5-65)

no Make a plug connection.

Continue on page 3-7

yes

60 Ω

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 3 – 7

Tab 3 3.2 Check the CAN bus

3.2

Is a substitute cable available?

Connect a substitute cable to each module in succession and measure ohmic resistance between pins 1 and 2 of connector X310 on board DX1 (unit HW version < AG) or the measur-ing pins CAN H and CAN L (unit HW version >= AG) each time.

Was a bus resistance of 60 Ω mea-sured in any particular constellation?

Replace the defective cable in the corresponding signal path.

from page 3-6

yes

Cyclical test using the same substitute cable

yes Replace board DX1.

no

Bypass the individual bus outputs to the modules in succession and mea-sure ohmic resistance between pins 1 and 2 of connector X310 on board DX1 (unit HW version < AG) or the measuring pins CAN H and CAN L (unit HW version >= AG) in each case.

Was a bus resistance of 60 Ω mea-sured in any particular constellation?

no

Cyclical test with bypassing of components

no

Replace the defective cable in the corresponding signal path.

yes

Find defective component or faultycable by process of elimination.

Fault in cablingor in modules

59 38 399 D33523 – 8 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


from page 3-6

Check optical CAN bus connection L6 to board DX6.("Wiggle test“ or substitute cable)

• Can the fault be traced to this connection?

no

Test connection quality of CAN bus with service routine S012.2 (see page 5-60). To do this, display the fault status of all modules in succession.

• Is there any information on bus faults in the status registers of one or more modules?

Check individual signal paths and con-nectors. ("Wiggle test" or see also ser-vice routine S012.4 (LED test), page 5-65).

• Can a CAN error message or fail-ure of the LED flashing be caused for one or more modules?

Replace the correspondingconnectors, cables or modules.

Unstable CAN bus orsporadic faults

yes

Defectiveconnection quality

yes

noContact the SIRONA Customer Service Center (CSC).

Replace optical label L6.

Fault on opticalCAN bus connection

yes

no

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 3 – 9


3.2

3.2.1 Checking the CAN bus with the diagnostic function of board DX1

Board DX1 features a diagnostic function for diagnosing malfunctions of the CAN bus via LEDs V700 and V701 (see wiring diagrams). The following table indicates the operating status of the CAN bus and the recommended error correction measures:


V700 V701 Operating status of CAN bus Error correction measures

Slow flashing Slow flashing CAN bus OK Not required

Fast flashing Off CAN error, no communication with board DX7, i.e. no display of error messages

Check cablingCheck CAN jumper(see section 3.2.2)

Fast flashing Fast flashing CAN error, no physical communica-tion with CAN bus possible; there is probably a short circuit in the CAN cable or on the board of a module

Disconnect CAN cables succes-sively (set jumper to inner posi-tion!) until the CAN bus functions again (V700 and V701 flash slowly)Replace defective module

Off Fast flashing CAN error, CAN bus TTP* disturbed by defective, constantly transmitting board (bus-heavy)

Disconnect CAN cables succes-sively (set jumper to inner posi-tion!) until the CAN bus functions again (V700 and V701 flash slowly)Replace defective module

Off Off System did not power up (DX11) Switch unit OFF and ON again and wait until end of power-up time

59 38 399 D33523 – 10 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


3.2.2 Jumper positions in the CAN bus

The jumpers are located on board DX1 at sockets X302, X303, X306, X307, X309, X500 and X503 (see also wiring diagrams).

If a cable is plugged into the socket, the corresponding jumpers must be set to the outer position. If no cable is plugged in, the jumpers must be set to the inner position.

If a jumper is not set to the inner position with a cable plugged in, the CAN bus is interrupted at this location. Modules located behind this location can no longer be connected to the CAN bus, and therefore do not function.

Up to unit hardware version AG

* Connector not plugged in for XG 3/3 PPE,Jumper must be connected to socket X306 inside for XG 3 / 3 PPE

Socket,e.g. X500

Socket, e.g. X309

Jumper outside Jumper insideModule con-nected, i.e. con-nector plugged in

Module not con-nected, i.e. con-nector not plugged in

DX11PowerPC

RS

RS

X503SUB_D

X500SUB_D

X309RJ45

X307SUB_D

X306RJ45

X303RJ45

X302RJ45

DX81Ceph sensor

DX81Pan sensor

DX61*Dia-phragm

DX41Inter-face

DX7Display

DX91Ceph sensor

Jumper

JumperOptional connection

DX42Remote control

DX1

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 3 – 11


3.2

Unit HW version BA and higher(from November 2006)

*) Connector not plugged in for XG 3 / 3 PPE, Jumper must be connected to socket X306 insidefor XG 3 / 3 PPE

Socket, e.g. X500

Socket, e.g. X309

Jumper outside Jumper insideModule con-nected, i.e. con-nector plugged in

Module not con-nected, i.e. con-nector not plugged in

DX11PowerPC

RS

RS

X503SUB_D

X500SUB_D

X309RJ45

X307SUB_D

X306RJ45

X303RJ45

X302RJ45

DX81Ceph sensor

DX81Pan sensor

DX61*Dia-phragm

DX7Display

DX91Ceph sensor

Jumper

JumperOptional connection

DX42Remote control

DX1

X103SUB_D

Cornerinterface

X103SUB_D A2

59 38 399 D33523 – 12 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

3.3 Checking the boards Tab 3

3.3 Checking the boards

Important LEDs on the boards (see also wiring diagrams)

* Board DX41 is not installed in units with HW vers. BA and higher (from Nov. 2006).

Check operating status of board.

Visual inspection:• Is the board intact?• Do the LEDs indicate normal operation?

(see table below)

Measure voltages:• Are the voltage levels OK?

(see wiring diagrams)

yes

Locate board (DX1 or other connected board) or component (e.g. cable) causing fault/error; replace component if necessary.

no

Insert replacement board and check unit functioning.• Is the unit functioning properly?

yes

Replace board or module, see section 6.

Board is OK!Continue troubleshooting acc. to error list (see section 2.5).

no

Board LEDs Normal operation Malfunction Bootloader

DX1 V100V101V109V110V610

litlitlitlitlit

not litnot litnot litnot litnot lit

DX6 V1V203

flashing at 1 Hzlit

not litnot lit

flashing at 2 Hz

DX61 V101V501

flashing at 1 Hzlit

not litnot lit

flashing at 2 Hz

DX7 V100V101

litlit

not litnot lit

DX71 V101V103V107

litlitflashing at 1 Hz

not litnot litnot lit flashing at 2 Hz

DX41* V103V202

flashing at 1 Hzlit

not litnot lit

flashing at 2 Hz

DX42 V101V103

litlit

not litnot lit

DX91 V101V501

flashing at 1 Hzlit

not litnot lit

flashing at 2 Hz

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 3 – 13

Tab 3 3.3 Checking the boards

3.3

3.3.1 Checking board DX32

Check operating status of board.

Visual inspection:• Is the board intact?

Check automatic circuit breakers F101 and F102 on board DX32.

• Have the circuit breakers tripped?

Press automatic circuit breakers and test unit function.

• Is the unit functioning properly?

The fault is corrected!

If board DX32 is visibly damaged, replace board;see section 6.20.

no

no

Check cable L4:

• Is the cable OK?Replace cable L4,see section 6.21

no

Check fuses on board DX32:

• Switch the unit OFF. Wait 7 minutes (el. discharge).

• Check fuses F100 and F103 (HW status up to AG),replace if necessary

• Switch unit ON and check function.

Is the unit functioning properly?

no

Replace board DX32,see section 6.20.

• Are LEDs V100 and V101on board DX1 lit?

Measure voltages on DX1:AA107/AA108 = 28 V ± 10 %AA109/AA108 = 40 V ± 10 %

• Are the voltage levels OK? and are the LEDs lit?

no

Board DX32 is OK.yes

Unit hardware version < BA: • Are LEDs V132 and V133 on board DX32 lit?Unit hardware version ≥ BA: • Are LEDs V111 and V112 on board DX32 lit?

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

yes

no

59 38 399 D33523 – 14 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

3.4 Checking the motors Tab 3

3.4 Checking the motors

Check operating status of motors.

Visual inspection:• Is the motor intact?• Are the plug connections OK?

Temporarily install replacement motor and check unit function.


Replace motor, see section 6.2 or section 6.3.

Replace the motor and/or fix the plug connections.

no

Motor is OK!Continue troubleshooting according to error list (see section 2.5).

no

yes

yes

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 3 – 15

Tab 3 3.5 Checking the light barriers

3.5

3.5 Checking the light barriers

Pin Signal1 GND2 3.3 V or 5 V3 Signal4 GND

Is the plug connection between the light barrier and the board OK?

Is a replacement light barrieravailable?

Temporarily install replacement light barrier and check unit functioning.


Replace light barrier,see section 6.19.

Clean plug; in case of a defect, fix or replace defective component,see section 6.

no

Actuate light barrier manually and check signal change on pin 3 of light barrier connector:

Note:When inspecting the light barrier, check to see whether ambient light can influence its function.

• Are the signals OK?

no

no

Replace light barrier,see section 6.19.

Light barrier is OK!Continue troubleshooting acc. to error list (see section 2.5).

no yes

yes

yes

yes

59 38 399 D33523 – 16 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

3.6 Device leakage current too high Tab 3

3.6 Device leakage current too high

Pull tube assembly cable L3 off of connector X3 on board DX6 and per-form measurement of leakage current according to sect. 7.14.

• Is the leakage current OK?

Check the cable shields (see section 7.12) and check the cables for visible signs of damage.

• Are the cable shields andcables OK?

yes

Replace tube assembly, see section 6.14.

no

yes

Replace board DX32,see section 6.1.2.

Fix cable shields and/or replace any defective cables.

no

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 3 – 17

Tab 3 3.7 Checking the cables

3.7

3.7 Checking the cables

NOTEiYou can use a standard Cat5 cable as a test cable for L8*, L10, L12, L40 and L37. Caution! This cable must not be permanently installed.

NOTEiMost cables have the same plug at both ends and are connected 1:1 (see also section "1.12 Cabling overview').

* up to unit hardware version AG

Is the cable plug connection OK?

For shielded cables:Is the cable shield connection OK?

yes

If a substitute cable is available, temporarily connect it and check unit functioning.


yes

Replace cable, see section 6.21.

Clean plug; in case of a defect, fix plug, replace cable if necessary, see section 6.21.

no

Repair shield, replace cable if necessary, see section 6.21.

no

Locate module causing fault and replace component,see section 6.

no

yes

59 38 399 D33523 – 18 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

3.8 Error analysis of X-RAY control signal path: up to unit hardware revision AG

3.8 Error analysis of X-RAY control signal path: up to unit hardware revision AG(with board DX41)

3.8.1 Error and help messages with remote control installed

E3 42 31 + E3 13 40 + E3 41 20 occur in combination after the unit is switched ON with the door contact closed.

E3 42 31occurs individually after the unit is switched ON.

yesno

Was the release but-ton actuated during switch ON?

Switch the unit OFF and then ON again. Make sure that the release button is not actuated during switch-ON.

Do the error messages recur?

yes

Short circuit in the coiled cable of the release button or on the membrane keyboard of the remote control:• Replace release button• Replace remote control

Hardware fault on display board DX42 or short circuit in coiled cable of release button or on membrane keyboard of the remote control:• Replace release button (unit hardware version < BA) • Replace remote control (see section 6.20)

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 3 – 19

Tab 3 3.8 Error analysis of X-RAY control signal path: up to unit hardware revision AG

3.8


E3 41 24occurs individually during operation of unit.


no

Door contact open?

• Close door contact• Switch unit OFF and ON again

Does the error message recur?

yes

yes

Short circuit in signal path between boards DX41 and DX42 during switch-ON:• Replace cable L17, (see section 6.21)• Replace remote control• Replace board DX41 (see section 6.20)

Short circuit in signal path between boards DX41 and DX42 during switch-ON:• Replace cable L17, (see section 6.21)• Replace board DX42 (see section 6.20)• Replace board DX41 (see section 6.20)

no

Was the door opened during the exposure?

yes

• Check door contact, repair if necessary• Replace cable L17, (see section 6.21)• Replace board DX42 (see section 6.20)• Replace board DX41 (see section 6.20)

• Acknowledge error message with R key

• Close door contact• Repeat the exposure

59 38 399 D33523 – 20 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

3.8 Error analysis of X-RAY control signal path: up to unit hardware revision AG

H321is triggered at start of exposure.

3.8.2 Error messages without installed remote control

E3 13 40 + E3 41 20 occur in combination after the unit is switched ON.

Door contact open?

• Close door contact• Start exposure again

Is the error message displayed again?

yes

yesno

• Check door contact, repair if necessary• Replace cable L17, (see section 6.21)

yes

yesno




yes

Short circuit in coiled cable of release button:• Replace release button (unit hardware version < BA)• Replace board DX41 (see section 6.20)

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 3 – 21

Tab 3 3.8 Error analysis of X-RAY control signal path: up to unit hardware revision AG

3.8

3.8.3 Error messages with and without installed remote control


E3 41 20 Faulty detection of release signal by DX41 processor when the unit is switched ON.


E6 41 23 Faulty detection of release signal by DX41 processor during operation of the unit.


E6 41 25 The DX41 detects no release signal when the exposure is started.


E3 13 40 Short circuit in signal path between boards DX11 and DX41 during switch-ON.

Replace cable L17 6-91Replace board DX41

Replace board DX1

Replace board DX11

6-59

E6 13 41 Release signal missing on board DX11 at start of exposure.


Replace board DX1

Replace board DX11

6-59

E3 13 42 Short circuit in signal path between boards DX11 and DX41 during opera-tion of the unit.


Replace board DX1

Replace board DX11

6-59

59 38 399 D33523 – 22 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

3.9 Error analysis of X-RAY control signal path: unit HW version BA or higher

3.9 Error analysis of X-RAY control signal path: unit HW version BA or higher(without board DX41)

3.9.1 Error and help messages with remote control installed

E3 42 31 + E3 13 40 occur in combination after the unit is switched ON with the door contact closed.



yesno

Was release button A2 actuated during switch-ON?

Switch the unit OFF and then ON again. Make sure that release button A2 is not actuat-ed during switch-ON.


yes

Short circuit in coiled cable of release button A2 or on membrane keyboard of remote control:• Replace coiled cable• Replace membrane keyboard of remote control• Replace display board DX42 of remote control

(see section 6.20)

Hardware fault on display board DX42 or short circuit in coiled cable of release button A2 or on membrane keyboard of remote control:• Replace release button A2 (unit hardware version ≥ BA)• Replace remote control (see section 6.20)

no

Was the door opened during the exposure?

yes

• Check door contact, repair if necessary• Replace cable L117, (see section 6.21)• Replace remote control (see section 6.20)

• Acknowledge error message with R key

• Close door contact• Repeat the exposure

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 3 – 23

Tab 3 3.9 Error analysis of X-RAY control signal path: unit HW version BA or higher

3.9

H321is triggered at start of exposure.

3.9.2 Error messages without installed remote control

E3 13 40occurs individually after unit is switched ON.

Door contact open?

• Close door contact• Start exposure again

Is the error message displayed again?

yes

yesno

• Check door contact, repair if necessary• Replace cable L117 (see section 6.21)

yesno




yes

Short circuit in coiled cable of release button:• Replace release button A2 (unit hardware

version ≥ BA)

Short circuit in cable L108:Replace cable L108, (see section 6.21)

59 38 399 D33523 – 24 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

3.9 Error analysis of X-RAY control signal path: unit HW version BA or higher

3.9.3 Error messages with and without installed remote control


E3 13 40 Short circuit in signal path between release button A2 and board DX11 during switch-ON.

Replace cable L117 or L108 6-91Replace board DX1

Replace board DX116-59

E6 13 41 Release signal missing on board DX11 at start of exposure.



E3 13 42 Short circuit in signal path between release button A2 and board DX11 during unit operation.



59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 3 – 25

Tab 3 3.10 Check data paths/Generate test images

3.10

3.10 Check data paths/Generate test images

SIDEXIS XG must be installed and configured before you begin checking the data paths.

NOTEiFor a panoramic test image, the panoramic mode must be activated on the unit; for a ceph test image, the cephalometric mode must be activated; for a TSA test image, the TS mode must be selected (see operating instructions). Generate the test images for the different operating modes in succession.

1. Select constancy test in SIDEXIS XG: Select EXTRAS ‡ CONSTANCY TEST

The typical SIDEXIS user interface is started. Constancy test is already preset.

2. Starting the exposure mode:Click XCXP

The dialog box for selecting the X-ray device opens.

NOTEiIf no X-ray device has been configured yet in SIDEXIS XG, the password input dialog box will appear instead of the dialog box for selecting the X-ray device.

3. Select/confirm the X-ray device:Select e.g. KAMMER4 and click OK

The dialog box for selecting the test type appears on the screen.

4. Select/confirm the test type:Click SERVICE EXPOSURE

The dialog box for selecting the service exposure appears on the screen.

59 38 399 D33523 – 26 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

3.10 Check data paths/Generate test images Tab 3

5. Select/confirm the service exposure:Click DIGITAL TEST PATTERN

– If several different X-ray components are available, a dialog box for selecting the X-ray component appears on the screen. In this case, select/confirm the required component.

– If only one X-ray component is available, the exposure readiness dia-log box appears on the screen and shows the status of the exposure.

NOTEiDuring operation in the service mode, the unit switches from the user mode to the PC service mode logged by the PC.

Once the exposure is completed, the unit switches back to the user mode.

6. Take an exposure:

– Press the R key on the Easypad (XGPlus) or Multipad (XG 5/3/3 PPE) to move the unit back to its starting position.

– Press the release button. Hold down the button until the exposure has been completed.

NOTEiA service message box indicates whether the generated test image is correct. Acknowledge this message with OK. The test image is displayed on the screen.T R

�

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 3 – 27

Tab 3 3.10 Check data paths/Generate test images

3.10

7. Check the images according to the following criteria:

– Tile structure of the existing segments

NOTEiTo facilitate checking, you may adjust the image contrast and brightness in SIDEXIS.

– Linear grayscale gradient

– Intensity steps clearly recognizable

– No image artifacts detectable

PAN test image CEPH test image

TSA test image

59 38 399 D33523 – 28 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

3.10 Check data paths/Generate test images Tab 3

ORTHOPHOS XG 4 Adjustment

59 38 399 D33524 – 2 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

Tab 4

Contents

4.1 Important information concerning adjustment .........4 – 3

4.2 Diaphragm/system adjustment menu......................4 – 5

4.3 Adjusting the panoramic X-ray unit .........................4 – 94.3.1 Pan needle phantom ............................................ 4 – 9

4.3.2 Dismantling the fixed diaphragm(XG 3 / 3 PPE only) ............................................ 4 – 10

4.3.3 Adjusting the pan sensor (XGPlus / XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) ................................. 4 – 12

4.3.4 Adjusting the (motorized) pan diaphragm (XGPlus / XG 5) ................................................... 4 – 22

4.3.5 Adjusting the (fixed) pan diaphragm (XG 3 / 3 PPE).................................................... 4 – 32

4.3.6 Adjusting the pan filter (XGPlus / XG 5, not for XG 3 / 3 PPE)................. 4 – 39

4.3.7 Adjusting the pan symmetry (XGPlus / 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) ....................................... 4 – 45

4.3.8 Checking and adjusting the touchscreen (XGPlus only)....................................................... 4 – 54

4.4 Adjusting the cephalometer (XGPlus/ XG 5, if ceph is installed) ........................4 – 564.4.1 Check the ring type

(for XGPlus with arm on left side only) ................ 4 – 56

4.4.2 Ceph test phantom ............................................. 4 – 57

4.4.3 Adjusting the ceph primary diaphragm............... 4 – 58

4.4.4 Adjusting the ceph fixed point of rotation ........... 4 – 68

4.4.5 Adjusting the ceph main X-ray beam direction... 4 – 81

4.4.6 Adjusting the ceph quickshot(XGPlus full version only) .................................... 4 – 90

4.4.7 Checking and adjusting the alignment of the ear plugs................................................. 4 – 100

4.5 TSA sensor adjustment(XGPlus full version only) .....................................4 – 107

4.6 Resetting the adjustment (XGPlus / 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) ........................................4 – 115

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 3

Tab 4 4.1 Important information concerning adjustment

4.1

4 Adjustment4.1 Important information concerning adjustment

WARNINGWhen performing the following tests, be sure to observe the radiation protection regulations applicable in your country (see operating instruc-tions).

CAUTIONBefore starting the service routines for system adjustment, make sure that no unit movements are active (especially diaphragm travels)! Otherwise the sys-tem may become inoperable in rare cases.

NOTEi“Radiation” is signaled with the message “X-RAY active!” (only for XGPlus), a beep and an X-RAY LED.

NOTEiBe sure to take screenshots of the PAN - RESET ADJUSTMENT and CEPH - RESET ADJUSTMENT menus before and after the adjustment (see sec-tion 4.6) and save them to the C:\SIDEXIS\XGRAW directory along with the time and date!

Coarse and precision adjustment using the Diaphragm/system adjustment menu in SIDEXIS XG

NOTEiThe Pan - Sensor adjustment, Pan - Diaphragm and Ceph - Fixed point of ro-tation submenus provide a coarse adjustment and a precision adjustment (precision adjustment is preset). Always try to use precision adjustment first when adjusting the unit. In most cases, previous coarse adjustment is not necessary.

With SIDEXIS Version V02.20 and higher, a message window indicates when a coarse adjustment is necessary.

Only if you cannot achieve your goal with precision adjustment, e.g. if the exposed area is completely outside the image field, should you perform a coarse and then a precision adjustment.

If a coarse adjustment proves necessary, deactivate the PRECISION ADJUSTMENT check box and follow the adjustment steps de-scribed in the present chapter to perform a coarse adjustment.

The steps and correction procedure required for coarse adjustment are iden-tical to those for precision adjustment. The only difference between the two modes is the size of the image area considered. Furthermore, there are fewer auxiliary lines in the coarse adjustment mode.

59 38 399 D33524 – 4 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

4.1 Important information concerning adjustment Tabs 4

Default values in the Diaphragm/system adjustment menu in SIDEXIS XG

During the adjustment, the default adjustment values are displayed in the text boxes of the Diaphragm/system adjustment menu.

First perform the adjustment with these default values. If you do not attain the desired result via this automatic adjustment, you should determine the adjust-ment values manually by measuring the exposure with the SIDEXIS measur-ing ruler and then overwrite the default values in the menu.

This procedure is described in the following sections.

Return ring travel with unit SW version V02.27 and higher

Starting with unit version V02.27, return ring travel is automatically performed during service operation (during adjustment). Actuation of the R key before or after each adjustment exposure (as described in the following chapters) can thus be omitted.

NOTEiIt is not possible to select a new exposure during the return ring travel (incl. resetting of the actuators)!If a selection is made during this period, the error message "It is not possible to set the adjustment values at this time" or “No exposure can be taken" appears. Acknowledge the error message and wait until the return ring travel has been completed.

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 5

Tab 4 4.2 Diaphragm/system adjustment menu

4.2

4.2 Diaphragm/system adjustment menu

Menu: Diaphragm/system adjustment

The DIAPHRAGM/SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT menu guides you through the adjustment of the panoramic unit and the cephalometer. This service routine is started from SIDEXIS XG:

EXTRAS CONSTANCY TEST XCXP SELECT X-RAY DEVICE SERVICE EXPOSURE DIAPHRAGM/SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT

NOTEiThe DIAPHRAGM/SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT menu is password-protected. As password, enter the first four digits of the current system date (PC) in reverse order.

Example: On 05/30/2004, the service password is 5003

NOTEiWhen you open the DIAPHRAGM/SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT menu, the unit switches from the user mode to the PC service mode logged by the PC.

ORTHOPHOS XGPlus / Ceph:This mode is indicated by the PC service screen displayed on the Easypad.In the PC service mode, the control options that are available on the Easypad are determined by SIDEXIS and the currently selected service routine. Gen-eral control of the unit by means of the Easypad (as in the user mode) is not possible in this mode.

ORTHOPHOS XG 5 / Ceph bzw. XG 3 / 3 PPE:This mode is indicated by the SERVICE reading on the Multipad.In the PC service mode, the Multipad control options are determined by SIDEXIS and the currently selected service routine. General control of the unit by means of the Multipad (as in the user mode) is not possible in this mode.

XGPlus

XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE

SERVICE

59 38 399 D33524 – 6 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

4.2 Diaphragm/system adjustment menu Tabs 4

NOTEiThe tabs of the DIAPHRAGM/SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT menu and several check-boxes corresponding to the system version are present and activated in the software (i.e. visible) depending on the system configuration. The following description of the menus is always based in the maximum configuration of the comfort class (XGPlus).

The DIAPHRAGM/SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT menu has 12 submenus:

Pan - Sensor adjustment (XGPlu s/ XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE)

Pan - Diaphragm or Pan - Fixed Diagphragm (XGPlus / XG 5 or XG 3 / 3 PPE)

Pan - Filter (XGPlus / XG 5)

Pan - Symmetry (XGPlus / XG 5/ 3 / 3 PPE)

Ceph - Primary diaphragm (XGPlus / XG 5)

Ceph - Fixed point of rotation (XGPlus / XG 5)

Ceph - Main X-ray beam direction (XGPlus / XG 5)

Ceph quickshot (XGPlus full version only)

TSA sensor (XGPlus full version only)

Pan - Reset adjustment (XGPlus / XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE)

Ceph - Reset adjustment (XGPlus / XG 5)

Sirona Service Sheet (for internal use only)

You can change between the individual submenus by clicking the menu tabs with the mouse. To quit the DIAPHRAGM/SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT menu, click CANCEL.

The following submenus are required for pan adjustment (XGPlus, XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE):

Pan - Sensor adjustment: see page 4-12

Pan - Diaphragm or Pan - Fixed diaphragm: see page 4-22 (XGPlus / XG 5) or page 4-32 (XG 3 / 3 PPE)

Pan - Filter (not for XG 3 / 3 PPE): see page 4-39

Pan - Symmetry: see page 4-45

For the ceph adjustment (with XGPlus and XG 5) you require the following submenu:

Ceph - Primary diaphragm (see page 4-58)

Ceph - Fixed point of rotation (see page 4-68)

Ceph - Main X-ray beam direction (see page 4-81)

Ceph quickshot (XGPlus full version only, see page 4-90)

For the TSA adjustment (XGPlus full version only) you need the submenu:

TSA - Sensor (see page 4-107)

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 7

Tab 4 4.2 Diaphragm/system adjustment menu

4.2

Direction of displacement of the exposed image area/Information on the pictographs in the system adjustment menu

The Pan - Sensor adjustment, Pan - Filter and Pan - Symmetry submenus each contain a pictographic representation of the expected adjustment image to help you perform the adjustment. The shifting directions indicated by the plus and minus signs located below and next to the pictograph refer to shifting of the exposed image area in the direction of the stationary auxiliary lines (see the following example):

In the example the exposed image area is offset to the left by the value Sx and upward by the value Sy. In order to shift the image area so that it comes to lie inside the auxiliary lines, you must enter …

Sx (shift to the right) with a positive sign

Sy (shift downward) with a negative sign

in the text boxes of the submenu.

NOTEiFor system version XG 3/3 PPE: The pan fixed diaphragm of the XG 3/3 PPE system version cannot be adjusted via the software, i.e. the pan fixed diaphragm must be adjusted by moving it mechanically (see section 4.3.5).

Generally speaking, the exposed image area must always be shifted toward the auxiliary lines:

- Shift to the right or upward: Enter the value(measured offset from the auxiliary line) with a positive sign (XGPlus / XG 5) or mechanicallyshift the diaphragm to to the right or upward (XG 3 / 3 PPE)

– Shift to the left or downward: Enter the value (measured offset from the auxiliary line) with a negative sign (XGPlus / XG 5) or mechanicallyshift the diaphragm to the left or downward (XG 3 / 3 PPE)

Sx

Sy+

- +-

59 38 399 D33524 – 8 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

4.2 Diaphragm/system adjustment menu Tabs 4

Displays during the adjustment procedure

During the adjustment procedure, different service routines are started from SIDEXIS; they are displayed one after the other on the Easypad touchscreen (XGPlus) or the Multipad display (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE).

...ORTHOPHOS XGPlus / Ceph

In addition to the relevant parameters, the Easypad touchscreen shows the service routines which are currently executed as well as different help mes-sages (see section 2.1).

...ORTHOPHOS XG 5 / Ceph or XG 3 / 3 PPE

In addition to the relevant parameters, the single-line display of the Multipad shows different help messages (see section 2.1).

Help messages during the adjustment procedure

The most frequent help and status displays during adjustment are the follow-ing:

Help messages H301: Move panoramic unit into starting position ‡ Press the R key

H401: Plug the sensor into the PAN slot

H402: Plug the sensor into the CEPH slot

H406: Move cephalometer into starting position ‡ Press the R key

Status displays ORTHOPHOS is ready for exposure

Exposure not possible

Wait until ORTHOPHOS is ready

ORTHOPHOS is ready in XX s

X-RAY active!

NOTEiIf any other help or error messages are displayed during adjustment, please follow the instructions provided in chapter 2.

R

R

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 9

Tab 4 4.3 Adjusting the panoramic X-ray unit

4.3

4.3 Adjusting the panoramic X-ray unit

4.3.1 Pan needle phantom

Accessory: Pan needle phantom

In order to perform the pan sensor adjustment and the symmetry adjust-ment you must insert the needle phantom (A) in the bite block holder of the panoramic X-ray unit.

The needle phantom must be removed from the bite block holder for the PANdiaphragm and for the TSA adjustment.

CAUTIONIt is essential that the needle phantom is removed from bite block holder of the panoramic X-ray unit again before a Ceph exposure is taken; otherwise the phantom may collide with the sensor.

NOTEiWhen fitting the needle phantom, make sure that it is correctly oriented. For the adjustment of the X-ray unit, the phantom must be fitted in such a way that the needles point upward.

A

Needles onTop side

59 38 399 D33524 – 10 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

4.3 Adjusting the panoramic X-ray unit Tabs 4

4.3.2 Dismantling the fixed diaphragm(XG 3 / 3 PPE only)

1.

2.

B B B B

Version delivered until approx. end of 2006 Version delivered after approx. end of 2007

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 11


4.3

The fixed diaphragm must be dismantled in order to perform the sensor adjustment of the ORTHOPHOS XG 3/3 PPE X-ray unit. To do this, proceed as follows:

1. Remove the covers:

– Tube assembly, front

– Tube assembly, rear

2. Loosen the two screws (B) (approx. 2-3 turns) and push the fixed diaphragm upward.

Assemble by following the same procedure in reverse order.

59 38 399 D33524 – 12 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


4.3.3 Adjusting the pan sensor (XGPlus / XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE)

Menu: Diaphragm/system adjustment ‡ Pan - Sensor adjustment

Preparations Plug the sensor into the sensor slot on the panoramic X-ray unit.

Insert the needle phantom in the bite block holder of the panoramic X-ray unit (see page 4-9).

ORTHOPHOS XG 3 / 3 PPE:

The fixed diaphragm must be dismantled prior to the sensor adjustment for the ORTHOPHOS XG 3 / 3 PPE system version (see page 4-10).

Opening PAN - SENSOR ADJUSTMENT 1. Open the PAN - SENSOR ADJUSTMENT submenu (see section 4.2).

NOTEiThe menu provides a precision adjustment and a coarse adjustment (precision adjustment is preset). Perform a precision adjustment first. In most cases, previous coarse adjustment is not necessary.

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 13


4.3

Making the unit ready for exposure: 2. Make SIDEXIS XG ready for exposure:

Click IMAGE ACQUISITION

SIDEXIS screen The exposure dialog box showing the exposure status appears in SIDEXIS.

XGPlus: Display on the Easypad The Easypad touchscreen shows service routine S010.1 as well as the related exposure parameters.

XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE: Display on the Multipad The single-line display of the Multipad shows the exposure parameters of service routine S010.1.

1

2

3

+- 60 kV/3 mA

0.60 s

S10

1

1 2 3

60/3____0.60____

59 38 399 D33524 – 14 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


Starting the exposure 3. Take an exposure (60kV/3mA; 0.60 s):

– Press the R key to move the unit back to the starting position.

XGPlus:

The procedure is completed when the status message “ORTHOPHOS is ready for exposure“ appears on the touchscreen and the exposure parameters of service routine S010.1 are displayed.

XG5 / 3 / 3 PPE:

The procedure is completed when the exposure parameters of service routine S010.1 are displayed and the progress indicator disappears.

– Press the release button. Hold down the release button until image ac-quisition is completed and the preview image appears in the exposure dialog box.

Evaluating the X-ray image 4. Evaluate the X-ray image:

– The three needle images must lie in the center of the exposed ar-eas and inside the auxiliary lines (A).

NOTEiIf these criteria are not fulfilled (B), the pan sensor must be adjusted.

R

WAIT!UNTIL UNIT IS IN STARTING POSITION

Adjustment: ok

A B

Adjustment: not ok

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 15


4.3

Coarse or precision adjustment? Sensor adjustment can usually be performed directly via precision adjust-ment. Only in exceptional cases, e.g. if one or several needles are completely outside of the image field C in an image acquired with the PRECISION ADJUSTMENT presetting, is it necessary to perform a coarse adjustment prior to precision adjustment D. To do this, deactivate the PRECISION ADJUST-MENT check box (see page 4-3) and then perform a coarse adjustment pro-ceeding in the same way as for precision adjustment. The only difference between coarse and precision adjustment is the size of the image area con-sidered. Furthermore, there are fewer auxiliary lines in the coarse adjustment mode.

X-ray image with unadjusted pan sensor: Alternatively with precision adjustment setting (C) and coarse adjustment setting (D)

On the X-ray image with coarse adjustment (D), the center pin is just barely visible on the left margin of the image field in the middle. Even in this extreme case, an adjustment would still be possible.

NOTEiWith SIDEXIS SW V01.45 and higher, a message window indicates whether a coarse adjustment is required on completion of the precision exposure.

C D

59 38 399 D33524 – 16 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


Making the unit ready for exposureNOTEi

The default values for S1, S2 and S3 were automatically determined by SIDEXIS based on the exposure and entered in the text boxes of the menu.

For manual adjustment, the values displayed at this position in the text boxes of the menu can be overwritten (see page 4-21).

First continue with the automatic adjustment. Manual determination of the ad-justment values is required only if you fail to reach your goal via automatic ad-justment (see page 4-20).

5. Make SIDEXIS XG ready for exposure:


The PAN - SENSOR ADJUSTMENT dialog box appears in SIDEXIS.

The dialog box suggests a value Lx for the mechanical adjustment of the sensor.

If the suggested value is greater than ±0.5mm, then perform a mechani-cal adjustment of the sensor.

Moving the sensor 6. Adjust the sensor:

NOTEiPositive sign = moves the sensor to the rightNegative sign = moves the sensor to the left

– Mark the position of the sensor.

– Loosen the three screws A (approx. 2 turns, do not unscrew fully)

– Move the sensor to the left or right by the displayed value Lx.

– Tighten screws A again.

AA

A

+-

System version 1: Fixed sensor holder

A AA

Hardware version 2: motor-driven sensor holder

+-

(XGPlus, TSA only)

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 17


4.3

Making the unit ready for exposure 7. Confirm the sensor adjustment and make SIDEXIS XG ready for exposure:

Click OK




1

2

3

+- 60 kV/3 mA

0.60 s

S10

1

1 2 3

60/3____0.60____

59 38 399 D33524 – 18 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008




XGPlus:


XG5 / 3 / 3 PPE:




– The three needle images must lie in the center of the exposed ar-eas and inside the auxiliary lines (A).

NOTEiIf these criteria are not yet fulfilled, repeat the adjustment procedure starting with step 5.

R


Adjustment: ok

A

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 19


4.3

NOTEiIf you do not reach your goal via automatic adjustment, repeat the adjustment procedure with manually determined adjustment values (see page 4-20).

Saving the values 10. If the image is identical to the ideal image (A), save the values:

Click SAVE VALUES

NOTEiIn SIDEXIS versions higher than V01.50. the values for S1 - S3 in the PAN - SENSOR ADJUSTMENT submenu are setequal to zero with a correct adjust-ment, i.e. if they are within the permissible tolerance. For versions < V01.50, the values in the text boxes may deviate slightly from zero even with a correct adjustment.

Remove the needle phantom from the bite block holder of the unit.

ORTHOPHOS XG 3 / 3 PPE:

Reattach the fixed diaphragm (see page 4-10).

Go on to the next adjustment step.

59 38 399 D33524 – 20 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


Manual adjustment of the PAN sensor

The manual adjustment procedure is similar to the one for automatic adjust-ment. The only difference is that the default adjustment values automatically determined by SIDEXIS are overwritten by manually determined adjustment values in the PAN - SENSOR ADJUSTMENT submenu.

Determining the adjustment values for S1, S2 and S3 manually

Measure distances S1, S2 and S3 with the SIDEXIS measuring ruler.

NOTEiTo measure S1, S2 and S3, estimate the horizontal center position of the dis-played needles. Measure in the lower area of the needles if possible, since they may have been bent slightly after repeated use.

Tip: To facilitate the measuring procedure, you can color the image in SIDEX-IS (see also SIDEXIS Operator’s Manual).

S1 S2 S3

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 21


4.3

Overwriting default values for S1, S2 and S3

Overwrite the default values for S1, S2 and S3 with the measured values in the text boxes of the PAN - SENSOR ADJUSTMENT submenu.

NOTEiFor information on the direction of displacement (input of +/- sign in the menu) see page 4-7. Use points as decimal separators!

Proceed with step 5 of the adjustment procedure.

59 38 399 D33524 – 22 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


4.3.4 Adjusting the (motorized) pan diaphragm (XGPlus / XG 5)

Menu: Diaphragm/system adjustment ‡ Pan - Diaphragm

Preparations Remove the needle phantom from the bite block holder of the panoramic X-ray unit (see page 4-9).

NOTEiIf a message window indicating that the diaphragm is tilted appears during the pan diaphragm adjustment, this means that the primary diaphragm is me-chanically maladjusted in the vertical axis. In this case, contact the Sirona Customer Service Center:

Opening PAN - DIAPHRAGM 1. Go to the PAN - DIAPHRAGM submenu.


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 23


4.3

Making the unit ready for exposure 2. Make SIDEXIS XG ready for exposure:




XG 5: Display on the Multipad The single-line display of the Multipad shows the exposure parameters of service routine S030.2.

1

2

3

+- 60 kV/3 mA

0.20 s

S30

2

1 2 3

60/3____0.20____

59 38 399 D33524 – 24 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


Starting the exposure 3. Take an exposure (60 kV/3 mA; 0.20 s):


XGPlus:


XG5:



R


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 25


4.3


– The exposed diaphragm area must lie horizontally centered in the image field as well as inside the superimposed auxiliary lines (A).

– A white border surrounding the image on all sides must be visible. The maximum density must lie in the center of the diaphragm area (A).

NOTEiIf these criteria are not fulfilled (B), the pan diaphragm must be adjusted.

Adjustment: ok

B

Adjustment: not ok

A

59 38 399 D33524 – 26 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


Coarse or precision adjustment? In most cases, the diaphragm can be adjusted using precision adjustment from the start (see step 5 onward). Only in exceptional cases, e.g. if the exposed image area is completely outside the image field C in an image acquired with PRECISION ADJUSTMENT setting, is it necessary to perform a coarse adjustment prior to precision adjustment D. To do this, deactivate the PRECISION ADJUSTMENT check box (see page 4-3) and then perform a coarse adjustment proceeding in the same way as for precision adjustment. The only difference between coarse and precision adjustment is the size of the image area considered. Furthermore, there are fewer auxiliary lines in the coarse adjustment mode.

X-ray image with unadjusted pan diaphragm: Alternatively with precision adjustment setting (C) and coarse adjustment setting (D)

On the X-ray image with coarse adjustment D, the exposed area is just barely visible at the right margin of the image field. Even in this extreme case, an adjustment would still be possible.


NOTEiWhen the diaphragm is correctly adjust-ed, a course adjustment does not produce a meaningful image, since no surrounding border can be seen in this case (similar to image C).

C D

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 27


4.3


The default values for Sx and Sy were automatically determined by SIDEXIS based on the exposure and entered in the text boxes of the menu.








1

2

3

+- 60 kV/3 mA

0.20 s

S30

2

1 2 3

60/3____0.20____

59 38 399 D33524 – 28 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008




XGPlus:


XG5:




R


Adjustment: ok

A

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 29


4.3





NOTEiIf a message window indicating the need to take an additional X-ray exposure opens at this point, repeat the adjustment procedure starting with item 5. This is necessary even if the X-ray exposure which has been taken is already within the tolerance limits. This additional exposure ensures that the new diaphragm gap width offset is also correctly adjusted.


Click SAVE VALUES

NOTEiIn SIDEXIS versions higher than V01.50. the values for Sx and Sy in the PAN - DIAPHRAGM submenu are setequal to zero with a correct adjustment, i.e. if they are within the permissible tolerance. For versions < V01.50, the values in the text boxes may deviate slightly from zero even with a correct adjustment.


59 38 399 D33524 – 30 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


Manual adjustment of the PAN diaphragm

The manual adjustment procedure is similar to the one for automatic adjust-ment. The only difference is that the default adjustment values automatically determined by SIDEXIS are overwritten by manually determined adjustment values in the PAN - DIAPHRAGM submenu.

Determining adjustment values for Sx and Sy manually

Measure distances Sx and Sy with the SIDEXIS measuring ruler.

NOTEiTip: To facilitate the measuring procedure, you can color the image in SIDEX-IS (see also SIDEXIS Operator’s Manual).

S2

Sy

Sx

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 31


4.3

Overwriting the default values for Sx and Sy

Overwrite the default values for Sx and Sy with the measured values in the text boxes of the PAN - DIAPHRAGM submenu.



59 38 399 D33524 – 32 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


4.3.5 Adjusting the (fixed) pan diaphragm (XG 3 / 3 PPE)

Menu: Diaphragm/system adjustment ‡ Pan - Diaphragm

PreparationsNOTEi

The fixed diaphragm must be reattached for this adjustment step (see page 4-10).

Remove the needle phantom from the bite block holder of the panoramic X-ray unit (see page 4-9).

Opening PAN - DIAPHRAGM 1. Go to the PAN - DIAPHRAGM submenu.

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 33


4.3




XG 3/3 PPE: Display on the Multipad The single-line display of the Multipad shows the exposure parameters of service routine S030.2.





1 2 3

60/3____0.20____

R


59 38 399 D33524 – 34 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008





NOTEiIf these criteria are not fulfilled (B), the pan diaphragm must be adjusted.

The adjustment of the pan fixed diaphragm (XG 3/3 PPE) must be performed mechanically, i.e. this cannot be done via SIDEXIS!

Adjustment: ok

B

Adjustment: not ok

A

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 35


4.3

Measuring adjustment values in SIDEXIS


NOTEiMeasured value x 0.27 (mm) = mechanical adjustment value of diaphragm (mm)

NOTEiTip: To facilitate the measuring procedure, you can also color the image in SI-DEXIS (see SIDEXIS Operator’s Manual).

S2

Sy

Sx

59 38 399 D33524 – 36 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


Mechanical adjustment of the fixed diaphragm

Remove the covers (see also page 1-50):



Loosen both screws (A) slightly(approx. 1 turn).

Adjust the diaphragm position via eccentric screws B (horizontal adjust-ment) and C (vertical adjustment).

– CW rotation of the eccentric screws:movement of the diaphragm to the right or upward

– CCW rotation of the eccentric screws:movement of the diaphragm to the left or downward

NOTEiTo measure the shift, refer to the gap between the plastic support and the lead diaphragm (D).

Tighten screws A again.

D

Plasticsupport

Lead diaphragm

D


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 37


4.3




XG 3 / 3 PPE: Display on the Multipad The single-line display of the Multipad shows the exposure parameters of service routine S030.2.





1 2 3

60/3____0.20____

R


59 38 399 D33524 – 38 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008





NOTEiIf these criteria have not yet been fulfilled, repeat the mechanical adjustment of the diaphragm (see page 4-35) and then continue with step 5.

If the image is identical to the ideal image (A), then the adjustment of the diaphragm is completed:



Adjustment: ok

A

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 39


4.3

4.3.6 Adjusting the pan filter (XGPlus / XG 5, not for XG 3 / 3 PPE)

Menu: Diaphragm/system adjustment ‡ Pan - Filter

Opening PAN - FILTER 1. Go to the PAN - FILTER submenu.



59 38 399 D33524 – 40 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008







XGPlus:


XG5:



1

2

3

+- 60 kV/3 mA

0.20 s

S30

3

1 2 3

60/3____0.20____

R


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 41


4.3


– The superimposed filter must cover one half of the diaphragm (A).

NOTEiIf these criteria are not fulfilled (B), the pan filter must be adjusted.


The default value for Fx was automatically determined by SIDEXIS based on the exposure and entered in the text box of the menu.

For manual adjustment, the value displayed at this position in the text box of the menu can be overwritten (see page 4-44).

First continue with the automatic adjustment. Manual determination of the ad-justment value is required only if you fail to reach your goal via automatic ad-justment (see page 4-44).



Adjustment: ok

B

Adjustment: not ok

A

59 38 399 D33524 – 42 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008







XGPlus:


XG5:



1

2

3

+- 60 kV/3 mA

0.20 s

S30

3

1 2 3

60/3____0.20____

R


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 43


4.3


– The superimposed filter must cover one half of the diaphragm (A).

NOTEiIf this criterion is not yet fulfilled (B), repeat the adjustment procedure starting with step 5.

If you do not reach your goal via automatic adjustment, repeat the adjustment procedure with a manually determined adjustment value (see page 4-44).

Saving a value 8. If the image is identical to the ideal image (A), save the value:

Click SAVE VALUES

NOTEiIn SIDEXIS versions V01.50 and higher, the value for Fx in the PAN - FILTER submenu is setequal to zero with a correct adjustment, i.e. if it is within the permissible tolerance. For versions < V01.50, the value in the text box may deviate slightly from zero even with a correct adjustment.


Adjustment: ok

A

59 38 399 D33524 – 44 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


Manual adjustment of the PAN filter

The manual adjustment procedure is similar to the one for automatic adjust-ment. The only difference is that the default adjustment value automatically determined by SIDEXIS is overwritten by a manually determined adjustment value in the PAN - FILTER submenu.

Determining the adjustment value for Fx manually

Measure distance Fx with the SIDEXIS measuring ruler.


Overwriting the default value for Fx Replace the default value for Fx by entering the measured value in the text box of the PAN - FILTER submenu.



Fx

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 45


4.3

4.3.7 Adjusting the pan symmetry (XGPlus / 5 / 3 / 3 PPE)

Menu: Diaphragm/system adjustment ‡ Pan - Symmetry

Preparations Insert the needle phantom in the bite block holder of the panoramic X-ray unit (see page 4-9).

Opening PAN - SYMMETRY 1. Go to the PAN - SYMMETRY submenu.



59 38 399 D33524 – 46 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008







XGPlus:


XG5 / 3 / 3 PPE:



1

2

3

+- 60 kV/3 mA

14.1 s

S10

2

1 2 3

60/3____14.1____

R


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 47


4.3


Adjustment: not ok (length measurement with SIDEXIS)

S2

C

A2 = 44.3 ± 0.5 mm

A1 = 88.6 mm ± 1 mm

Adjustment: ok (length measurement with SIDEXIS)

± 0.75 mm

ZOOM: 1:1A

B

A2 = 44.3 ± 0.5 mmA2 A2

± 0.75 mm

59 38 399 D33524 – 48 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


– The shadow of the center needle, the needle image and the auxil-iary line must be coincident and located behind each other. A tolerance (offset of needle from the central auxiliary line) of ± 0.75 mm is admissible (A).

– Distance A1 must be 88.6 ± 1 mm (A).

– Distances A2 must be identical, each being 44.3 ± 0.5 mm (A).

– A white border surrounding the image on all sides must be visible (B).

NOTEiIf one of these criteria is not fulfilled (C), the pan symmetry must be adjusted.


The default values for S1, S2 and S3 were automatically determined by SIDEXIS based on the exposure and entered in the text boxes of the menu.






båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 49


4.3





XGPlus:


XG5 / 3 / 3 PPE:



1

2

3

+- 60 kV/3 mA

14.1 s

S10

2

1 2 3

60/3____14.1____

R


59 38 399 D33524 – 50 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008



– The shadow of the center needle, the needle image and the auxil-iary line must be coincident and located behind each other. A tolerance (offset of needle from the central auxiliary line) of ± 0.75 mm is admissible (A).


– Distances A2 must be identical, each being 44.3 ± 0.5 mm (A).


NOTEiAlways measure exactly from pin center to pin center.

A2 = 44.3 ± 0.5 mm

A1 = 88.6 mm ± 1 mm


± 0.75 mm

ZOOM: 1:1A

B

A2 = 44.3 ± 0.5 mmA2 A2

± 0.75 mm

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 51


4.3

NOTEi

If the X-ray image still does not correspond to the ideal image, it is pos-sible that one or more criteria have not yet been fulfilled:

Case 1: Center needle not coincident with auxiliary lineIf the shadow of the center needle, the needle image and the auxiliary line do not yet coincide, then repeat the adjustment procedure starting with step 5.

Case 2: Symmetry not OKIf the shadow of the center needle, the needle image and the auxiliary line co-incide, but the symmetry or the distance between the two outer needles is not yet correct, then repeat the adjustment procedure starting with step 5.


Saving the values 8. If all criteria are fulfilled and the current image is identical to the ideal im-age A + B, then save the values:

Click SAVE VALUES

NOTEiIn SIDEXIS versions V01.50 and higher, the values for S1, S2 and S3 in the PAN - SYMMETRY submenu are set equal to zero with a correct adjustment, i.e. if they are within the permissible tolerance. For versions < V01.50, the values in the text boxes may deviate slightly from zero even with a correct adjustment.


59 38 399 D33524 – 52 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


Manual adjustment of the PAN symmetry

The manual adjustment procedure is similar to the one for automatic adjust-ment. The only difference is that the default adjustment values automatically determined by SIDEXIS are overwritten by manually determined adjustment values in the PAN - SYMMETRY submenu.



NOTEiMeasure in the lower area of the needles if possible, since they may have been bent slightly after repeated use.

Always measure exactly from pin center to pin center.


S2S1 S3

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 53


4.3


Overwrite the default values for S1, S2 and S3 with the measured values in the text boxes of the PAN - SYMMETRY submenu.



59 38 399 D33524 – 54 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


4.3.8 Checking and adjusting the touchscreen (XGPlus only)

Switch the unit ON 1. Switch the unit ON.

2. When the start screen appears (see above), press the light localizer, T and R keys immediately and simultaneously.

NOTEiThese keys must be pressed while the unit is booting and the start screen is displayed.

The first adjustment screen appears on the display.

Performing a calibration 3. Calibrate the touchscreen:

Touch the upper left corner.

The second adjustment screen appears on the display.

Touch the lower right corner.

The third adjustment screen appears on the display.

see next page

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 55


4.3

Touch the center of the green square in the upper right corner.

The fourth adjustment screen appears on the display.

NOTEiTry to place the black dots which then appear as close to the centers of the squares as possible by touching the centers of the squares.

Touch the center of the green square in the lower left corner.

The fifth adjustment screen appears on the display.

Confirm the adjustment with YES.

The touchscreen is now adjusted.

To repeat the adjustment, touch NO.

You can abort the adjustment at any time by pressing the ABORT button.

59 38 399 D33524 – 56 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

4.4 Adjusting the cephalometer (XGPlus/ XG 5, if ceph is installed) Tabs 4

4.4 Adjusting the cephalometer (XGPlus/ XG 5, if ceph is installed)

4.4.1 Check the ring type(for XGPlus with arm on left side only)

In XGPlus units with the ceph arm mounted on the left side, a diffferent ring type is used with a serial number ≤ 40104 than with a serial number > 40104.

Due to the different ring types used, the default ring offsets stored in the sys-tem for the position of the ring switching plate are also different.

If a software update is performed on a system with the old ring type, this pre-sents no problem as long as no module replacement (DX11) is performed and the system adjustment is not reset to the factory setting via the CEPH - RESET ADJUSTMENT menu (see page 4-115).

If the previous system adjustment values are lost for any of the above rea-sons, the correct ring type must be reset via service routine S034.7 before beginning the adjustment of the cephalometer.

Therefore, check before beginning the adjustment...

whether an old ring type is installed in the system

Old ring type = ceph units with serial nos. up to 40104new ring type = ceph units with serial no. 40105 or higher

whether a module has been replaced or the adjustment values have been reset and...

if the answer is yes, execute service routine S034.7 (see page 5-145).

NOTEiXG 5 and XGPlus units with the ceph arm mounted on the right side are always equipped with the new ring type. It is therefore not necessary to check the ring type of these units.

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 57

Tab 4 4.4 Adjusting the cephalometer (XGPlus/ XG 5, if ceph is installed)

4.4

4.4.2 Ceph test phantom

Accessory: Ceph test phantom

For the adjustment of the ceph primary diaphragm and the ceph main X-ray beam direction, you must insert test phantom B in the sensor slot on the panoramic X-ray unit.

For the adjustment of the ceph fixed point of rotation, you must remove the test phantom from the sensor slot on the panoramic X-ray unit.

B

59 38 399 D33524 – 58 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


4.4.3 Adjusting the ceph primary diaphragm

Menu: Diaphragm/system adjustment ‡ Ceph - Primary diaphragm

NOTEiFor units with a unit software < V02.27 the exposure parameters for the prima-ry diaphragm adjustment may deviate from the parameters shown here (64 kV/16 mA; 6.1 s).

CAUTIONIt is essential that the PAN needle phantom is removed from bite block holder of the panoramic X-ray unit before a Ceph exposure is taken; otherwise the phantom may collide with the sensor.

Preparations Move the ear plug holders on the cephalometer completely apart and swing them out of the beam direction (ap).

Insert the test phantom in the sensor slot on the panoramic X-ray unit (see page 4-57).

Plug the sensor into the sensor slot on the cephalometer.

Open the DIAPHRAGM/SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT menu (see page 4-5).

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 59


4.4

Call up CEPH - PRIMARY DIAPHRAGM 1. Go to the CEPH - PRIMARY DIAPHRAGM submenu.




59 38 399 D33524 – 60 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008






XGPlus:


XG5:



1

2

3

+- 64 kV/16 mA

6.1 s

S10

3

1 2 3

64/16____6.1____

R


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 61


4.4


Adjustment: not ok

Adjustment: ok

S2

S2

A

S3 = approx. 60 mm

B

Length measurement with SIDEXIS

Length measurement with SIDEXIS

59 38 399 D33524 – 62 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


– The vertical pin must be horizontally centered in the exposed im-age area A. A slight vertical offset of the grid is permissible.

– A uniform white border surrounding the image on all sides must be visible A.

– Distance S3 must be approx. 60mm.

NOTEiIf these criteria are not fulfilled (B), the ceph primary diaphragm must be adjusted.

NOTEiIf S3 is > 70 mm, then contact the Sirona Customer Service Center: Phone: 0 62 51/16 - 16 16


The default values for S1, S2, S3 and S4 were automatically determined by SI-DEXIS based on the exposure and entered in the text boxes of the menu.






båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 63


4.4





XGPlus:


XG5:



1

2

3

+- 64 kV/16 mA

6.1 s

S10

3

1 2 3

64/16____6.1____

R


59 38 399 D33524 – 64 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008



– The vertical pin must be horizontally centered in the exposed im-age area A. A slight vertical offset of the grid is permissible.

– A uniform white border surrounding the image on all sides must be visible A.

– Distance S3 must be approx. 60mm.



S2

S2

A

S3 = approx. 60 mm

Adjustment: ok

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 65


4.4


Click SAVE VALUES


59 38 399 D33524 – 66 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


Manual adjustment of the ceph primary diaphragm

The manual adjustment procedure is similar to the one for automatic adjust-ment. The only difference is that the default adjustment values automatically determined by SIDEXIS are overwritten by manually determined adjustment values in the CEPH - PRIMARY DIAPHRAGM submenu.

Determining the adjustment values for S1, S2, S3 and S4 manually

Measure distances S1 - S4 with the SIDEXIS measuring ruler:

S1: Distance from the top edge of the image

S2: Distance from the right edge of the exposed area to the middle of the center pin

S3: Width of the exposed area

S4: Distance from the bottom edge of the image

NOTEiTip: To facilitate the measuring procedure, you can invert or color the image in SIDEXIS (see also SIDEXIS Operator’s Manual).

new

S2

S3

S1

S4

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 67


4.4

Overwriting default values for S1, S2, S3 and S4

Overwrite the default values for S1, S2, S3 and S4 with the measured val-ues in the text boxes of the CEPH - PRIMARY DIAPHRAGM submenu.



59 38 399 D33524 – 68 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


4.4.4 Adjusting the ceph fixed point of rotation

Menu: Diaphragm/system adjustment ‡ Ceph - Fixed point of rotation


Preparations Remove the ceph test phantom from the sensor slot of the panoramic X-ray unit (see page 4-57).

Opening CEPH - FIXED POINT OF ROTATION

1. Go to the CEPH - FIXED POINT OF ROTATION submenu.


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 69


4.4






1

2

3

+- 80 kV/14 mA

0.60 s

S10

5

1 2 3

80/14___0.60____

59 38 399 D33524 – 70 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008




XGPlus:


XG5:



R


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 71


4.4


– The exposed diaphragm area must lie centered and straight in the image field as well as inside the superimposed auxiliary lines (A).


NOTEiIf these criteria are not fulfilled (B), the ceph fixed point of rotation must be ad-justed.

Adjustment: ok

B

Adjustment: not ok

A

59 38 399 D33524 – 72 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


Coarse or precision adjustment? In most cases, the fixed point of rotation can be adjusted using precision adjustment from the start (see steps 5 ff.). Only in exceptional cases, e.g. if the exposed image area is completely outside the image field C in an image acquired with PRECISION ADJUSTMENT setting, is it necessary to perform a coarse adjustment prior to precision adjustment D. To do this, deactivate the PRECISION ADJUSTMENT check box (see page 4-3) and then perform a coarse adjustment proceeding in the same way as for precision adjustment. The only difference between coarse and precision adjustment is the size of the image area considered. Furthermore, there are fewer auxiliary lines in the coarse adjustment mode.

X-ray image with unadjusted ceph fixed point of rotation: Alternatively with precision adjustment setting (C) and coarse adjustment setting (D)

On the X-ray image with coarse adjustment D, the exposed area is still visible in the image field. Even in this extreme case, an adjustment would still be pos-sible.


C D

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 73


4.4


The default values for S1, S2 and S3 were automatically determined by SI-DEXIS based on the exposure and entered in the text boxes of the menu.





SIDEXIS screen The CEPH ADJUSTMENT - FIXED POINT OF ROTATION dialog box appears in SIDEXIS.

The dialog box suggests two values, Lx and Ly, for the mechanical adjust-ment of the ceph secondary diaphragm.

If the suggested values are greater than ±0.5 mm, you must perform a mechanical adjustment of the diaphragm.

NOTEiPositive sign = Moves the diaphragm to the right or upwardNegative sign = Moves the diaphragm to the left or downward

59 38 399 D33524 – 74 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


Adjusting the diaphragm 6. Adjust the diaphragm on the cephalometer mechanically. To do this, proceed as follows:

Removing the cover 7. Loosen screw B and remove the cover of the secondary diaphragm by pulling it downward.

Detaching the diaphragm 8. Loosen screws C slightly (approx. 2-3 turns).

B

C

C

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 75


4.4

Adjusting the inclination 9. Adjust the inclination of the diaphragm with screw D (Lx mm) and the height of the diaphragm with screw E (Ly mm).

NOTEi

Screw D: CCW rotation = Correction of diaphragm to the rightCW rotation = Correction of diaphragm to the left

Screw E: CCW rotation = downward correction of diaphragmCW rotation = upward correction of diaphragm

Use a ruler to measure the displacement.

The directions of rotation specified for the screws above apply equally to both versions (with the ceph arm on the left and on the right).

Tighten screws C again.

Confirming the diaphragm adjustment 10. Confirm the mechanical correction of the ceph secondary diaphragm:

Click OK


Lx

Ly

D

E

59 38 399 D33524 – 76 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008






XGPlus:


XG5:



1

2

3

+- 80 kV/14 mA

0.60 s

S10

5

1 2 3

80/14___0.60____

R


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 77


4.4




NOTEiIf this criterion is not yet fulfilled, repeat the adjustment procedure starting with step 5.

If you do not reach your goal via automatic adjustment, repeat the adjustment procedure with manually determined adjustment values (see page 4-79).

Adjustment: ok

A

59 38 399 D33524 – 78 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008



Click SAVE VALUES

NOTEiIn SIDEXIS versions V01.50 and higher, the values for S1, S2 and S3 in the CEPH - FIXED POINT OF ROTATION submenu are setequal to zero with a cor-rect adjustment, i.e. if they are within the permissible tolerance. For versions < V01.50, the values in the text boxes may deviate slightly from zero even with a correct adjustment.


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 79


4.4

Adjusting the ceph fixed point of rotation manually

The manual adjustment procedure is similar to the one for automatic adjust-ment. The only difference is that the default adjustment values automatically determined by SIDEXIS are overwritten by manually determined adjustment values in the CEPH - FIXED POINT OF ROTATION submenu.



S1

S2

B

S3

59 38 399 D33524 – 80 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008



Overwrite the default values for S1, S2 and S3 with the measured values in the text boxes of the CEPH - FIXED POINT OF ROTATION submenu.



båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 81


4.4

4.4.5 Adjusting the ceph main X-ray beam direction

Menu: Diaphragm/system adjustment ‡ Ceph - Main X-ray beam direction


Preparations Insert the test phantom in the sensor slot on the panoramic X-ray unit (see page 4-57).

Swing the ear plug holders out of the beam direction.

Opening CEPH - MAIN X-RAY BEAM DIRECTION

1. Go to the CEPH - MAIN X-RAY BEAM DIRECTION submenu.

59 38 399 D33524 – 82 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008





XGPlus: Display on the Easypad The Easypad touchscreen displays service routine S010.6 as well as the related exposure parameters.


?

1

2

3

+- 80 kV/14 mA

14.9 s

S10

6

1 2 3

80/14___14.9____

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 83


4.4



XGPlus:


XG5:



R


59 38 399 D33524 – 84 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008



10 mm

10 mm

Adjustment: ok

A

10 mm

10 mm

B

Adjustment: not ok

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 85


4.4

– A horizontal bar must be visible in the center of the image (A). If this bar is visible, the exposure is OK and ...

– the two beams imaged are within the tolerance band of ± 10 mm (A).

NOTEiIf the above criteria are not fulfilled (B), the ceph main X-ray beam direction must be adjusted.


The default value for S1 was automatically determined by SIDEXIS based on the exposure and entered in the text box of the menu.






59 38 399 D33524 – 86 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


XGPlus: Display on the Easypad The Easypad touchscreen displays service routine S010.6 as well as the related exposure parameters.




XGPlus:


XG5:



1

2

3

+- 80 kV/14 mA

14.9 s

S10

6

1 2 3

80/14___14.9____

R


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 87


4.4


– A horizontal bar must be visible in the center of the image (A). If this bar is visible, the exposure is OK and ...

– the two beams imaged are within the tolerance band of ± 10 mm (A).




Click SAVE VALUES


Adjustment: ok

A

59 38 399 D33524 – 88 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


Manual adjustment of the ceph main X-ray beam direction

The manual adjustment procedure is similar to the one for automatic adjust-ment. The only difference is that the default adjustment value automatically determined by SIDEXIS is overwritten by a manually determined adjustment value in the CEPH - MAIN X-RAY BEAM DIRECTION submenu.

Determining the adjustment value for S1 manually

Measure distance S1 with the SIDEXIS measuring ruler.

Measuring range

NOTEiMeasure within the measuring range shown in C.

Measure maximum distance S1. If the X-ray beam is imaged in the form of an S curve, measure S1 at the inflection point of the curve, but always within the measuring range shown.

S1

Measuring range

C

Inflection point

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 89


4.4

Overwriting the default value for S1 Replace the default value for S1 displayed in the text box of the CEPH MAIN X-RAY BEAM DIRECTION submenu with the measured value if nec-essary.

NOTEiUse points as decimal separators!


59 38 399 D33524 – 90 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


4.4.6 Adjusting the ceph quickshot(XGPlus full version only)

Menu: Diaphragm/system adjustment ‡ ceph quickshot


Preparations Remove the ceph test phantom from the sensor slot of the panoramic X-ray unit (see page 4-57).

Opening CEPH - QUICKSHOT 1. Go to the CEPH QUICKSHOT submenu.

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 91


4.4




XGPlus: Display on the Easypad Service routine S010.8 and its specific exposure parameters are displayed on the Easypad touchscreen.


1

2

3

+- 80 kV/14 mA

0.30 s

S10

8

1 2 3

80/14___0.30____

59 38 399 D33524 – 92 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008




XGPlus:


XG5:



R


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 93


4.4




NOTEiIf these criteria are not fulfilled (B), the ceph quickshot must be adjusted.

B

Adjustment: ok

A

Adjustment: not ok

59 38 399 D33524 – 94 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008



The default value for S1 was automatically determined by SIDEXIS based on the exposure and entered in the text box of the menu.








1

2

3

+- 80 kV/14 mA

0.30 s

S10

8

1 2 3

80/14___0.30____

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 95


4.4



XGPlus:


XG5:



R


59 38 399 D33524 – 96 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008







Adjustment: ok

A

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 97


4.4


Click SAVE VALUES

NOTEiIn SIDEXIS versions V01.50 and higher, the value for S1 in the CEPH - QUICK-SHOT submenu is setequal to zero with a correct adjustment, i.e. if it is within the permissible tolerance. For versions < V01.50, the value in the text box may deviate slightly from zero even with a correct adjustment.

Quit the DIAPHRAGM/SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT menu and proceed to the section 4.4.7 "Checking and adjusting the alignment of the ear plugs" or continue the adjustment procedure with the TSA sensor menu (see page 4-107).

59 38 399 D33524 – 98 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


Manual adjustment of the ceph quickshot

The manual adjustment procedure is similar to the one for automatic adjust-ment. The only difference is that the default adjustment value automatically determined by SIDEXIS is overwritten by a manually determined adjustment value in the CEPH QUICKSHOT submenu.

Determining the adjustment value for S1 manually

Measure distance S1 with the SIDEXIS measuring ruler.

B

S1

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 99


4.4

Overwriting the default value for S1 Replace the default value for S1 displayed in the text box of the CEPH QUICKSHOTsubmenu with the measured value if necessary.



59 38 399 D33524 – 100 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


4.4.7 Checking and adjusting the alignment of the ear plugs

Checking the ear plug alignment

NOTEiThe sensor must be plugged into the sensor slot on the cephalometer. The sensor must not be plugged into the sensor slot on the panoramic X-ray unit.

Preparations XGPlus:

Select the CEPH mode in the main menu on the Easypad.

XG 5:

Select one of the ceph programs on the Multipad.

Position of the ear plug holders 1. Move the ear plug holders completely apart and swing them into the beam path.

Fitting the adjusting caps 2. Fit adjusting caps D onto the ear plugs and secure them with adhesive tape.

Fit the black adjusting cap on the outside (sensor side)

Fit the transparent adjusting cap on the inside (tube assembly side).

D

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 101


4.4

Removing the cover 3. Unscrew and remove the cover from the cephalometer.

Opening the SIDEXIS Service menu 4. Open the SIDEXIS Service menu: To do this, proceed as follows:

Opening the constancy test Select the constancy test in SIDEXIS XG:

Select EXTRAS ‡ CONSTANCY TEST

The typical SIDEXIS user interface is started. Constancy test is already preset.

Starting the exposure mode Start the exposure mode:

Click XCXP

The dialog box for selecting the X-ray device appears on the screen.

Selecting/confirming the X-ray device Select/confirm the desired X-ray device:

Select e.g. KAMMER4 and click OK


59 38 399 D33524 – 102 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


Selecting/confirming the test type Select/confirm the test type:

Click SERVICE EXPOSURE


Selecting/confirming the service exposure Select/confirm the service exposure:

Click QUALITY TEST EXPOSURE

NOTEiThe ceph mode must be activated for the ceph quality test exposure (see page 4-100).

NOTEiIf necessary, select the X-ray component.


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 103


4.4

Starting the exposure 5. Take an exposure:


XGPlus:

The procedure is completed when the status message “ORTHOPHOS is ready for exposure“ appears on the touchscreen.

XG5:

The procedure is completed when the progess indicator disappears.


Image The lead balls in the adjusting caps appear as dots on the image. The two dots must be coincident.

NOTEiIf the two dots are not coincident, the ear plugs must be adjusted.

R


59 38 399 D33524 – 104 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


Adjusting the ear plug alignment

Horizontal correction 6. Loosen screws A slightly. Do not unscrew them completely!

7. Adjust the ear plugs in the horizontal direction by turning screw B coun-terclockwise or clockwise. The direction of rotation corresponding to a unit with the Ceph arm mounted on the left or on the right side is shown in the following illustration:

Tighten screws A again.

B

A

A

Ceph arm mounted on left-hand side

Ceph arm mounted on right-hand side

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 105


4.4

Vertical correction 8. Turn the rotary table counterclockwise approx. 100 degrees until you can see screw C through the opening in the cover plate.

C

approx. 100 degrees

C

D

59 38 399 D33524 – 106 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


9. Loosen screw C slightly (do not unscrew it completely!) and adjust the ear plugs in the vertical direction with knurled nut D. The direction of ro-tation corresponding to a unit with the Ceph arm mounted on the left or on the right side is shown in the following illustration:

Tighten screw C again.

Position of the ear plug holders 10. Turn the ear plug holders back into the beam direction. Make sure that the black adjusting cap is located on the outside again.

Release radiation again to check the adjustment (see page 4-101).

– If the two dots displayed on the screen are coincident, reattach the cov-er (see page 4-101).

– If the two dots displayed on the screen are not yet coincident, repeat the adjustment procedure.

The adjustment of the unit is now completed.



outside

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 107

Tab 4 4.5 TSA sensor adjustment (XGPlus full version only)

4.5

4.5 TSA sensor adjustment(XGPlus full version only)

Menu: Diaphragm/system adjustment ‡ TSA sensor

Open the DIAPHRAGM/SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT menu if it is not already open (see page 4-5).

Opening TSA - SENSOR 1. Go to the TSA - SENSOR submenu.



59 38 399 D33524 – 108 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

4.5 TSA sensor adjustment (XGPlus full version only) Tabs 4







1

2

3

+- 60 kV/3 mA

0.20 s

S30

4

R


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 109


4.5


– The exposed diaphragm area must lie horizontally centered in the image field (A).


NOTEiIf these criteria are not fulfilled (B), the TSA sensor must be adjusted.

Adjustment: ok Adjustment: not ok

A B

59 38 399 D33524 – 110 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008



The default values for S1 and S2 were automatically determined by SIDEXIS based on the exposure and entered in the text box of the menu.











1

2

3

+- 60 kV/3 mA

0.20 s

S30

4

R


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 111


4.5


– The exposed diaphragm area must lie horizontally and vertically centered in the image field (A).




Adjustment: ok

A

59 38 399 D33524 – 112 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008



Click SAVE VALUES

NOTEiIn SIDEXIS versions higher than V01.50, the values for Sx and Sy in the TSA - SENSOR submenu are setequal to zero with a correct adjustment, i.e. if they are within the permissible tolerance. For versions < V01.50, the values in the text boxes may deviate slightly from zero even with a correct adjustment.

The adjustment of the TSA sensor is completed.

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 113


4.5

Manual adjustment of the TSA sensor

The manual adjustment procedure is similar to the one for automatic adjust-ment. The only difference is that the default adjustment values automatically determined by SIDEXIS are overwritten by manually determined adjustment values in the TSA - SENSOR submenu.

Determining adjustment values for Sx and Sy manually


NOTEiMeasure from the edge of the imaged diaphragm area roughly up to the edge of the image area. Leave a small border, since a surrounding white border should be present following the correction.

S2

Sy

Sx

59 38 399 D33524 – 114 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


Overwriting the default values for Sx and Sy

Overwrite the default values for Sx and Sy with the measured values in the text boxes of the TSA - SENSOR submenu.



båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 4 – 115

Tab 4 4.6 Resetting the adjustment (XGPlus / 5 / 3 / 3 PPE)

4.6

4.6 Resetting the adjustment (XGPlus / 5 / 3 / 3 PPE)

NOTEiImportant: Make sure to note down the values displayed in the text boxes before modifying them. This will enable you to reset the adjustment val-ues to the factory settings if necessary.

Contact the Sirona Customer Service Center for more information (or to enable the menu):

Phone: 0 62 51/16 - 16 16

The DIAPHRAGM/SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT menu offers you the possibility of resetting or manually modifying any or all of the pan or ceph adjustment settings you have made in very exceptional cases.

Resetting the pan adjustment To reset the pan settings, open the PAN - RESET ADJUSTMENT menu.

Ceph - Reset adjustment (not for XG 3/3 PPE)

To reset the ceph settings, open the CEPH - RESET ADJUSTMENT menu.

NOTEiIf the adjustment values have been reset, the unit must be readjusted.

59 38 399 D33524 – 116 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

4.6 Resetting the adjustment (XGPlus / 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) Tabs 4

ORTHOPHOS XG 5 Service routines

59 38 399 D33525 – 2 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

Tab 5

Contents

5.1 Selecting the Service menu ..................................5 – 105.1.1 Selection on the Easypad (XGPlus) .................. 5 – 10

5.1.2 Selection on the Multipad (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) ... 5 – 13

5.2 Selecting a service routine ....................................5 – 155.2.1 Service routines with security access............... 5 – 17

5.3 Service routines with SIDEXIS..............................5 – 18

5.4 Service routine S001.............................................5 – 21

5.5 Service routine S002.............................................5 – 235.5.1 S002: Test step 1 ............................................. 5 – 24

5.5.2 S002: Test step 3 (not for XG 3 / 3 PPE) ......... 5 – 26

5.5.3 S002: Test step 4 (not for XG 3 / 3 PPE) ......... 5 – 27


5.6.2 S005: Test step 4 ............................................. 5 – 31

5.6.3 S005: Test step 5 ............................................. 5 – 33

5.6.4 S005: Test step 6 ............................................. 5 – 34

5.6.5 S005: Test step 7 ............................................. 5 – 37


5.7.2 S007: Test step 2 ............................................. 5 – 44

5.7.3 S007: Test step 5 ............................................. 5 – 46


5.8.2 S008: Test step 3 ............................................. 5 – 50

5.8.3 S008: Test step 4 (XG5 / XGPlus only) ............. 5 – 54



5.10.2 S012: Test step 3 ............................................. 5 – 63

5.10.3 S012: Test step 4 ............................................. 5 – 65

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 3

Tab 5


5.11.2 S014: Test step 2 ............................................. 5 – 69

5.11.3 S014: Test step 3 ............................................. 5 – 71

5.11.4 S014: Test step 4 ............................................. 5 – 73



5.13.2 S017: Test step 3 ............................................. 5 – 82

5.13.3 S017: Test step 4 (XGPlus only) ....................... 5 – 84

5.13.4 S017: Test step 5 (XGPlus only) ....................... 5 – 86

5.13.5 S017: Test step 6 ............................................. 5 – 87

5.13.6 S017: Test step 8 ............................................. 5 – 89

5.13.7 S017: Test step 9 ............................................. 5 – 91

5.13.8 S017: Test step 10 (XGPlus only) ..................... 5 – 93

5.13.9 S017: Test step 11 (XG 5 / 3 only) ................... 5 – 95


5.13.11 S017: Test step 13 (XGPlus full version only) ... 5 – 97

5.13.12 S017: Test step 14 (XGPlus full version only) ... 5 – 98

5.13.13 S017: Test step 15 ........................................ 5 – 101

5.13.14 S017: Test step 17 Setting the standard acceptance/constancy test, RöV FRG ........... 5 – 103

5.13.15 S017: Test step 17 Checking or accepting the diaphragm configuration, worldwide(not for XG 3 / 3 PPE) .................................... 5 – 105

5.13.16 S017: Test step 22 (XG 3 PPE only).............. 5 – 107

5.13.17 S017: Test step 23 (XG 3 PPE only).............. 5 – 108

5.14 Service routine S018...........................................5 – 1095.14.1 S018: Test step 2 ........................................... 5 – 110

5.14.2 S018: Test step 3 ........................................... 5 – 112

5.14.3 S018: Test step 4 ........................................... 5 – 113

5.14.4 S018: Test step 5 ........................................... 5 – 115

5.14.5 S018: Test step 6 ........................................... 5 – 117

5.15 Service routine S020 (XGPlus only) .....................5 – 1185.15.1 S020: Test step 1 ........................................... 5 – 119

59 38 399 D33525 – 4 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

Tab 5

5.16 Service routine S021 (not for XG 3 / 3 PPE).......5 – 1215.16.1 S021: Test step 1 ........................................... 5 – 121

5.16.2 S021: Test step 3 ........................................... 5 – 123

5.17 Service routine S032...........................................5 – 1265.17.1 S032: Test step 10 ......................................... 5 – 126

5.18 Service routine S033 (not for XG 3 / 3 PPE).......5 – 1305.18.1 S033: Test step 10 ......................................... 5 – 130


5.19.2 S034: Test step 5 ........................................... 5 – 139

5.19.3 S034: Test step 6 (not for XG 3 / 3 PPE) ....... 5 – 143


5.19.5 S034: Test step 8 (XGPlus and full version only) ......................... 5 – 146

5.19.6 S034: Test step 9 (XGPlus and full version only) ......................... 5 – 148


5.20.2 S037: Test step 2 ........................................... 5 – 154

5.20.3 S037: Test step 3 ........................................... 5 – 157

5.20.4 S037: Test step 4 ........................................... 5 – 159

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 5

Tab 5

Directory of all available service routines

Service routine XG 3 XG 3 PPE XG 5 XGPlus Function Page

S001 X X X X Radiation without rotary movement, fixed radiation time

5-21

S002 X X X X Radiation without rotary movement, maximum radiation time can be selected

5-23

S002: Test step 1 X X X X Primary diaphragm remains in last position selected

5-24

S002: Test step 3 (not for XG 3 / 3 PPE)

– – X X Primary diaphragm opened fully 5-26


– – X X Filter element for 0.8 mm Cu step filter; the primary diaphragm is set to a widened opening symmetrical to the PAN setting so that the step filter still remains covered

5-27

S005 X X X X General X-ray tube assembly service 5-28

S005: Test step 2 X X X X Automatic adjustment of preheating 5-29

S005: Test step 4 X X X X Fan test 5-31

S005: Test step 5 X X X X Temperature sensor test 5-33

S005: Test step 6 X X X X Switch off cool-down interval of the single tank

5-34

S005: Test step 7 X X X X Setting continuous operation of the tube assembly fan

5-37

S007 X X X X Error logging memory 5-40

S007: Test step 1 X X X X Display error logging memory 5-41

S007: Test step 2 X X X X Clear error logging memory 5-44

S007: Test step 5 X X X X Enabling the CAN bus logging in the Miniweb

5-46

S008 X X X X Update service 5-48

S008: Test step 2 X X X X Overview of the module software versions 5-48

S008: Test step 3 X X X X Input/confirmation of unit serial number 5-50

S008: Testschritt 4 – – X X Initialize the function activation 5-54

S009 X X X X Flash file system 5-56

S009: Test step 4 X X X X Format flash file system 5-56

S012 X X X X CAN bus service 5-59

S012: Test step 2 X X X X Inquiry of the CAN status register of the modules

5-60

S012: Test step 3 X X X X Resetting the CAN status register of the modules

5-63

S012: Test step 4 X X X X Display of CAN bus cycle on LEDs of modules

5-65

59 38 399 D33525 – 6 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

Tabs 5

S014 X X X X Rotation motor service 5-67

S014: Test step 1 X X X X Travel of rotational drive to the Pan home position

5-67

S014: Test step 2 – – – X Travel of rotational drive to the Ceph home position

5-69

S014: Test step 3 X X X X Free travel of rotational drive 5-71

S014: Test step 4 X X X X Display of light barrier signals of rotational drive

5-73

S015 X X X X Actuator service 5-74

S015: Test step 5 X X X X Functional test of actuators 1 + 2 5-74

S017 X X X X Configuration service 5-77

S017: Test step 2 X X X X Configure hardware version (Ceph, Pan, TSA)

5-78

S017: Test step 3 X X X X Entering the country group code 5-82

S017: Test step 4 – – – X Selecting the language index within a language set

5-84

S017: Test step 5 – – – X Selecting the language set index within a language set

5-86

S017: Test step 6 X X X X Activating the remote control display 5-87

S017: Test step 8 X X X X Selecting the kVmA level series 5-89

S017: Test step 9 X X X X Configuring operation without or with DX41 5-91

S017: Test step 10 (XGPlus only)

X X X X Configuration of headrest 5-93

S017: Test step 11 (XG 5 / 3 only)

– – X – Selecting the image format 5-95


– – – X Enabling/disabling the preview image 5-96

S017: Test step 13 (XGPlus full version only)

– – – X Enabling/disabling the welcome screen 5-97

S017: Test step 14 (XGPlus full version only)

– – – X Enabling/disabling certain lines of the welcome screen

5-98

S017: Test step 15 X X X X Enabling/disabling the acoustic signal for the end of exposure

5-101

S017: Test step 17 – – X X Setting acceptance/constancy test standard, RöV FRG

5-103

Checking and accepting the diaphragm configuration, worldwide

5-105

S017: Test step 18 – – – – In preparation.Caution! This routine must not be activated, since it will cause malfunctioning of the unit


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 7

Tab 5

S017: Test step 22 (XG 3 PPE only)

X X – – Configuration of PPE display 5-107

S017: Test step 23 (XG 3 PPE only)

X X – – Configuration of PPE display warning level 5-108


59 38 399 D33525 – 8 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

Tabs 5

S018 X X X X Service for height adjustment 5-109

S018: Test step 2 X X X X Setting the maximum travel height 5-110

S018: Test step 3 X X X X Undoing the maximum travel height setting 5-112

S018: Test step 4 X X X X Check of the height adjustment sensor system

5-113

S018: Test step 5 X X X X Set minimum travel height 5-115

S018: Test step 6 X X X X Undoing the minimum travel height setting 5-117

S020 X X X X Service for temple support 5-118

S020: Test step 1 – – – X Pramming the switching thresholds of the temple support

5-119

S021 – – X X Service for motor-driven diaphragm 5-121

S021: Test step 1 – – X X Initialization of diaphragm axis 5-121

S021: Test step 3 – – X X Function test (movement) of the TSA sensor holder

5-123

S032 X X X X Test function for sensor in PAN slot 5-126

S032: Test step 10 X X X X Test function for sensor in PAN slot 5-126

S033 – – X X Test of CEPH image path without SIDEXIS 5-130

S033: Test step 10 – – X X Test of CEPH image path without SIDEXIS 5-130

S034 – – X X Service for the digital cephalometer 5-134

S034: Test step 4 – – X X Display/calibrate center position of ceph scan sensor axis

5-135

S034: Test step 5 – – X X Display/calibrate center position of ceph scan secondary diaphragm axis

5-139


– – X X Moving to the ceph packing position 5-143


– – – X Display/change ring type 5-145

S034: Test step 8 (XGPlus and full version only)

– – – X User-specific determination of the shadowing limit for C1 and C2

5-146

S034: Test step 9 (XGPlus and full version only)

– – – X User-specific determination of the shadowing limit for C3 and C3 30x23

5-148

S037 X X X X Network service 5-151

S037: Test step 1 X X X X Displaying the network data 5-152

S037: Test step 2 X X X X Setting the default IP address, default gateway address and default subnet mask

5-154

S037: Test step 3 X X X X Toggling the DHCP and UDP boot mode (DEFAULT/STATIC)

5-157

S037: Test step 4 X X X X Manual input of IP address, default gateway address and subnet mask

5-159


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 9

Tab 5

5 Service routines

Using the service routines, you can check certain components and modules of the unit for proper functioning.

This chapter describes all of the service routines which can be selected and started via the service menu on the Easypad (XGPlus) and on the Multipad (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE).

NOTEiService routines S010 and S030 are not manually selectable and therefore are not described here. They are used only for system adjustment (see chapter 4).

Important for ceph unitsNOTEi

In addition to unit configuration via the service routines, starting with SIDEXIS Version V01.51 for ceph units another option is also available for ceph images (via a kind of mirror flag in the XAB.ini file). I.e. the Y axis can be displayed lat-erally reversed (e.g. for C3 the nose tip of the exposure then points to the left instead of to the right as in the normal configuration).

This configuration is effective for all ceph images created (C1-C4) andis possible with the ceph arm mounted either on the left or on the right side of the unit.

To activate the lateral image reversal, please contact the SIRONA Customer Service Center. They will be glad to give you all the information you need on this subject.

59 38 399 D33525 – 10 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

5.1 Selecting the Service menu Tabs 5

5.1 Selecting the Service menu

5.1.1 Selection on the Easypad (XGPlus)

Design of the user interface The touchscreen user interface of the Easypad is subdividedinto 4 levels:

Level 1: Main menu

Level 2: Program Settings

Level 3: Basic Settings

Level 4: Service menu

Main menu 1. To select level 2 (Program Settings menu), touch the blue arrow in the up-per right corner of the touchscreen.

Program Settings menu 2. To select level 3 (Basic Settings menu), touch the left blue arrow in the up-per right corner of the touchscreen.

Basic Settings menu 3. To select level 4 (Service menu/access), touch the wrench symbol.

Leve

l 1Le

vel 2

Opens the info screen

Leve

l 3

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 11

Tab 5 5.1 Selecting the Service menu

5.1

Service menu/access 4. Access the Service menu:

– Press and hold down the Service key until the patient symbol keys light up (approx. 2 s).

– Then press the patient symbol keys in the following order within 4 s:b – d – a.

– After you have entered the key combination correctly, the Service menu appears. You can return to the next higher level with the double arrow key at any time.

Service menu To quit the Service menu and return to the main menu, press the double-arrow key .

a b d Leve

l 4

c

approx. 2 s

Leve

l 4/

Ser

vice

men

u

59 38 399 D33525 – 12 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


Displays and symbols in the Service menu

From the Service menu, you can run all available service routines and per-form important system settings, tests and compensations.

Depending on the procedure step, different control symbols and displayfields are activated in a context-sensitive way in the Service menu on the touchscreen:

Display Title bar: X RAY Radiation can be releasedX RAY Active! Caution, radiation active!

Selection fields 1 - 3: Display fields for service routines, test steps, values, IDs, etc.

Buttons Patient symbol keys Different functions,a - d: depending on the service routine

Memory key: For saving an input

Service key: Different functionsdep. on service routine, however usually for confirming a selection or jumping to the next test step

Test key: For starting a test

Return key: For moving the unit to the starting position or confirming a save operation

Double arrow key: Return to the Main menu

T R

1

2

3

+-

-

-

+

+

XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

X

XXX

E X RAY Active!

S2

1

+-

+-

+-

1

2

3

a b c d

T

R

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 13

Tab 5 5.1 Selecting the Service menu

5.1

5.1.2 Selection on the Multipad (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE)

1. Press the Service key until the LED above the Service key lights up.

After the Service key is released, the LEDs above the patient symbol keys light up.

2. Then press the patient symbol keys in the following order within 4 s:b – d – a.

After you have entered the key combination correctly, the Service menu appears.

NOTEiThe service mode is signaled by a slow flashing of the Power LED å.

Service menu To quit the Service menu and return to the Main menu, press the up arrow key above selection field 3 (see section 5.1.2).

approx. 2 s

a b dc

S001____________

1 2 3

59 38 399 D33525 – 14 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


Displays and keys on the Multipad(for service only)

From the Service menu, you can run all available service routines and perform important system settings, tests and compensations.

Depending on the procedure step, different hints, error messages and param-eters are displayed in a context-sensitive way on the Multipad:

Display Selection fields 1 - 3: Display fields for service routines, test steps, values, IDs, etc.

NOTEiThe empty digits in the single-line display of the Multipad are marked with underscores in this Manual (see page 1-6). They have been added to en-hance clarity and are not present on the real Multipad.

Keys Patient symbol keys different functions,a - d: depending on the service routine

Memory key: For saving an input

Service key: different functionsdep. on service routine, however usually for confirming a selection or jumping to the next test step

Test key: For starting a test

Return key: For moving the unit to the starting position or confirming a save operation

Double arrow key: Return to the Main menu

T R

Prog. S kV mA

18 digits

24 digits

34 digits

Prog. S kV mA

a b c d

T

R

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 15

Tab 5 5.2 Selecting a service routine

5.2

5.2 Selecting a service routine

Select the Service menu (see section 5.1).

Selecting a service routine 1. Select the desired system version using the arrow keys of selection field 1 and confirm this selection with the Service key.

NOTEiIf the selected service routine comprises several test steps, the first selectable test step is displayed in selection field 2.

Selecting a test step 2. Select the desired test step using the arrow keys of selection field 2 and confirm your selection by pressing the Service key.

1

2

3

+- S005

1

1 2 3

S005_______1____

XGPlus: Easypad touchscreen XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE: Multipad

+-

1

2

3

+- S005

4

1 2 3

S005_______4____


+-

59 38 399 D33525 – 16 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

5.2 Selecting a service routine Tabs 5

XGPlus: The selected service routine as well as the selected test step are displayed in the right column (in our example S005, test step 4).

For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE: The parameters or IDs of the selected service routine are displayed on the Multipad. The Multipad does not show which service routine or test step is currently active.

Quitting the service routine XGPlus:

To return to the service routine selection menu, press the Service key or the double arrow key .

To quit the Service menu and return to the main menu, press the double arrow key .

For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:

Pressing the up arrow key above selection field 3 returns you to the ser-vice routine selection menu.

To quit the Service menu and return to the Main menu, press the up arrow key above selection field 3.

R

1

2

3

+- 01

1 2 3

________01______


4

S5

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 17

Tab 5 5.2 Selecting a service routine

5.2

5.2.1 Service routines with security access

NOTEiA security code is required for accessing service routines involving functions such as radiation release or editing of configuration data or stored values. This procedure prevents the inadvertent selection or activation of these service routines.

To select a service routine or test step with security access, proceed as fol-lows:

WARNINGBe sure to observe the radiation protection regulations applicable in your country.

Selecting the service routine/test step 1. Select the service routine or the test step and confirm your selection with the Service key.

After you have confirmed your selection, a 0 appears in selection field 2.

Confirming the security access 2. Confirm the security access by once again selecting the number of the main routine (in our example 2) with the arrow keys of selection field 2 and then pressing the Service key.

Following this double selection and confirmation, the service routine is ac-tivated.

1

2

3

+- S002

1

1 2 3

S002_______1____


+-

1

2

3

2

1 2 3

___________2____


+-

59 38 399 D33525 – 18 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

5.3 Service routines with SIDEXIS Tabs 5

5.3 Service routines with SIDEXIS



ORTHOPHOS XGPlus The X-Ray radiation indicator ç lights up briefly.

After approx. 2 s, the green LED å in the upper right corner of the Easypad lights up. This LED remains permanently lit as long as the unit is ON.

The start screen appears on the touchscreen of the Easypad and the sys-tem’s self-adjustment routine starts running (for approx. 1 min.). At the same time, the rotating element rotates briefly clockwise and counter-clockwise and the diaphragm is positioned. The forehead and temple sup-ports on the panoramic unit open and close and then stop moving in fully opened position.

Once the self-adjustment routine is completed, the main menu appears on the touchscreen and help message H301 prompts you to move the unit to the starting position.

ORTHOPHOS XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE All LEDs and the LED display on the Multipad light up briefly.

The green LED in the upper right corner of the Multipad å remains perma-nently lit as long as the unit is ON.

The initialization status is visualized by a progress indicator while the unit performs a self-adjustment routine (approx. 1 min.). At the same time, the rotating element rotates briefly clockwise and counterclockwise and the diaphragm is positioned. The forehead and temple supports on the pan-oramic unit open and close and then stop moving in fully opened position.

Once the self-adjustment routine is completed, help message H301 prompts you to move the unit to the starting position.

2. Press the R key to move the unit back to the starting position.

Switch the PC ON and start SIDEXIS.


�

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 19

Tab 5 5.3 Service routines with SIDEXIS

5.3

3. Select the constancy test in SIDEXIS XG: Select EXTRAS ‡ CONSTANCY TEST.

The typical Sidexis user interface is started. Constancy test is already preset.

4. Start the exposure mode:Click XCXP.

The dialog box for selecting the X-ray device appears on the screen.

5. Select/confirm the X-ray device:Select the desired X-RAY DEVICE and click OK.


NOTEiUnder certain circumstances, the dialog box for selecting the X-ray device may be skipped by the software and the dialog box for selecting the test type ap-pears immediately.

6. Select/confirm the test type:Click SERVICE EXPOSURE.


59 38 399 D33525 – 20 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

5.3 Service routines with SIDEXIS Tabs 5

7. Select/confirm the SERVICE EXPOSURE.

The following service exposures are available for selection:

DIGITAL TEST PATTERN: Checks the data transmission path between PC and sensor

FACTORY SERVICE: Sets interlock signal for service programs (only for D3297)

DIAPHRAGM TEST EXPOSURE: Check of pan andceph adjustments

DIAPHRAGM/SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT: Adjustment

QUALITY TEST EXPOSURE: Test exposure not stored in PDATA

If several different X-ray components are available, a dialog box for select-ing the X-ray device appears on the screen. In this case, select/confirm the required component.

If only one X-ray component is available, the exposure readiness dialog box appears on the screen and shows the status of the exposure.

NOTEiDuring operation in the service mode, the unit switches from the user mode to the PC service mode logged by the PC (see section 4.2).

When you select the DIAPHRAGM/SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT menu...

the dialog box for entering the service password appears on the screen.

Enter the service password and confirm your input by clicking OK.

NOTEiAs servicepassword, enter the first 4 digits of the current system date in re-verse order (e.g. on 05/24/1995, 5042 must be entered as the service password).

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 21

Tab 5 5.4 Service routine S001

5.4

S001: Radiation without rotary movement, fixed radiation time

5.4 Service routine S001

Radiation without rotary movement, fixed radiation time


Select the Service menu (see page 5-10).

Selecting service routine S001 1. Use the arrow keys in selection field 1 to select service routine S001 and confirm this selection with the Service key .

Confirming the security access 2. Confirm the security access by once again selecting the number of the main routine (1) with the arrow keys of selection field 2 and then pressing the Service key .

Function S001: Test of X-ray beam and kV/mA levels

Radiation with selected kV/mA level

Radiation time cannot be selected, max. 14.0 sec.

Primary diaphragm remains in last position selected

Security access

1

2

3

+- S001

1 2 3

S001____________


1

2

3

- +1

1 2 3

___________1____


59 38 399 D33525 – 22 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

5.4 Service routine S001 Tabs 5

S001: Radiation without rotary movement, fixed radiation time

Selecting the kV/mA level 3. Use the arrow keys in selection field 1 to select the desired kV/mA level.

NOTEiThe maximum radiation time is displayed in selection field 2. The maximum radiation time cannot be changed in this service routine and equals 14.0 seconds.

Radiation is emitted as long as the release button remains pressed until the maximum time of 14.0 seconds is reached.

Releasing radiation 4. Release radiation by pressing the release button.

Radiation from any tube assembly position, no rotary movement

The primary diaphragm remains in the last position set

The radiation time is 14.0 seconds

NOTEiIf you let go of the release button before the maximum radiation time has elapsed, radiation is terminated prematurely and the exposure is interrupted. The actual radiation time is not displayed.

When you release radiation during the cool-down interval, a countdown of the remaining waiting time is displayed in selection field 2 on the Multipad (automatic exposure blocking).


Pressing the Service key or the double arrow key returns you to the service routine selection menu.

To quit the Service menu and return to the Main menu, press the double arrow key .

For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:

To return to the service routine selection menu, press the up arrow key above selection field 3.


1

2

3

+- 60 kV/8 mA

14 s

1 2 3

60/8____14.0____


E X RAY

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 23


5.5

S002: Radiation without rotary movement, maximum radiation time can be selected


Radiation without rotary movement, maximum radiation time can be selected



Selecting service routine S002 1. Select service routine S002 using the arrow keys of selection field 1.

Function S002 X-ray beam test

Radiation with selected kV/mA level

Maximum radiation time selectable

Radiation from any position

Test step 1 Primary diaphragm remains in last position selected Security access

Test step 3 Primary diaphragm opened fully Security access

Test step 4 Filter element for 0.8 Cu step filterThe primary diaphragm is set to a widened opening symmetrical to the PAN setting so that the step filter still remains covered.

Security access

1

2

3

+- S002

1

1 2 3

S002_______1____


+-

59 38 399 D33525 – 24 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S002.1: Radiation w/o rot. movement, max. radiation time selectable, prim. diaphr. in last pos.

5.5.1 S002: Test step 1

Selecting test step 1 1. Select test step 1 in selection field 2 with the arrow keys and confirm your selection by pressing the Service key .


Selecting the kV/mA level and radiation time

3. Use the arrow keys of

– selection field 1 to select the desired kV/mA level and

– selection field 2 to select the desired radiation time.

1

2

3

+- S002

1

1 2 3

S002_______1____


+-

1

2

3

- +2

1 2 3

___________2____


1

2

3

+- 60 kV/8 mA

2 s

1 2 3

60/8____2.00____


- +

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 25


5.5

S002.1: Radiation w/o rot. movement, max. radiation time selectable, prim. diaphr. in last pos.

Releasing radiation 4. Release radiation by pressing the release button.

Radiation from any tube assembly position, no rotary movement

The primary diaphragm remains in the last position set

The maximum radiation time corresponds to the selected radiation time

NOTEiIf you let go of the release button before the maximum radiation time has elapsed, radiation is terminated prematurely and the exposure is interrupted. The actual radiation time is not displayed.

When you release radiation during the cool-down interval, a countdown of the remaining waiting time is displayed in selection field 2 on the Multipad (au-tomatic exposure blocking).




For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:



59 38 399 D33525 – 26 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S002.3: Radiation w/o rot. movement, max. radiation time selectable, prim. diaphr. opened fully

5.5.2 S002: Test step 3 (not for XG 3 / 3 PPE)

Difference from S002, test step 1:

Primary diaphragm is opened fully

NOTEi

For selection and operating sequence, see S002, test step 1.

After you have selected test step 3, the primary diaphragm is moved to the new position (opened fully). During this time, a progress indicator is displayed in selection field 1.

1 2 3

1

2

3


3

S2

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 27


5.5

S002.4: Radiation without rotary movement, max. radiation time selectable, with 0.8 mm Cu


Difference from S002, test step 1:

A filter element for a 0.8 Cu step filter is inserted in the beam path

The primary diaphragm is widened symmetrically to the pan position so that the step filter still remains covered

NOTEi

For selection and operating sequence, see S002, test step 1.

After you have selected test step 4, the primary diaphragm is moved to the new position (opened fully and symmetrical to PAN position). During this time, a progress indicator is displayed in selection field 1.

1 2 3

1

2

3


4

S2

59 38 399 D33525 – 28 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S005: General X-ray tube assembly service


General X-ray tube assembly service



Selecting service routine S005 1. Use the arrow keys to select service routine S005.

Function S005 General X-ray tube assembly service

Test step 2 Automatic compensation of preheating Security access

Test step 4 Fan test

Test step 5 Temperature sensor test

Test step 6 Switch off cool-down interval of the single tank Security access

Test step 7 Configuring continuous operation of the tube assembly fan Security access

1

2

3

+- S005

2

1 2 3

S005_______2____


+-

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 29


5.6

S005.2: Automatic adjustment of preheating

5.6.1 S005: Test step 2



An inactive progress indicator in selection field 1 and the message FFFFin selection field 2 signal that the system is ready for compensation.

1

2

3

+- S005

2

1 2 3

S005_______2____


+-

1

2

3

- +5

1 2 3

___________5____


1

2

3

FFFF

1 2 3

_______FFFF____


S5

2

E X RAY

59 38 399 D33525 – 30 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S005.2: Automatic adjustment of preheating

Performing the compensation 3. Start the automatic compensation by pressing the release button.

CAUTIONThe tube assembly must be at operating temperature before the compensation. To do this, release radiation once for 14.0 s at kV/mA level 60/9 via service routine S001 (see page 5-21).

NOTEiKeep pressing the release button until compensation is completed and the new offset value for preheating is displayed. During the compensation proce-dure, a progress indicator is displayed in selection field 1.

NOTEiIf you interrupt the compensation procedure prematurely by letting go of the release button, the message EEEE appears in selection field 2. This message must be acknowledged with the R key.




For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:



1

2

3

2 mV(VH)

1 2 3


S5

2

E X RAY Active!

__________2____

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 31


5.6

S005.4: Fan test

5.6.2 S005: Test step 4


Testing the fan 2. Switch the fan ON by selecting code 01 with the arrow keys and confirm-ing with the R key .

Code: 00 = Fan OFF

01 = Fan ON

Check the fan for running noise.

1

2

3

+- S005

4

1 2 3

S005_______4____


+-

R R

R

1

2

3

+- 01

1 2 3

__01____________


R

59 38 399 D33525 – 32 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S005.4: Fan test




For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:



NOTEiWhen you quit the service routine the fan is automatically switched OFF again.

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 33


5.6

S005.5: Temperature sensor test

5.6.3 S005: Test step 5


After test step 5 is selected, selection field 1 displays the single tank temperature in °C. The display is updated once per second.




For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:



1

2

3

+- S005

5

1 2 3

S005_______5____


+-

1

2

3

31.5C

1 2 3

__31.5_C________


S5

5

59 38 399 D33525 – 34 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S005.6: Switch off cool-down interval of the single tank

5.6.4 S005: Test step 6

Upon explicit customer request, the monitored pulse/pause ratio can be dis-abled in exceptional cases. This can be done one time via service routine S005, test step 6. Re-enabling the pulse/pause monitoring function is not possible, though. Such a one-time disablement can be displayed on the info screen and in the detail query by entering "PulsePause-Disable".

CAUTIONThe execution of this service routine is irreversible. The system is operated beyond its specifications afterwards. This may result in an X-ray tube assembly failure. As a result, the system warranty expires. SIRONA is able to prove this system setting after a system failure.



1

2

3

+- S005

6

1 2 3

S005_______6____


+-

1

2

3

- +5

1 2 3

___________5____


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 35


5.6


The status of the pulse/pause treatment is displayed in the selection field 1:

01 = Pulse/pause monitoring enabled

00 = Pulse/pause monitoring disabled

Disabling the pulse/pause monitoringCAUTION

The execution of this service routine is irreversible. The system is operated beyond its specifications afterwards. This may result in an X-ray tube assembly failure. As a result, the system warranty expires. SIRONA is able to prove this system setting after a system failure.

3. To distable the pulse/pause monitoring, select code 00 in selection field 1 with the arrow keys.

The Memory key (XGPlus) or the LED above theMemory key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up.

1

2

3

- +01

6

1 2 3

______01________


R

1

2

3

- +00

6

1 2 3

______00________


R

59 38 399 D33525 – 36 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008



4. To save the selection, first press the Memory key (R key (XGPlus)/LED above R key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up) and then the R key .

NOTEiIf pulse/pause monitoring has been disabled before already, this service rou-tine serves as a mere status display. The arrow keys, memory key and R key are not displayed by the XGPlus. These keys are then disabled on the XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE.




For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:



R R

1

2

3

- +00 S5

6

1 2 3

______00________

XGPlus: Easypad touchscreen XG 5/3/3 PPE: Multipad

R

R

1

2

3

00 S5

6

1 2 3

______00________


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 37


5.6

S005.7: Setting continuous operation of the tube assembly fan

5.6.5 S005: Test step 7

The tube assembly fan can be configured for continuous operation at the express wish of the customer This can be done via service routine S005, test step 7. The customer should be informed in advance about the increaed noise development to be expected. A demonstration of the fan noise can be made with service routine S005.4.

CAUTIONBecause of the expected greater contamination of the fan and of the single tank housing, the configuration of continuous operation is documented irreversibly on the tube assembly in order to obtain additional information in the case of returned goods.



1

2

3

+- S005

7

1 2 3

S005_______7____


+-

1

2

3

- +5

1 2 3

___________5____


59 38 399 D33525 – 38 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008



The operating mode of the fan is displayed in selection field 1:

01 = continuous operation of the fan

00 = controlled operation of the fan

Switching on continuous fan operation 3. To switch the fan to continuous operation, select code 01 in selection field 1 with the arrow keys.

The Memory key (XGPlus) or the LED above the Memory key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up.

1

2

3

- +00

7

1 2 3

00____________


R

1

2

3

- +01

7

1 2 3

00____________


R

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 39


5.6


4. To save the selection, first press the Memory key (R key (XGPlus)/LED above R key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up) and then the R key .




For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:



R R

1

2

3

- +01 S5

7

1 2 3

______01________


R

R

59 38 399 D33525 – 40 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S007: Error logging memory


Error logging memory

NOTEiIn addition to Service routine S007.1, you can also use the extended detail query in SIXABCON to check the error logging memory.



Function S007 Error logging memory

Test step 1 Display error logging memory

Test step 2 Clear error logging memory Security access

Test step 5 Enabling the CAN bus logging in the Miniweb

1

2

3

+- S007

1

1 2 3

S007_______7____


+-

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 41


5.7

S007.1: Display error logging memory

5.7.1 S007: Test step 1


2. Select the desired error event (in example 66).

XGPlus: Easypad touchscreen You can browse between the different occurred error numbers with the arrow keys in selection field 1.

The corresponding error message is displayed in selection field 2 (see section 2.5). Selection field 3 displays the date and time of the error event.

You can set the step width for browsing between the error numbers with the patient symbol keys.

The currently selected patient symbol key is lit. A step width of 1 is preset (left patient symbol key is lit).

1

2

3

+- S007

1

1 2 3

S007_______1____


+-

1

2

3

+- 66

E6 81 07

2004-12-14; 12:31:09

1

Step width 100Step width 10Step width 1

59 38 399 D33525 – 42 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008



XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE: Multipad You can browse between the different occurred error numbers with the arrow keys in selection field 1. You can display the error code, time or date of the error event with the arrow keys in selection field 2.

You can set the step width for browsing between the error numbers with the first three patient symbol keys (starting from the left).

The LED above the selected patient symbol key is lit. A step width of 1 is pre-set (the LED above the left patient symbol key is lit).

1 2 3

66______E6_81_07

1 2 3

66______E6_81_07

1 2 3

65______E7_11_08

1 2 3

66______13:30:57

1 2 3

66______05-01-17

Browse back

Browse forward

Dat

eT

ime

Err

or

cod

e

Step width 100Step width 10Step width 1

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 43


5.7





For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:



59 38 399 D33525 – 44 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S007.2: Clear error logging memory

5.7.2 S007: Test step 2



The system's readiness to clear the memory is indicated by the display mes-sage FFFF in selection field 1. If the error logging memory does not contain any data, 0000 is displayed.

1

2

3

+- S007

2

1 2 3

S007_______2____


+-

1

2

3

- +7

1 2 3

___________7____


1

2

3

FFFF

1 2 3

____FFFF________


R

S7

2

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 45


5.7


Clear error logging memory 3. To clear the memory, first press the Memory key (R key (XGPlus)/LED above R key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up) and then the R key .




For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:



R R

R

1

2

3

FFFF

1 2 3

____FFFF________


R

S7

2

1

2

3

0000

1 2 3

____0000________


R

S7

2

59 38 399 D33525 – 46 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008



5.7.3 S007: Test step 5

CAUTIONThis service routine should be executed only in consultation with and with the support of the SIRONA Customer Service Center!


Activation of logging 2. Select the desired setting using the arrow keys of selection field 1:

– WS CAN bus off (factory setting): Logging switched off

– WS CAN bus on: Logging switched on

– WS CAN bus Ex. on: Extended logging switched on

After the test step has been selected the Test key (XGPlus) or the LED above the Test key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up.

3. To activate the logging function, press the Test key .

All CAN bus events occurring from now on during operation of the system will be logged and can be displayed with a web browser (e.g. Internet Explorer). This log will help you when consulting the SIRONA customer service center for error diagnosis.

1

2

3

+- S007

5

1 2 3

S007_______5____


+-

T

T

T T

1 +- WS CAN bus on1

2

3

1 2 3

WS_CAN-BUS_ON


S7

5

TT

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 47


5.7


Displaying the log with a web browser Enter the following web address on a PC (with internet access) integrated in a system network:

The CAN bus protocol is displayed in the browser and can be saved as HTML page, printed out of sent to the SIRONA customer service center.




For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:



NOTEiAfter the unit is switched off, the logging function will be deactivated again automatically.

http://XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX:8051/CAN

IP address of the unit

CAN-Bus State

Management

Busmode: STTP-Auto

CAN-Controller

ErrCnt = 0

ErrCnt0 = 0

ErrCnt1 = 0

ErrCnt2 = 0

ErrCnt3 = 0

Status-Register DX41

Mode-Register

Bit WertSleepMode noAccFilter Mode singleSelfTest Mode noListenOnly Mode noReset Mode no

Status-Register

Bit WertBus status bus-onError status no error Transmit status transmitting

Receivestatus idle

Tx complete incompleteTx buffer releasedData overrun noRx buffer empty

Interrupt-Register

Bit WertBus Error Intr noArbitration Lost Intr noError Passive Interrupt no

Wake-Up Iterrupt noData Overrun Interrupt no

Error Warning Interrupt no

Transmit Interrupt noReceive Interrupt no

Interrupt-Enable (nur PeliCAN-Mode)

Bit WertBus Error Intr enabled Arbitration Lost Intr enabled Error Passive Interrupt enabled Wake-Up Iterrupt disabledData Overrun Interrupt enabled Error Warning Interrupt enabled Transmit Interrupt disabledReceive Interrupt disabled

Sonst. Register

Register Wert

Clock divider (CDR) Clock divider (CDR): 0xc0(PeliCAN-Mode)

RX ErrorCounter 0TX ErrorCounter 0ErrorCodeCapture 0x00Bus-Timing 0 (BTR0) 0x03Bus-Timing 1 (BTR1) 0x18


Status-Register DX6


Status-Register DX7

Bit WertCAN-Error Comp. 0Overrun Error 0Receiver Warn. 0Receiver Error 0Tramsmit Warn. 0Tramsmit Error 0Bus Off 0




Bit WertCAN-Error Comp. 0Overrun Error 0

Status-Register DX81P


TimeStamp; Typ; ID; Len; ;Data0758084.419; Tx; 0x500; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758086.420; Tx; 0x480; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758088.420; Tx; 0x680; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758090.435; Tx; 0x700; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758092.421; Tx; 0x780; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758096.435; Rx; 0x081; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x000758098.431; Rx; 0x101; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x000758100.445; Rx; 0x201; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x04 0x00 0x000758104.432; Rx; 0x301; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x03 0x00 0x000758106.432; Rx; 0x401; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x000758108.432; Rx; 0x501; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x000758110.434; Rx; 0x481; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x01 0x00 0x000758120.453; Tx; 0x001; 0x08; 0x26 0x3b 0x0f 0x01 0x0b 0x49 0x1b 0xe00758122.425; Tx; 0x080; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758124.425; Tx; 0x100; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758126.439; Tx; 0x200; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758128.426; Tx; 0x280; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758130.459; Tx; 0x300; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758132.461; Tx; 0x400; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758134.428; Tx; 0x500; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758136.430; Tx; 0x480; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758138.429; Tx; 0x680; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758140.431; Tx; 0x700; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758142.429; Tx; 0x780; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758146.442; Rx; 0x081; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00

Receiver Warn. 0Receiver Error 0Tramsmit Warn. 0Tramsmit Error 0Bus Off 0



0758148.440; Rx; 0x101; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x000758150.461; Rx; 0x201; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x04 0x00 0x000758154.440; Rx; 0x301; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x03 0x00 0x000758156.441; Rx; 0x401; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x000758158.441; Rx; 0x501; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x000758160.464; Rx; 0x481; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x01 0x00 0x000758170.458; Tx; 0x001; 0x08; 0x26 0x3b 0x0f 0x01 0x0b 0x49 0x00 0x0a0758172.450; Tx; 0x080; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758174.436; Tx; 0x100; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758176.469; Tx; 0x200; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758178.436; Tx; 0x280; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758180.451; Tx; 0x361; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x000758182.438; Tx; 0x400; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758184.438; Tx; 0x500; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758186.439; Tx; 0x480; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758188.439; Tx; 0x680; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758190.468; Tx; 0x700; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758192.440; Tx; 0x780; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758196.450; Rx; 0x081; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x000758198.450; Rx; 0x101; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x000758200.451; Rx; 0x201; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x04 0x00 0x000758204.450; Rx; 0x337; 0x08; 0xc7 0x32 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x000758206.464; Rx; 0x401; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x000758208.455; Rx; 0x501; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x000758210.468; Rx; 0x481; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x01 0x00 0x000758220.467; Tx; 0x001; 0x08; 0x27 0x3b 0x0f 0x01 0x0b 0x49 0x1b 0xe00758222.446; Tx; 0x080; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758224.445; Tx; 0x100; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758226.461; Tx; 0x200; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758228.447; Tx; 0x280; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758230.450; Tx; 0x300; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758232.447; Tx; 0x400; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758234.447; Tx; 0x500; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758236.476; Tx; 0x480; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758238.449; Tx; 0x680; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758240.465; Tx; 0x700; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758242.450; Tx; 0x780; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758246.464; Rx; 0x081; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x000758248.460; Rx; 0x101; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x000758250.475; Rx; 0x201; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x04 0x00 0x000758254.461; Rx; 0x301; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x02 0x03 0x00 0x610758256.471; Rx; 0x401; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x000758258.464; Rx; 0x501; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x000758260.463; Rx; 0x481; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x01 0x00 0x000758270.488; Tx; 0x001; 0x08; 0x27 0x3b 0x0f 0x01 0x0b 0x49 0x00 0x070758272.454; Tx; 0x080; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758274.455; Tx; 0x100; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758276.469; Tx; 0x200; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758278.455; Tx; 0x280; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758280.478; Tx; 0x300; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758282.457; Tx; 0x400; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758284.457; Tx; 0x500; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758286.459; Tx; 0x4df; 0x08; 0xc7 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x000758288.458; Tx; 0x680; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758290.460; Tx; 0x700; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758292.458; Tx; 0x780; 0x08; 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x55 0x550758296.470; Rx; 0x081; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x000758298.468; Rx; 0x101; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x000758300.486; Rx; 0x201; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x04 0x00 0x000758304.469; Rx; 0x301; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x04 0x03 0x00 0x610758306.478; Rx; 0x401; 0x08; 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00

Example for the first 4 pages of an extended log (WS CAN bus Ex. on)

etc.

59 38 399 D33525 – 48 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S008: Update service


Update service



5.8.1 S008: Test step 2


Function S008 Checking the software versions

Test step 2 Overview of the module software versions

Test step 3 Entry of a unit serial number

Test step 4(XG5/XGPlus only)

Initialize the function activation

1

2

3

+- S008

2

1 2 3

S008_______2____


+-

1

2

3

+- S008

2

1 2 3

S008_______2____


+-

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 49


5.8

S008.2: Overview of the module software versions

XGPlus: Easypad touchscreen The software versions currently installed in the modules are displayed on the info screen of the touchscreen display.

XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE: Multipad The single-line display of the Multipad shows the message SYSTEMSOFTWARE.

Select the desired module using the arrow keys of selection field 1 and con-firm your selection by pressing the Memory key .

The software version of the selected module is displayed in selection field 1.

To return to the module selection menu, press the Service key .


To return to the Main menu, press the arrow key .

For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:

To return to the module selection menu, press the up arrow key above selection field 3.

To return to the service routine selection menu and then to the Main menu, press the up arrow key above selection field 3 repeatedly.

65

System : V02.20.00

DX11 : V00.02.56DX6 : V00.02.35DX7 : V00.02.56DX41 : V00.02.33DX42 : V00.02.22DX61 : V00.02.26DX81 : V00.02.28

1 2 3

SYSTEMSOFTWARE__

1 2 3

DX11____________

1 2 3

V02.18.00_______

59 38 399 D33525 – 50 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S008.3: Input/confirmation of unit serial number

5.8.2 S008: Test step 3


This test step is required...

if a software update is performed...

for XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE: from V02.18.1 to a higher versionfor XGPlus: from V02.19 to a higher

version. The value X is then displayed in selection field 1 of service routine S008.3 (and with the arrow keys for the XGPlus ). When opened, the routine is initially in the editing mode for entry of the unit serial number (case A).

if modules have been replaced. In this case, the backup copy of the unit serial number still stored in the unit must be reconfirmed (case B).

If this service routine is called up with a valid unit serial number, the possibility of entering or confirming the serial number will be deactivated. The valid serial number is displayed in selection field 1.

1

2

3

+- S008

3

1 2 3

S008_______3____


+-

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 51


5.8


Case A: Entry of a unit serial number

1. Get the unit serial number from the rating plate of the unit (e.g. 00123).

2. Select the first digit of the serial number with the arrow keys in selection field 1 (from the left in example 1) and accept this value with the R key .

1X is now displayed in selection field 1 and the second digit of the serial num-ber can be selected.

3. Select the second digit of the serial number with the arrow keys in selec-tion field 1 (from the left in example 2) and accept this value with theR key .

R R

1

2

3

1

1 2 3

1___ ___________


R

3

+-

R

1

2

3

1X

1 2 3

1X_____________


R

3

+-

R R

1

2

3

12

1 2 3

12______________


R

3

+-

R

59 38 399 D33525 – 52 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008



12X is now displayed in selection field 1 and the third digit of the serial number can be selected.

4. Repeat this procedure until the complete unit serial number has been en-tered.

5. Save the unit serial number with the Memory key .

The complete serial number is displayed for review. The system automatically changes the entry to a 9-digit number by adding leading zeroes at the left.

NOTEiAt this point you have the possibility of discarding an incorrectly entered serial number. This is done by quitting the service routine without finally confirming the serial number via the R key.

1

2

3

12X

1 2 3

12X_____________


R

3

+-

1

2

3

123X

1 2 3

123X ____________


R

3

+-

1

2

3

000000123

1 2 3

000000123_______


R

3

+-

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 53


5.8


6. Check the correctness of the unit serial number you have entered and, if it is OK, confirm this by pressing the R key .

CAUTIONMake sure that you do not accidentally press the R key and/or the Memory key before all digits of the serial number have been entered. Otherwise an incorrect serial number will be irreversibly entered.

Case B: Confirming the unit serial number

1. To confirm the displayed serial number, press the R key .

You can interrupt this procedure with the Service key . The unit serial number will then not be confirmed.




For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:



R R

1

2

3

000000123

1 2 3

000000123_______


R

3

R

S8

R R

1

2

3

000000123

1 2 3

000000123_______

XGPlus: Easypad touchscreen XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:Multipad

R

3

R

S8

59 38 399 D33525 – 54 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S008.4: Initialize the function activation

5.8.3 S008: Test step 4 (XG5 / XGPlus only)


After the test step has been selected, there are two possibilities:

It is possible to initialize the function activation (case A)

It is not possible to initialize the function activation (case B)

Case A: Initialization of function activation is possible

Case B: Initialization of function activation is not possible

NOTEiIf it is possible to initialize the function activation, then the Memory key (XGPlus) or the LED above the Memory key (XG5) will light up at this point.

1

2

3

+- S008

4 +-

S8

1 2 3

S008_______4____

XG 5: MultipadXGPlus: Touchscreen on Easypad

XGPlus: Touchscreen on Easypad

R

1

2

3

S8

4

1 2 3

_________________

XG 5: Multipad

1

2

3

FFFF S8

4


1 2 3

FFFF____________

XG 5: Multipad

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 55


5.8

S008.4: Initialize the function activation

Performing initialization 2. To initialize the function activation, first press the Memory key (R key (XGPlus) or the LED above the R key (XG5) lights up) and then the R key .

Quitting the service routine For XGPlus:

Via the Service or double-arrow key you can return to the menu for selecting the service routines.

From the Service menu, you can enter the Main menu via the double-arrow key .

For XG 5:

You can return to the menu for selecting the service routines with the up arrow key above selection field 3.

From the Service menu, you can return to the Main menu via the up arrow key above selection field 3.

R R

R

R

1

2

3

S8

4


1 2 3

_________________

XG 5: Multipad

59 38 399 D33525 – 56 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S009: Initializing the flash file system


Flash file system

NOTEiIf the flash file system is initialized, the contents of the Error logging memory are also lost.



5.9.1 S009: Test step 4


Function S009 Flash file system

Test step 4 Initializing the flash file system Security access

1

2

3

+- S009

4

1 2 3

S009_______4____


+-

1

2

3

+- S009

4

1 2 3

S009_______4____


+-

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 57


5.9

S009.4: Initializing the flash file system


After the test step has been selected the Memory key (XGPlus) or the LED above the Memory key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up.

Initializing the flash file system 3. To initialize the flash file system, first press the Memory key (R key (XGPlus) or the LED above the R key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up) and then the R key .

Flash file system formatting in progress. This process takes approx. 5 - 6 min. and is visualized by a progress indicator. The end of this process is indicated by the message 0000 in selection field 2. The Memory key (XGPlus) or the LED above the Memory key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up.

1

2

3

9

1 2 3

___________9____


+-

R R

R

1

2

3

1 2 3


R

S9

4

1

2

3

1 2 3


R

S9

4

59 38 399 D33525 – 58 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S009.4: Initializing the flash file system

When the initialization has been completed, 0000 is displayed in the selection field.




For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:



1

2

3

0000

1 2 3


R

S9

4 0000____

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 59


5.10

S012: CAN bus service


CAN bus service

NOTEiThe CAN bus service is not yet implemented for module DX11.



Function S012 CAN bus service

Test step 2 Inquiry of the CAN status register of the modules

Test step 3 Resetting the CAN status register of the modules

Test step 4 Display of CAN bus cycle on LEDs of modules

1

2

3

+- S012

1 2 3

S012_______2____


59 38 399 D33525 – 60 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S012.2: Inquiry of the CAN status register of the modules

5.10.1 S012: Test step 2

NOTEiBefore querying the CAN status register for the modules, you should first reset the registers via service routine S012.3 (see page 5-63).


The selected module is displayed in the selection field 1.

Selecting a module 2. Select the desired module using the arrow keys of selection field 1.

After the module has been selected the Test key (XGPlus) or the LED above the Test key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up.

1

2

3

+- S012

2

1 2 3

S012_______2____


+-

S12

T

1

2

3

+- DX61

1 2 3

DX61____________


T

T

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 61


5.10


Selecting the register 3. Press the Test key .

XGPlus: Easypad touchscreen The CAN status registers of the currently selected module, e.g. "CAN-State DX6" are displayed.

NOTEiIf values deviate from zero, this indicates a problematic CAN bus connection.

XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE: Multipad The first CAN status registers of the currently selected module, e.g. "CAN-State DX6" are displayed.

Select the desired CAN status register using the arrow keys in selection field 1 and confirm your selection with the Memory key .

The value of the selected CAN status register is displayed.

You can return to the CAN status register selection menu using the up arrow key or the Service key .

T T

TT

1

2

3

+- DX6

1 2 3

DX6____________


65

CAN-State DX6

CAN-Error Comp. : 0Overrun Error : 0Receiver Warn. : 0Receiver Error : 0Transmit Warn. : 0Transmit Error : 0Bus off : 0

1 2 3

CAN_ERROR_COMP.__

1 2 3

0_____________

59 38 399 D33525 – 62 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008






For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:



båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 63


5.10

S012.3: Resetting the CAN status register of the modules

5.10.2 S012: Test step 3

NOTEiPerform this service routine as required prior to service routine S012.2.


After the test step is selected, the Memory and R keys (XGPlus) or the LEDs above the Memory and R keys (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) light up.

Clearing the CAN bus registers 2. To clear the CAN bus registers, first press the Memory key (R key (XGPlus) or LED above R key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up) and then the R key .

1

2

3

+- S012

3

1 2 3

S012_______3____


+-

S12

R

R

R R

1

2

3

1 2 3

________________


R

R

S12

3

59 38 399 D33525 – 64 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S012.3: Resetting the CAN status register of the modules




For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:



båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 65


5.10

S012.4: Display of CAN bus cycles on the LEDs of the modules

5.10.3 S012: Test step 4


After the test step is selected, the code for the current setting of the display appears in selection field 1:

00 = LED display on the modules switched OFF

01 = LED display on the modules switched ON

Switching LED display on/off 2. Select the desired code using the arrow keys of selection field 1 and con-firm your selection by pressing the Test key .

NOTEiThe LEDs on the modules normally flash slowly (1 Hz) (for code 00). When code 01 has been selected and confirmed, the CAN bus clock pulse of the TTP protocol, which is output by the master module as a broadcast with a fre-quency of 20 Hz, is output on the LEDs (the green life LED flashes on DX7). Thus, by "wiggling through" all of the connectors, you can directly detect the contact loss of the module on the CAN bus. The activation or deactivation of this function simultaneously acts on all modules.

1

2

3

+- S012

4

1 2 3

S012_______4____


+-

S12

T T

1

2

3

+- 01

1 2 3

01______________


TT

59 38 399 D33525 – 66 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S012.4: Display of CAN bus cycles on the LEDs of the modules




For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:



båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 67


5.11

S014: Rotation motor service


Rotation motor service



5.11.1 S014: Test step 1

This test step realizes "isolated" travel of the rotation motor to the pan home position Actuators 1 and 2 remain in their current positions.


Function S014 Rotation motor service

Test step 1 Travel of rotational drive to the Pan home position

Test step 2 Travel of rotational drive to the ceph home position

Test step 3 Free travel of rotational drive

Test step 4 Display of light barrier signals of rotational drive

1

2

3

+- S014

1

1 2 3

S014_______1____


+-

1

2

3

+- S014

1

1 2 3

S014_______1____


+-

59 38 399 D33525 – 68 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S014.1: Travel of rotational drive to the Pan home position

After the test step is selected, selection field 1 displays the current status:

FFFF = Position of rotation undefined(following activation of service routine)

Moving the ring 2. Press the R key to move the ring to the pan home position.


FFFF = Position of rotation undefined (following activation of service routine)

0000 = Pan home position reached

EEEE = Pan home position not reached due to an error state

1

2

3

+- FFFF

1 2 3

____FFFF________


S14

R

1

R R

R

1

2

3

+- FFFF

1 2 3

____FFFF________


R

1

S14

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 69


5.11

S014.2: Travel of rotational drive to the ceph home position




For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:



5.11.2 S014: Test step 2

This test step realizes "isolated" travel of the rotation motor to the ceph home position (with the arm in the right or the left position, depending on the config-uration). Actuators 1 and 2 remain in their current positions.

Travel to the ceph home position is also possible without configuring the sys-tem version for the cephalometer mode.


1

2

3

+- S014

2

1 2 3

S014_______2____


+-

59 38 399 D33525 – 70 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S014.2: Travel of rotational drive to the ceph home position


FFFF = Position of rotation undefined(following activation of service routine)

Moving the ring 2. Press the R key to move the ring to the ceph home position.


FFFF = Position of rotation undefined (following activation of service routine)

0000 = Ceph home position reached

EEEE = Ceph home position not reached due to an error state

1

2

3

+- FFFF

1 2 3

____FFFF________


S14

R

2

R R

R

1

2

3

+- FFFF

1 2 3

____FFFF________


R

2

S14

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 71


5.11

S014.3: Free travel of rotational drive




For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:



5.11.3 S014: Test step 3

This test step realizes "isolated" travel of the rotation motor to the ceph home position (with the arm in the right or the left position, depending on the config-uration). Actuators 1 and 2 remain in their current positions.

Travel to the ceph home position is also possible without configuring the sys-tem version for the cephalometer mode.


1

2

3

+- S014

3

1 2 3

S014_______3____


+-

59 38 399 D33525 – 72 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S014.3: Free travel of rotational drive

After the test step is selected, selection field 1 displays the arrow keys (for XGPlus):

Moving the ring 2. Press the arrow keys to move the ring to the right (+) or to the left (-). The ring keeps moving as long as the key remains pressed.




For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:



1

2

3

+-

1 2 3

________________


S14

3

1

2

3

+-

1 2 3

________________


3

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 73


5.11

S014.4: Display of light barrier signal of rotational drive

5.11.4 S014: Test step 4

This test step realizes display of the switching state of rotation motor light bar-rier V1_3.


After the test step is selected on the Easypad (with XGPlus) the service key and patient symbol key 1 are displayed:

Checking the light barrier 2. Move the ring manually. Tripping of the light barrier is indicated by illumi-nation of the patient symbol key (on XGPlus) or by illumination of the LED above patient symbol key 1 (on XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE).




For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:



1

2

3

+- S014

4

1 2 3

S014_______4____


+-

1

2

3

+-

1 2 3

________________


S14

4

59 38 399 D33525 – 74 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S015: Actuator service


Actuator service


Selecting service routine S015 1. Use the arrow keys to selec service routine S015.

5.12.1 S015: Test step 5

The use of this service routine is suitable for troubleshooting of motor and cable defects. Furthermore, the possibility of performing isolated travel with an individual drive makes it possible to release the clamping of the actuator/rotation system and check the stiffness of the individual adjusting axes.


Function S015 Actuator service

Test step 5 Testing of actuators 1 and 2

1

2

3

+- S015

5

1 2 3

S015_______5____


+-

1

2

3

+- S015

5

1 2 3

S015_______5____


+-

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 75


5.12

S015.1: Testing of actuators 1 and 2

After the test step is selected, selection field 1 displays the arrow keys (for XGPlus):

Patient symbol key 1 indicates the switching state of the light barrier for actu-ator 1; patient symbol key 2 indicates the switching state of the light barrier for actuator 2:

Patient symbol key (XGPlus), = Light barrier located in switching LED above patient symbol key plate(XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lit

Patient symbol key (XGPlus), = Light barrier not located LED above patient symbol key in switching plate(XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) not lit

Moving the actuators 2. Press the arrow keys in selection field 1 (for actuator 1) or selection field 2 (for actuator 2) to move the actuator to the right (+) or to the left (-). The ac-tuor keeps moving as long as the key remains pressed.

Using the R key , the system (actuators 1 and 2) can be moved back to the pan home position. In this position, patient symbol keys 1 and 2 (XGPlus) and the LEDs above patient symbol keys 1 and 2 (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) light up.

1

2

3

1 2 3

_______________


5

S15+-

R

1

2

3

1 2 3

_______________


+-

R

+- 5

R R

59 38 399 D33525 – 76 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S015.1: Testing of actuators 1 and 2




For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:



båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 77


5.13

S017: Configuration service


Configuration service


Function S017 System configuration

Test step 2 Configuring the hardware version Security access

Test step 3 Entering the country group code Security access

Test step 4(XGPlus only)

Selecting a language index within the language set Security access


Selecting a language set index within the language set Security access

Test step 6 Activating the remote control display Security access

Test step 8 Selecting the kVmA level series Security access

Test step 9 Configuring operaton without board DX41 Security access

Test step 10 Configuring the headrest Security access

Test step 11 Selecting the image format Security access


Enabling/disabling the preview image Security access


Enabling/disabling the welcome screen Security access


Enabling/disabling certain lines of the welcome screen Security access

Test step 15 Activating/deactivating the acoustic signal for end of exposure Security access

Test step 17 Setting the standard acceptance/constancy test, RöV FRG Security access

Checking or accepting the diaphragm configuration, worldwide

Test step 18 In preparation.Caution! This routine must not be activated, since it will cause malfunctioning of the unit.

Security access

Test step 22(XG 3 PPE only)

Deactivating/activating the PPE display after each unit power-up Security access

Test step 23(XG 3 PPE only)

Defining the PPE display warning level after each exposure Security access

59 38 399 D33525 – 78 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S017.2: Configuring the hardware version

Selecting service routine S017 1. Use thearrow keys to select service routine S017.

5.13.1 S017: Test step 2


Confirming the security access 2. Confirm the security access by once again selecting the number of the main routine (17) with the arrow keys of selection field 2 and then press-ing the Service key .

1

2

3

+- S017

2

1 2 3

S017_______2____


+-

1

2

3

+- S017

2

1 2 3

S017_______2____


+-

1

2

3

17

1 2 3

__________17____


+-

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 79


5.13


Selecting the system version 3. Select the desired system version using the arrow keys of selection field 1.

0001 = panoramic digital0003 = panoramic digital/ceph left digital0005 = panoramic digital/ceph right digital

0041 = panoramic digital, TSA (XGPlus only)0043 = panoramic digital, ceph left digital, TSA (XGPlus only)0045 = panoramic digital, ceph right digital, TSA (XGPlus only)

0081 = system version XG 3 / 3 PPE

After the system version has been selected the Memory key (XGPlus) or the LED above the Memory key (XG 5 / 3 /3 PPE) lights up.

4. To save the selected system version, first press the Memory key (R key (XGPlus) or LED above R key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up) and then the R key .

NOTEiThe set value is permanently saved as the relevant system version.

1

2

3

+- 0003

1 2 3

____0003________


R

2

R R

R

1

2

3

+- 0003

1 2 3

____0003________


R

2

S17

59 38 399 D33525 – 80 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008



Checking/setting the jumper position 5. Check the jumper settings of sockets

306 (DX61, diaphragm)(only if XG 3 / 3 PPE= 0081), 309 (DX91, ceph sensor) and 503 (DX81, ceph sensor)

on board DX1.

DX1

Socket X309

Jumper inside

Cephalometer not connected, i.e. connector not plugged in

0001 and 0041

Socket X503

NOTEiFor more information on the correct jumper positions and CAN bus wiring, refer to sec-tion 3.2.2. Socket X309

Jumper outside

Cephalometer connected, i.e. connector plugged in

0003, 000, 0043 and 0045

Socket X503

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 81


5.13



To go on to the next test step, press the Service key .

To return to the Service menu, press the double arrow key .


For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:


To return to the Service menu, press the up arrow key above selection field 3.


0081 = XG 3 / 3 PPE

Socket X306

Jumper inside

Socket X309

Jumper inside

Socket X503

Jumper inside

Cephalometer and motor-driven diaphragm not connected,i.e. connector not plugged in

59 38 399 D33525 – 82 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S017.3: Entering the country group code

5.13.2 S017: Test step 3

Start test step 3 in the same way as described on page 5-78 or by pressing the Service key in test step 2.

NOTEiIf you go to test step 3 from test step 2 by pressing the Service key, the security access confirmation will be skipped.

Selecting the country group code 1. Select the desired country group code using the arrow keys of selection field 1.

00 = worldwide01 = Asia02 = USA

After the country group code is selected, the Memory key (XGPlus) or the LED above theMemory key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up.

2. To save the selected country group code, first press the Memory key (R key (XGPlus) or LED above R key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up) and then the R key .

NOTEiThe setting is permanently saved.

1

2

3

+- 00

1 2 3

______00________


R

3

R R

R

1

2

3

+- 00

1 2 3

______00________


R

3

S17

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 83


5.13

S017.3: Entering the country group code





For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:




59 38 399 D33525 – 84 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S017.4: Selecting the language index within a language set

5.13.3 S017: Test step 4 (XGPlus only)



Selecting a language index 1. Use the arrow keys in selection field 1 to select the desired language index.

00 = English01 = German02 = French03 = Italian04 = Dutch05 = Spanish06 = Russian07 = Norwegian08 = Portuguese09 = Swedish10 = Chinese11 = Korean12 = Japanese

After the language index is selected, the Memory key lights up.

R

1

2

3

+- 01

XGPlus: Easypad touchscreen

4

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 85


5.13

S017.4: Selecting the language index within a language set

2. To save the selected language index, first press the Memory key (the R key lights up) and then the R key .


NOTEiIf the selected language is not contained in the installed language set, English is set as the default language.

Quitting the service routine To go on to the next test step, press the Service key .



R

R

1

2

3

+- 01


4

S17

59 38 399 D33525 – 86 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S017.5: Selecting the language set index within a language set




Selecting a language set index 1. Select the desired language set index using the arrow keys of selection field 1.

00 = German, English, French, Italian01 = German, English, French, Dutch02 = German, English, Spanish, Russian03 = German, English, Korean, Japanese

After the language set index is selected, the Memory key lights up.

2. To save the selected language set index, first press the Memory key (R key lights up) and then press the R key .


Perform a software update to install the corresponding languages in the system (see section 1.9).

R

1

2

3

+- 00


5

R

R

1

2

3

+- 00


5

S17

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 87


5.13

S017.6: Activating the remote control display



To quit the Service menu and return to the Main menu, press the double arrow key .

5.13.5 S017: Test step 6



Selecting the device status 1. Select the desired device status using the arrow keys of selection field 1.

00 = Remote control inactive01 = Remote control active

After the device status is selected, the Memory key (XGPlus) or the LED above the Memory key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up.

1

2

3

+- 00

1 2 3

______00________


R

6

59 38 399 D33525 – 88 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S017.6: Activating the remote control display

2. To save the selected device status, first press the Memory key (R key (XGPlus) or LED above R key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up) and then the R key .






For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:




R R

R

1

2

3

+- 00

1 2 3

______00________


R

6

S17

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 89


5.13

S017.8: Selecting the kV/mA level series

5.13.6 S017: Test step 8



Selecting the kV/mA level series 1. Select the desired kV/mA level series using the arrow keys of selection field 1.

1A = 16 mA series for PAN6 mA series for Ceph8/10 mA series for TSA (XGPlus only)

2A = 8 mA series for PAN16 mA series for Ceph8/10 mA series for TSA (XGPlus only)

4A = 8/16 mA series for PAN16 mA series for Ceph8/10 mA series for TSA (XGPlus only)

After the kV/mA level series are selected, the Memory key (XGPlus) or the LED above the Memory key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up.

1

2

3

+- 1A

1 2 3

______1A________


R

8

S17

59 38 399 D33525 – 90 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S017.8: Selecting the kV/mA level series

2. To save the selected kV/mA level series, first press the Memory key (R key (XGPlus) or LED above R key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up) and then the R key .





For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:




R R

R

1

2

3

+- 1A

1 2 3

______1A________


R

8

S17

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 91


5.13

S017.9: Configuring operaton without DX41

5.13.7 S017: Test step 9

This service routine is used to configure operation of the system with or with-out the module DX41. This configuration is necessary for software updates and module replacement or board DX11 if systems with or without board DX41 should be supported.


NOTEiIf you go to test step 9 from test step 8 by pressing the Service key ≤≤, the security access confirmation will be skipped.

Setting configuration without DX41 1. Select the desired device status using the arrow keys of selection field 1.

00 = operation without DX41(Factory setting for unit hardware versions ≥ BA)

01 = operation with DX41 (Factory setting for unit hardware versions ≤ AG)

After the device status is selected, the Memory key (XGPlus) or the LED above the Memory key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up.

1

2

3

+- 00

1 2 3

_______00________


R

9

59 38 399 D33525 – 92 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S017.9: Configuring operaton without DX41

2. To save the selected device status, first press the Memory key (R key (XGPlus) or LED above R key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up) and then the R key .






For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:




R R

R

1

2

3

+- 00

1 2 3

______00________


R

9

S17

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 93


5.13

S017.10: Configuration of headrest


The operation of the unit for the installed headrest version is configured with this service routine.

This configuration is required for replacement of board DX11 and a unit hard-ware version ≥ AG (for XGPlus systems) as well as for the installation of head-rest version 2 in systems with a hardware version ≤ AG.

Start test step 10 as described on page 5-80 or by pressing the Service key in test step 9.


Configuring the headrest 1. Select the currently installed headrest using the arrow keys in selection field 1.

00 = operation with headrest version 1 (until approx. October 2006)(Factory setting for unit hardware versions ≤ AG)

01 = operation with headrest version 2 (from approx. November 2006)(Factory setting for unit hardware versions ≥ BA)

After the headrest version is selected, the Memory key lights up.

Kopfstützenversion 1(will be replaced by headrest version 2 in 2007 and is then no longer available as a repair part)

Kopfstützenversion 2(will be available (from 2007) under the part number: 5969741)

vertical

set obliquely toward the back

1

2

3

+- 01


R

10

59 38 399 D33525 – 94 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S017.10: Configuration of headrest

2. To save the selected headrest version, first press the Memory key (R key lights up) and then press the R key .





R

1

2

3

+- 01


R

10

S17

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 95


5.13

S017.11: Selecting the image format

5.13.9 S017: Test step 11 (XG 5 / 3 only)



Selecting the image format 1. Select the desired image format using the arrow keys of selection field 1.

00 = C3 = 18 x 23 cm

01 = C3F = 30 x 23 cm

After the image format is selected, the LED above the Memory key lights up.

2. To save the selected image format, first press the Memory key (LED above the R key lights up) and then the R key .




1 2 3

______01________

XG 5: Multipad

R

R

1 2 3

______00________

XG 5: Multipad

59 38 399 D33525 – 96 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S017.12: Enabling/disabling the preview image




Enabling/disabling the preview image 1. Select the code for displaying the preview image using the arrow keys of selection field 1.

00 = Preview image disabled

01 = Preview image enabled

After the code is selected, the Memory key lights up.

2. To save the selection, first press the Memory key (the R key lights up) and then the R key .




1

2

3

+- 01


R

12

R

1

2

3

+- 01


R

12

S17

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 97


5.13

S017.13: Enabling/disabling the welcome screen

5.13.11 S017: Test step 13 (XGPlus full version only)



Enabling/disabling the welcome screen 1. Select the code for enabling or disabling the welcome screen using the arrow keys of selection field 1.

00 = Welcome screen disabled

01 = Welcome screen enabled

2. After the code is selected the Memory key lights up. To save the changes, first press the Memory key (R key lights up) and then press the R key .

The welcome screen is enabled or disabled.

NOTEiAfter the welcome screen is disabled all parameters of the service routine S017.14 are reset back to the factory setting.

1

2

3

+- 01


R

13

R

1

2

3

+- 01


R

13

S17

59 38 399 D33525 – 98 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S017.14: Enabling/disabling certain lines of the welcome screen




5.13.12 S017: Test step 14 (XGPlus full version only)



After the test step is selected, a welcome screen line ID appears in selection field 1.

1

2

3

+- 1


R

14

17

+- 0

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 99


5.13


Enabling/disabling certain lines of the welcome screen

1. Select the desired line using the arrow keys of selection field 1.

1 = First name

2 = Surname

3 = Date of birth

4 = Patient number

The activation status code is displayed in selection field 2.

0 = disabled

1 = enabled

2. Select the desired status using the arrow keys of selection field 2.

1

2

3

+- 1


R

14+- 0

1

2

3

+- 1


R

14

17

+- 1

59 38 399 D33525 – 100 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008







R

1

2

3

+- 1


R

14

17

+- 1

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 101


5.13

S017.15: Activating/deactivating the acoustic signal for end of exposure

5.13.13 S017: Test step 15



Activating/deactivating the acoustic signal for end of exposure

1. Select the code for activating or deactivating the acoustic signal using the arrow keys of selection field 1.

00 = acoustic signal for end of exposure = OFF

01 = acoustic signal for end of exposure = ON


1

2

3

+- 00


R

15

1 2 3

______00________

XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE: Multipad

R

1

2

3

+- 01


R

15

S17

R

1 2 3

______01________


59 38 399 D33525 – 102 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S017.15: Activating/deactivating the acoustic signal for end of exposure





For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:




båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 103


5.13

S017.17: Setting the standard acceptance/constancy test, RöV FRG

5.13.14 S017: Test step 17 Setting the standard acceptance/constancy test, RöV FRG

Selecting test step 17 1. Select test step 17 using the arrow keys in selection field 2 and confirm your selection with the Service key .

NOTEiIn XGPlus and XG 5 units, the default value is already displayed correctly as soon as service routine S017.17 is opened, and therefore only need by stored. In XG 3 units, the standard must be set as described in the following step.

1

2

3

+- S017

17


+-

S17

1 2 3

S017______17____


1

2

3

+- 02


R

S17

1 2 3

______01________


17

59 38 399 D33525 – 104 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S017.17: Setting the standard acceptance/constancy test, RöV FRG

For XG3 units only:

2. Select the standard for the acceptance/constancy test using the arrow keys in selection field 1:

01 = old standard: 0.8mmCu

02 = new standard: 1.8mmCu

3. To save the setting, first press the Memory key (the R key or the LED above the R key then lights up) and then the R key .





For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:




1 2 3

______02________

XG 3 / 3 PPE: Multipad

R R

1

2

3

+- 02


R

S17

17

R

1 2 3

______02________


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 105


5.13

S017.17: Checking or accepting the diaphragm configuration, worldwide

5.13.15 S017: Test step 17 Checking or accepting the diaphragm configuration, worldwide(not for XG 3 / 3 PPE)

Selecting test step 17 1. Select test step 17 using the arrow keys in selection field 2 and confirm your selection with the Service key .

2. When the Memory key or the LED above the Memory key lights up, save the configuration.

This is done by pressing the Memory key first (R key or LED abo-ve the R key lights up) and then pressing the R key .

Otherwise, quit the service routine once again.

1

2

3

+- S017

17


+-

S17

1 2 3

S017______17____

XG 5: Multipad

R R

1

2

3

+- 02


R

S17

17

R

1 2 3

______02________

XG 5: Multipad

59 38 399 D33525 – 106 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S017.17: Checking or accepting the diaphragm configuration, worldwide





For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:




båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 107


5.13

S017.22: Configuration of PPE display

5.13.16 S017: Test step 22 (XG 3 PPE only)

Start test step 22 as described on page 5-78.

Enabling/disabling display of the remaining exposures after each power-on

1. Select the code for displaying the number of remaining exposures using the arrow keys of selection field 1.

00 = display of remaining exposures = OFF

01 = display of remaining exposures = ON (factory setting)





1 2 3

______01________

XG 3 PPE: Multipad

R

R

1 2 3

______00________

XG 3 PPE: Multipad

59 38 399 D33525 – 108 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


Configuration of PPE display warning level

5.13.17 S017: Test step 23 (XG 3 PPE only)



Defining the warning level for display of remaining exposures after each exposure

1. Use the arrow keys in selection field 1 to select the number of remaining exposures starting with which the warning (indicating the number of expo-sures left) will be displayed after each exposure.

2. To save your selection, first press the Memory key (the R key lights up) and then press the R key .

Quitting the service routine To return to the Service menu, press the double arrow key .


1 2 3

______30________

XG 3 PPE: Multipad

R

R

1 2 3

______50________

XG 3 PPE: Multipad

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 109


5.14

S018: Service for height adjustment


Service for height adjustment


Selecting service routine S018 1. Use thearrow keys to select service routine S0018.

Function S018 Service for height adjustment

Test step 2 Limitation of the maximum travel height

Test step 3 Undoing the maximum travel height setting

Test step 4 Check of the height adjustment sensor system

Test step 5 Setting of the minimum travel height

Test step 6 Undoing the minimum travel height setting

1

2

3

+- S018

2

1 2 3

S018_______2____


+-

59 38 399 D33525 – 110 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S018.2: Setting the maximum travel height

5.14.1 S018: Test step 2

Moving the unit 1. Move the unit to the required maximum travel height by pressing the Up/Down keys in the user mode.

NOTEiProgramming the maximum travel height is possible only for a system height above the upper correction switch level (> position value of 1500)!

Selecting test step 2 2. Select test step 2 using the arrow keys in selection field 2 and then confirm your selection with the Service key .

The current height position is displayed in selection field 1. The Memory key (XGPlus) or the LED above the Memory key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up.

Saving the maximum travel height 3. To save the maximum travel height, first press the Memory key (R key (XGPlus) or LED above R key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up) and then the R key .

T R

Prog. S kV mA

1

2

3

+- S018

2

1 2 3

S018_______2____


+-

R R

R

1

2

3

1.342mm

1 2 3

_1342_MM________


R

S18

2

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 111


5.14

S018.2: Setting the maximum travel height

Setting the mechanical limit stop on the unit

4. Loosen nut A and slide mechanical limit stop B for the limit switch toward the limit switch until it switches. Retighten nut A.

NOTEiThe next time the Up key is pressed, the unit will stop 10 mm below the limit switch.




For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:



A

B

59 38 399 D33525 – 112 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S018.3: Undoing the maximum travel height setting

5.14.2 S018: Test step 3



Undoing the maximum travel height setting

2. To undo the maximum travel height setting, first press the Memory key (R key (XGPlus) or LED above R key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up)

and then the R key .




For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:



1

2

3

+- S018

3

1 2 3

S018_______3____


+-

R R

R

1

2

3

1.342mm

1 2 3

_1342_MM________


R

S18

3

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 113


5.14

S018.4: Check of the height adjustment sensor system

5.14.3 S018: Test step 4


The current height position is displayed in selection field 1.

NOTEiFollowing the selection of the service routine, the stand can be moved up or down up to the limit switches using the UP/DOWN keys on the control console. The "soft limit positions" set by the software are ig-nored in this case.

The first three patient symbol keys (from the left) indicate the switching state of the limit switches:

First patient symbol key = State of correction switch

Second patient symbol key = State of bottom limit switch

Third patient symbol key = State of top limit switch

1

2

3

+- S018

4

1 2 3

S018_______4____


+-

1

2

3

1.342mm

1 2 3

_1342_MM________


S18

4

59 38 399 D33525 – 114 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S018.4: Check of the height adjustment sensor system

If the key (XGPlus) or the LED above the key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up, the switch is actuated, i.e. the unit is located above the position value 1500.




For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:



XGPlus XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 115


5.14

S018.2: Set minimum travel height

5.14.4 S018: Test step 5

Moving the unit 1. Move the unit to the required minimum travel height by pressing the Up/Down keys in the user mode.

NOTEiProgramming the minimum travel height is possible only for a system height that is below the lower correction switch level (< position value of 1500)!

Selecting test step 5 2. Select test step 2 using the arrow keys in selection field 5and then confirm your selection with the Service key .


T R

Prog. S kV mA

1

2

3

+- S018

5

1 2 3

S018_______5____


+-

59 38 399 D33525 – 116 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S018.2: Set minimum travel height

Saving the minimum travel height 3. To save the minimum travel height, first press the Memory key (R key (XGPlus) or LED above R key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up) and then the R key .

NOTEiThe limitation of the minimum travel height is purely software based. The lower limit switch is not adapted to the new minimum travel height!




For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:



R R

R

1

2

3

200mm

1 2 3

__200_MM________


R

S18

5

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 117


5.14

S018.6: Undoing the minimum travel height setting

5.14.5 S018: Test step 6



Undoing the minimum travel height setting

2. To undo the minimum travel height setting, first press the Memory key (R key (XGPlus) or LED above R key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up)

and then the R key .




For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:



1

2

3

+- S018

6

1 2 3

S018_______6____


+-

R R

R

1

2

3

200mm

1 2 3

__200_MM________


R

S18

6

59 38 399 D33525 – 118 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

5.15 Service routine S020 (XGPlus only) Tabs 5

S020.1: Service for temple support

5.15 Service routine S020 (XGPlus only)

Service for temple support

This service routine can be used to change the factory-set switching points of the temple width measurement used for setting the jaw width (“small”, “normal” or “large”) within certain limits.

The following drawing shows the motor position values (initial and individual offset ranges) as well as the mechanical end stops of the temple support.

Headrest version 1(up to unit hardware version AG)

Headrest version 2(as of unit hardware version BA)

The switching point between large and normal is referred to as the lower switching point (marked L = lower) and the switching point between normal and small as the upper switching point (marked U = upper).

These switching points can be set via service routine S20.1 within the follow-ing limits:

Headrest version 1 (up to unit hardware version ≤ AG):

Lower switching point (L): Setting range -10...+5Upper switching point (U): Setting range -5...+10

Headrest version 2 (up to unit hardware version ≥ BA):

Lower switching point (L): Setting range -10...+5Upper switching point (U): Setting range -5...+13

NOTEiA negative offset shifts the respective switching threshold toward larger skulls; a positive offset has the opposite effect.

Function S020 Service for temple support

Test step 1 Change switching thresholds of the temple support

0 34 46 60large

-10 (24) +5 (39)

normal small

-5 (41) +10 (56)U

L

0 31 43 60large

-10 (21) +5 (36)

normal small

-5 (38) +13 (56)U

L

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 119

Tab 5 5.15 Service routine S020 (XGPlus only)

5.15

S020.1: Change switching points of the temple support



5.15.1 S020: Test step 1


After the service routine is selected, the lower switching point is displayed in selection field 1 in the form of L: 0. The upper switching point is dis-played in selection field 2 in the form U: 0.

1

2

3

+- S020

1


+-

1

2

3

+- S020

1


+-

S20

R

1

2

3

+- L: 0

U: 0


+-

S20

1

59 38 399 D33525 – 120 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

5.15 Service routine S020 (XGPlus only) Tabs 5

S020.1: Change switching points of the temple support

2. Select the desired offset for the switch-over point using the arrow keys of the corresponding selection field (see page 5-118).

Selection field 1: Lower switching point (L)Selection field 2: Upper switching point (U)

NOTEiA negative offset shifts the respective switching threshold toward larger skulls; a positive offset has the opposite effect.

After the offset value is changed, the Memory key lights up.

3. To save the offset values, first press the Memory key (R key lights up) and then the R key .

Quitting the service routine Pressing the Service key or the double arrow key returns you to the service routine selection menu.


R

1

2

3

+- L: -3

U: 0


+- 1

R

R

1

2

3

+- L: -3

U: 0


+-

S20

1

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 121

Tab 5 5.16 Service routine S021 (not for XG 3 / 3 PPE)

5.16

S021: Service for motor-driven diaphragm

5.16 Service routine S021 (not for XG 3 / 3 PPE)

Service for motor-driven diaphragm



5.16.1 S021: Test step 1


Function S021 Service for motor-driven diaphragm

Test step 1 Initialization of diaphragm axis

Test step 3 Perform TSA sensor adjustment (TSA) even if TSA is not configured (function test)

1

2

3

+- S021

1

1 2 3

S021_______1____

XGPlus: Easypad touchscreen XG 5: Multipad

+-

1

2

3

+- S021

1

1 2 3

S021_______1_____


+-

59 38 399 D33525 – 122 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

5.16 Service routine S021 (not for XG 3 / 3 PPE) Tabs 5

S021.1: Initialization of diaphragm axis

An inactive progress indicator in selection field 1 and the message FFFF in selection field 2 signal that the system is ready for initialization of the diaphragm axis.

Performing the initialization of the diaphragm axis

2. Start the automatic initialization of the diaphragm axis by pressing the T key .

When the axis initialization is completed, the result is displayed in selec-tion field 2:

0000 = Initializiation OKEEEE = Initialization error

The initialization can be restarted at any time by pressing the T key.

T

1

2

3

FFFF

1 2 3

_______FFFF____


S21

1

T T

TT

1 2 3

1

2

3


1

S21

T

1

2

3

0000

1 2 3

_______0000____


S21

1

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 123


5.16

S021.3: Function test of TSA sensor adjustment

5.16.2 S021: Test step 3


An inactive progress indicator in selection field 1 and the message FFFF in selection field 2 signal that the system is ready for initialization of the di-aphragm axis.

1

2

3

+- S021

3

1 2 3

S021_______3_____


+-

T

1

2

3

1 2 3

________________


S21

3

59 38 399 D33525 – 124 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008



Axis initialization of the TSA sensor holder

2. Start the automatic axis initialization of the TSA sensor holder by pressing the T key .

When the axis initialization is completed, the result is displayed in selec-tion field 2:

0000 = Initializiation OKEEEE = Initialization error

The initialization can be restarted at any time by pressing the T key .

T T

T T

1 2 3

1

2

3


3

S21

T T

T

1

2

3

0000

1 2 3

_______0000____


S21

3

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 125


5.16


Moving the TSA sensor holder 3. Move the TSA sensor holder by alternately pressing patient symbol keys a and d.

When key P1 is pressed, the TSA sensor holder moves to thePAN/CEPH position for Set key P4 to the TSA position.

When the action is completed, the result is displayed in selection field 2:

0000 = action OKEEEE = action error




XG 5:



T

1 2 3

1

2

3


3

S21

a d

a d

T

1

2

3

0000

1 2 3

_______0000____


S21

3

59 38 399 D33525 – 126 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S032: Test function for sensor in PAN slot


Test function for sensor in PAN slot



5.17.1 S032: Test step 10


After test step 10 is selected, selection field 1 displays the current selection for synchronized readout sequence.

Function S032 Test function for sensor in the PAN slot

Test step 10 Test function for sensor in the PAN slot

1

2

3

+- S032

1 2 3

S032_______10___


1

2

3

+- S032

10

1 2 3

S032_______10___


+-

S32

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 127


5.17

S032.10: Test function for sensor in PAN slot

Selecting the synchronized readout sequence

2. Select the mode of the desired synchronized readout sequence using the arrow keys of selection field 1.

HSIPan3x3 = sensor in the PAN mode with synchronized readoutsequence 3x3 clocked out

HSIPan4x4 = sensor in the PAN mode with synchronized readoutsequence 4x4 clocked out

HSITSA4x4 = sensor in the TSA mode with synchronized readoutsequence 4x4 clocked out

After the mode for the synchronized readout sequence has been selected the Test key (XGPlus) or the LED above the Test key lights up (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE).

NOTEiIf the R key (XGPlus) or the LED above the R key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) initially lights up, the sensor holder must be moved to the corresponding position first. To do this, press the R key .

Starting synchronized readout sequence

NOTEiThe sensor must be plugged in for at least 15 seconds before starting the synchronized readout sequence.

3. Start the synchronized readout sequence with the Test key .

CAUTIONThe sensor must not be removed while the synchronized readout sequence is active! Otherwise the electronics may be damaged.

1

2

3

+- HSIPan3x3

1 2 3

HSIPAN3X3______


T

10

T T

R R

T T

1

2

3

Take Image...

1 2 3

TAKE_IMAGE_____


10

S32

59 38 399 D33525 – 128 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008



Explanations on the test procedure:

The synchronized readout sequence of the sensor is performed with real data transmissions and CAN bus commands.

The image data are analyzed in the memory of the DX11.

It is possible to evaluate the LEDs on DX1 (IMAGE; PAN; CEPH) during the synchronized readout sequence.

IMAGE-LED V501:

Stand By mode = LED dark

Active synchronized readout sequence = LED lights up

CEPH-LED V502:

Sensor in the Ceph slot/Stand By mode = LED lights up

No sensor in the Ceph slot/Stand By mode = LED dark

Sensor in the Ceph slot/active synchronized readout sequence = LED dark

PAN-LED V500:

Sensor in the Pan slot/Stand By mode = LED lights up

No sensor in the Pan slot/Stand By mode = LED dark

Sensor in the Pan slot/active synchronized readout sequence = LED dark

In addition, "wiggle tests" of cables or ring rotation tests can also be per-formed.

XGPlus: Easypad touchscreen The result of the synchronized readout sequence is displayed:

Image Size = total size of the image

Row Length = image height in pixels

Nr of Rows = Number of image rows

CRC Errors = Number of detected CRC errors during the synchronized readout sequence

Exp.-Therm TMO = Exposure interrupted by a timeout while reading image data

Exp.-Therm CRC = Exposure interrupted by an excess number of CRC errors

V500Pan

V502Ceph

V501Image

DX1

65

HSI-State

Image Size : NOK : 26320Row Length : OK : 1314Nr of Rows : NOK : 10CRC Errors : NOK : 10Exp.-ThermTMO : NOK : 1Exp.-ThermCRC : OK : 0

65

HSI-State

Image Size : OK : 8134984Row Length : OK : 2186Nr of Rows : OK : 1859CRC Errors : OK : 0Exp.-ThermTMO : OK : 0Exp.-ThermCRC : OK : 0

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 129


5.17


XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE: Multipad The single-line display of the Multipad initially shows the HSI-STATE.

Use the arrow keys in selection field 1 to select the desired parameters, e.g. IMAGE SIZE and confirm your selection by pressing the Memory key .

The result of the synchronized readout sequence for the selected parameters is displayed.

Using the up arrow key in selection field 3 or the Service key , you can return to the parameter selection menu.




For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:



1 2 3

IMAGE SIZE______

1 2 3

OK: 8134984______

59 38 399 D33525 – 130 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S033: Test of CEPH image path without SIDEXIS

5.18 Service routine S033 (not for XG 3 / 3 PPE)

Test of CEPH image path without SIDEXIS



5.18.1 S033: Test step 10


After test step 10 is selected, selection field 1 displays the current selection for the synchronized readout sequence.

Function S033 Test of CEPH image path without SIDEXIS

Test step 10 Test of the CEPH image path without SIDEXIS

1

2

3

+- S033

1 2 3

S033_______10___


1

2

3

+- S033

10

1 2 3

S033_______10___


+-

S33

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 131


5.18

S033.10: Test of CEPH image path without SIDEXIS

Selecting the synchronized readout sequence

2. Select the mode of the desired synchronized readout sequence using the arrow keys of selection field 1.

HSIC4x4 = Sensor in CEPH mode with synchronized readoutsequence 4x4 clocked out without CEPH scan

HSIC4x4M = Sensor in CEPH mode with synchronized readoutsequence 4x4 clocked out with CEPH scan

After the mode for the synchronized readout sequence has been selected, the Test key (XGPlus) or the LED above the Test key (XG 5) lights up.

NOTEiIf the R key (XGPlus) or the LED above the R key (XG 5) initially lights up, the sensor holder must be moved to the corresponding position first. To do this, press the R key .

Starting the synchronized readout sequence

3. Start the synchronized readout sequence with the Test key .

1

2

3

+- HSC4x4

1 2 3

HSIC4X4_________


T

10

T T

R R

T T

1

2

3

Take Image...

1 2 3

TAKE_IMAGE_____


10

S33

59 38 399 D33525 – 132 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008



XGPlus: Easypad touchscreen The result of the synchronized readout sequence is displayed:

Image Size = Total size of the image

Row Length = Image height in pixels

Nr of Rows = Number of image rows

CRC Errors = Number of detected CRC errors during the synchronized readout sequence

Exp.-Therm TMO = Exposure interrupted by a timeout while reading image data

Exp.-Therm CRC = Exposure interrupted by an excess number of CRC errors

XG 5: Multipad The single-line display of the Multipad initially shows the HSI-STATE.

Use the arrow keys in selection field 1 to select the desired parameters, e.g. IMAGE SIZE and confirm your selection by pressing the Memory key .

The result of the synchronized readout sequence for the selected parameters is displayed.

Using the up arrow key in selection field 3 or the Service key , you can return to the parameter selection menu.

65

HSI-State

Image Size : NOK : 26320Row Length : OK : 1314Nr of Rows : NOK : 10CRC Errors : NOK : 10Exp.-ThermTMO : NOK : 1Exp.-ThermCRC : OK : 0

65

HSI-State

Image Size : OK : 8134984Row Length : OK : 2186Nr of Rows : OK : 1859CRC Errors : OK : 0Exp.-ThermTMO : OK : 0Exp.-ThermCRC : OK : 0

1 2 3

IMAGE SIZE______

1 2 3

OK: 8134984______

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 133


5.18





XG 5:



59 38 399 D33525 – 134 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S034: Service for the digital cephalometer


Service for the digital cephalometer



Function S034 Service for the digital cephalometer

Test step 4 Display/calibrate center position of ceph scan sensor axis

Test step 5 Display/calibrate center position of ceph scan secondary diaphragm axis

Test step 6 Moving to the ceph packing position


Display/change ring type

Test step 8(XGPlus full version only)

User-specific determination of the shadowing limit for C1 and C2

Test step 9(XGPlus full version only)

User-specific determination of the shadowing limit for C3 and C3F

1

2

3

+- S034

1

1 2 3

S034_______1____


+-

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 135


5.19

S034.4: Display/calibrate center position of ceph scan sensor axis

5.19.1 S034: Test step 4

Remove the cover from the cephalometer (see also section 1.14).


After test step 4 is selected, the current offset value for the center position of the ceph scan sensor axis is displayed in selection field 1.

1

2

3

+- S034

4

1 2 3

S034_______4____


+-

S34

1

2

3

1500

1 2 3

____1500________


S34

4

RT

59 38 399 D33525 – 136 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008



Switching the test mode ON 2. Press the T key to switch the test mode on.

NOTEiIn the test mode, travel to the center position of the ceph scan sensor axis is initially performed without offsets. The T key (XGPlus) or the LED above the T key (XG 5) lights up and displays the test mode.

Determining the offset values 3. Move the sensor to its front position by pressing the R key .

NOTEiThe sensor can always be moved back and forth between its front and center positions with the R key.

4. Move the sensor to its center position by pressing the R key .

5. Measure distances L2 and L1 with a slide gage.

6. Calculate the offset value according to the following formula:

Ceph arm mounted on left side:

Ceph arm mounted on right side:

T T

Wall side

Sensor side

Room side

R R

R R

L1L2

Wall side

Room side

L1L2



L2 L1 ) 2÷–( Offsetwert=


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 137


5.19


Entering the offset value 7. Select an offset value using the arrow keys of selection field 1.

NOTEiThe offset value can have a positive or a negative sign.

Ceph arm on left side:– A positive offset value shifts the sensor toward the room center.– A negative offset value shifts the sensor toward the wall.

Ceph arm mounted on right side:– A positive offset value shifts the sensor toward the wall.– A negative offset value shifts the sensor toward the room center.

Since the offset value can be set only in large steps of 500 (500 = 0.5 mm), you should set a value which comes as close as possible to the one you calculated.

8. To save the offset value, first press the Memory key (the R key (XGPlus) or the LED above the R key (XG 5) lights up) and then the R key .

1

2

3

+- 1500

1 2 3

____1500________


R

4

T

R R

R

1

2

3

+- 1500

1 2 3

____1500________


R

S34

4

59 38 399 D33525 – 138 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008



Checking the new center position of the ceph scan (sensor axis)

9. Quit the test mode by pressing the T key .

NOTEiThe offset settings are taken into account in normal operation.

10. Move the sensor to its referenz position by pressing the R key .

NOTEiThe sensor can always be moved back and forth between its front and center positions with the R key.

11. Move the sensor to its center position by pressing the R key .

12. Measure distances L1 and L2 with a slide gage and calculate the remain-ing offset as described on page 5-136.

– If the offset is still > ± 0.5 mm, the offset value must be corrected again. Repeat the service routine from item 2.

– If the offset is < ± 0.5 mm, the calibration is OK.

Continue with service routine S034.5.




XG 5:



T T

R R

R R

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 139


5.19

S034.5: Display/calibrate center position of ceph scan secondary diaphragm axis

5.19.2 S034: Test step 5


After test step 5 is selected, the current offset value for the center position of the ceph scan secondary diaphragm axis is displayed in selection field 1.

Switching the test mode on 2. Press the T key to switch the test mode on.

NOTEiIn the test mode, travel to the center position of the ceph scan secondary dia-phragm axis is initially performed without offsets. The T key (XGPlus) or the LED above the T key (XG 5) lights up and displays the test mode.

1

2

3

+- S034

5

1 2 3

S034_______5____


+-

S34

1

2

3

1500

1 2 3

____1500________


S34

5

RT

T T

59 38 399 D33525 – 140 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008



Determining the offset values 3. Move the secondary diaphragm to its front position by pressing the R key .

NOTEiThe secondary diaphragm can always be moved back and forth between its front and center positions with the R key.

4. Move the secondary diaphragm to its center position by pressing the R key .

5. Measure distances L2 and L1 with a slide gage.

6. Calculate the offset value according to the following formula:

Ceph arm on left side:

Ceph arm on right side:

Secondary diaphragm side

Wall side

Room side

R R

R R

Wall side

Room side

L1



L2 L2L1



båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 141


5.19


Entering the offset value 7. Select an offset value using the arrow keys of selection field 1.

NOTEiThe offset value can have a positive or a negative sign.

Ceph arm on left side:– A positive offset value shifts the secondary diaphragm toward the room

center.– A negative offset value shifts the secondary diaphragm toward the wall.

Ceph arm mounted on right side:– A positive offset value shifts the secondary diaphragm toward the wall.– A negative offset value shifts the secondary diaphragm toward the room

center.Since the offset value can be set only in large steps of 500 (500 = 0.5 mm), you should set a value which comes as close as possible to the one you calculated.

8. To save the offset value, first press the Memory key (the R key (XGPlus) or the LED above the R key (XG 5) lights up) and then the R key .

1

2

3

+- 1500

1 2 3

____1500________


RT

R R

R

1

2

3

+- 1500

1 2 3

____1500________


R

59 38 399 D33525 – 142 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008



Checking the new center position of the ceph scan (secondary diaphragm axis)

9. Quit the test mode by pressing the T key .

NOTEiThe offset settings are taken into account in normal operation.

10. Move the secondary diaphragm to its referenz position by pressing the R key .

NOTEiThe secondary diaphragm can always be moved back and forth between its front and center positions with the R key.

11. Move the secondary diaphragm to its center position by pressing the R key .

12. Measure distances L1 and L2 with a slide gage and calculate the remain-ing offset as described on page 5-140.

– If the offset is still > ± 0.5 mm, the offset value must be corrected again. Repeat the service routine from item 2.

– If the offset is < ± 0.5 mm, the calibration is OK.

Reattach the ceph cover.




XG 5:



T T

R R

R R

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 143


5.19

S034.6: Moving to the ceph packing position



After the test step is started, an inactive progress indicator is displayed in selection field 1. Selection field 2 shows the characters FFFF.

Moving to the ceph packing position 2. Press the T key .

The cephalometer moves to the packing position. The procedure is visu-alized by an active progress indicator in selection field 1. Once the proce-dure is completed, the characters 0000 appear in selection field 2.

1

2

3

+- S034

6

1 2 3

S034_______6____


+-

S34

T

1

2

3

FFFF

1 2 3

_______FFFF____


S34

6

T T

T

1 2 3

1

2

3

+-


6

S34

T

59 38 399 D33525 – 144 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S034.6: Moving to the ceph packing position

When the cephalometer has reached its packing position, 0000 is displayed in selection field 2.




XG 5:



T

1

2

3

0000

1 2 3

_______0000____


S34

6

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 145


5.19

S034.7: Display/change ring type



2. Select the ring type using the arrow keys of selection field 1:

01 = old ring type = PAN unit serial numbers up to 20056PAN/CEPH units up to serial number 40104

02 = new ring type = PAN units with serial no. 20056 and higherPAN/CEPH units with serial no. 40104 and higher

3. To save the setting, first press the Memory key (R key lights up) and then press the R key .

1

2

3

+- S034

7


+-

S34

1

2

3

+- 01


R

S34

R R

1

2

3

+- 01


R

S34

7

59 38 399 D33525 – 146 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S034.8: Determining shadowing limit C1 and C2




5.19.5 S034: Test step 8 (XGPlus and full version only)

In CEPH programs C1 and C2 for full-version XGPlus systems, the shadowing limit set by default can be provided with an individual offset. In this way the shadowing can be shifted within certain limits.

The offset must be determined by reference to an existing exposure. Starting from the default setting, an offset can be selected and saved within a range of +30,000 μm to -15,000 μm.

For C1/C2

+30,000 μm

-15,000 μm Shadowing limit

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 147


5.19

S034.8: Determining shadowing limit C1 and C2


2. Select the desired offset value using the arrow keys in selection field 1 (step width = 500, offset value = 1000 corresponds to a 1 mm shift of the shadowing limit).


4. Take a C1 or C2 exposure to check the effectiveness of the setting (see operating instructions).

1

2

3

+- S034

8


+-

S34

1

2

3

+- 5500


R

8

R R

1

2

3

+- 5500


R

S34

8

59 38 399 D33525 – 148 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S034.9: Determining the shadowing limit for C3 and C3F




5.19.6 S034: Test step 9 (XGPlus and full version only)

In CEPH programs C3 and C3F for full-version XGPlus systems, the shadow-ing limit set by default can be provided with an individual offset. In this way the shadowing can be shifted within certain limits.

The offset must be determined by reference to an existing exposure. Starting from the default setting, an offset can be selected and saved within a range of +15,000 μm to -30,000 μm.

For C3 and C3F

Shadowing limit

+15,000 μm

-30,000 μm

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 149


5.19



2. Select the desired offset value using the arrow keys in selection field 1 (step width = 500, offset value = 1000 corresponds to a 1 mm shift of the shadowing limit).


4. Take a C3 or C3F exposure to check the effectiveness of the setting (see operating instructions).

1

2

3

+- S034

9


+-

S34

1

2

3

+- -2500


R

9

R R

1

2

3

+- -2500


R

S34

8

59 38 399 D33525 – 150 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008






båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 151


5.20

S037: Network service


Network service


Selecting service routine S037 Use the arrow keys to select service routine S037.

Function S037 Network service

Test step 1 Showing the network data

Test step 2 Setting the default IP address, default gateway address and default subnet mask

Security access

Test step 3 Toggling the DHCP and fixed address boot mode (DEFAULT/STATIC) Security access

Test step 4 Manual input of IP address, default gateway address and subnet mask Security access

1

2

3

+- S037

1

1 2 3

S037_______1____


+-

59 38 399 D33525 – 152 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S037.1: Displaying the network data

5.20.1 S037: Test step 1


The IP address of the unit is displayed.

XGPlus:

DEFAULT or STATIC or IS DHCP is displayed in selection field 2.

DEFAULT= fixed address, factory setting

STATIC = fixed address, changed setting

DHCP = automatic address allocation

Bei XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:

The first digit in the single-line display of the Multipad denotes DEFAULT or STATIC.

X = DEFAULT= fixed address, factory setting

S = STATIC = fixed address, changed setting

D = DHCP = automatic address allocation

Patient symbol key a (XGPlus) or the LED above patient symbol key a (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up.

1

2

3

+- S037

1

1 2 3

S037_______1_____


+-

1

2

3

192.168.15.240

DEFAULT

1 2 3

X192.168.15.240_


1

S37

a

a

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 153


5.20

S037.1: Displaying the network data

Displaying the network data 2. You can display different network data in selection field 1 by pressing patient symbol keys a, b and c.

a : Display of the IP addressb : Display of the standard gatewayc : Display of the subnet mask

The currently selected patient symbol key (XGPlus) or the LED above the selected patient symbol key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) is lit.

XGPlus:


Bei XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:

The first digit in the single-line display of the Multipad denotes DEFAULT or STATIC.

X = DEFAULT = fixed address, factory setting

S = STATIC = fixed address, changed setting

D = DHCP = automatic address allocation

NOTEiIf all network data is set to DEFAULT, the system is in the UDP boot mode.




For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:



a b c d

XGPlus

XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE

59 38 399 D33525 – 154 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S037.2: Setting the default IP address, default gateway address and default subnet mask

5.20.2 S037: Test step 2



After test step 2 is selected, the network data display appears as in test step 1. In addition, the Memory key and R key are also displayed. The Memory key is lit.

1

2

3

+- S037

2

1 2 3

S037_______2____


+-

S37

1

2

3

37

1 2 3

__________37____


+-

R R

1

2

3

192.168.15.178

STATIC

1 2 3

S192.168.15.178__


S37

2

R

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 155


5.20


Checking the network data 3. Check the network data still in the system before resetting.



Resetting the network data 4. To reset the network data, first press the Memory key (R key (XGPlus) or LED above R key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up) and then the R key .

NOTEiThe network data cannot be reset selectively. All network data are reset.

The default network data is displayed. To switch between the display of the different network data, proceed as in test step 1.

NOTEiIt is possible to reset the network address to the default value only in the fixed address boot mode (no DHCP).

5. Switch the unit off and then on again.

a b c

XGPlus

XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE

R R

1

2

3

+- 192.168.15.178

STATIC

1 2 3

S192.168.15.178__


+-

S37

2

R

R

1

2

3

+- 192.168.15.178

DEFAULT

1 2 3

X192.168.15.178__


+-

S37

2

R

59 38 399 D33525 – 156 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008






For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:



båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 157


5.20

S037.3: Toggling the DHCP and fixed address boot mode (DEFAULT/STATIC)

5.20.3 S037: Test step 3


The current boot mode of the unit is displayed in selection field 1.

Selecting the boot mode 2. Using the arrow keys in selection field 1, select the desired boot modeDHCP or fixed address (STATIC).

1

2

3

+- S037

3

1 2 3

S037_______3_____


+-

R

1

2

3

+- STATIC

1 2 3

_STATIC__________


3

S37

R

1

2

3

+- DHCP

1 2 3

_DHCP__________


3

59 38 399 D33525 – 158 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


S037.3: Toggling the DHCP and fixed address boot mode (DEFAULT/STATIC)

Saving the boot mode 3. To save the boot mode, first press the Memory key (R key (XGPlus) or LED above R key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up) and then the R key .

NOTEiIf the system is reset to the STATIC mode, the network addresses will be reset to the factory setting





For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:



R R

3

S37

R

1

2

3

+- DHCP

1 2 3

____DHCP________


R

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 159


5.20

S037.4: Manual input of IP address, default gateway address and subnet mask

5.20.4 S037: Test step 4

NOTEiPerformance of this service routine is not possible in the DHCP mode (T keyis blocked).



The IP address of the unit is displayed in selection field 1.

XGPlus only:


DEFAULT= fixed address, factory setting

STATIC = fixed address, changed setting

DHCP = automatic address allocation

1

2

3

+- S037

4

1 2 3

S037_______4____


+-

S37

1

2

3

37

1 2 3

__________37____


+-

59 38 399 D33525 – 160 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008



Selecting/displaying the network data 3. To select the network data you would like to edit, press patient symbol key a, b or c:



Selecting the network data 4. To change the selected parameter, first press the T key .

1

2

3

192.168.15.240

DEFAULT

1 2 3

X192.168.15.240_


4

S37

T

a b c d

XGPlus

XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE

1

2

3

192.168.15.240

DEFAULT

1 2 3

X192.168.15.240__


4

S37

T

T T

1

2

3

192.168.15.240

DEFAULT

1 2 3

X192.168.15.240__


4

S37

T T

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 161


5.20


Selecting the octet 5. Select the desired octet 1-4 with patient symbol keys a-d:

a : Octet B1b : Octet B2c : Octet B3d : Octet B4

The currently selected patient symbol key is lit.

a b c d

XGPlus

XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE

Example:

192.168.015.178

B1 B2 B3 B4 (Octets 1 - 4)

1 2 3 (Digit 1 - 3 of octet)

RT

1

2

3

Digit No. 3

2

1 2 3

__DIG:_3___2____


4

S37+-

+-

59 38 399 D33525 – 162 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008



Selecting the digit 6. Use the arrow keys in selection field 1 to select the desired digit within the octet (see step 5).

NOTEiThe digits always refer to the selected octet only. Reprogramming the last digit is shown here as an example.

Selection field 2 shows the value of the selected digit.

Changing the value under the digit 7. To change the value under the digit, use the arrow keys of selection field 2.

192.168.015.178

Octet 3, digit 12, with the value 8

RT

1

2

3

+- Digit No. 12

8

1 2 3

__DIG:12___8____


+- 4

192.168.015.179

Octet 3, digit 12, with the value 9

RT

1

2

3

+- Digit No. 12

9

1 2 3

__DIG:12___9____


+-

S37

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 5 – 163


5.20


Saving the changes 8. To save the changes, first press the Memory key (R key (XGPlus) or LED above R key (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) lights up) and then the R key .





For XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:



R R

R

RT

1

2

3

+- Digit No. 12

9

1 2 3

__DIG:12___9____


+-

S37

4

1

2

3

192.168.15.179

1 2 3

S192.168.15.179___


S37

4

59 38 399 D33525 – 164 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008



ORTHOPHOS XG 6 Repair

59 38 399 D33526 – 2 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

Tab 6

Contents

6.1 Replacing the height adjustment motor (M1_4)/spindle ........................................................6 – 66.1.1 Preparing for motor replacement.......................... 6 – 6

6.1.2 Removing board DX32 ......................................... 6 – 9

6.1.3 Replacing the height adjustment motor/spindle . 6 – 10

6.1.4 Laying cables when replacing the height adjustment motor..................................... 6 – 12

6.2 Replacing the ring motor (M1_3)...........................6 – 146.2.1 Laying cables when replacing the ring motor ..... 6 – 16

6.3 Replacing the PAN actuators (M1_1/2).................6 – 176.3.1 Laying cables when replacing

actuators (M1_1/2) ............................................. 6 – 18

6.4 Replacing the headrest .........................................6 – 196.4.1 Laying cables when replacing the headrests ..... 6 – 20

6.5 Replacing the Easypad (XGPlus) or the Multipad (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE).........................6 – 21

6.6 Replacing the control panel...................................6 – 246.6.1 Laying cables when replacing the control panel. 6 – 25

6.7 Replacing/adjusting the FH light localizer (PAN) ..6 – 26

6.8 Replacing/adjusting the MS light localizer laser module (PAN)...............................................6 – 28

6.9 Replacing/adjusting the FH light localizer (Ceph) .6 – 30

6.10 Removing the light localizers from the ring(for the XGPlus and XG 5, if present) .....................6 – 32

6.11 Replacing the support piece (bite block holder) ....6 – 33

6.12 Replacing the motor-driven diaphragm (for XGPlus / XG 5) ...............................................6 – 346.12.1 Cables and connectors for replacement

of the motor-driven diaphragm unit .................... 6 – 36

6.13 Replacing the fixed diaphragm (only XG 3 / 3 PPE)...............................................6 – 37

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 3

Register 6

6.14 Replacing the X-ray tube assembly.......................6 – 386.14.1 Cables and connectors for replacement

of the tube assembly .......................................... 6 – 40

6.15 Replacing the fan (tube assembly)........................6 – 42

6.16 Replacing the PAN (TSA) sensor holder...............6 – 436.16.1 Laying cables when replacing the

PAN sensor holder ............................................. 6 – 45

6.17 Replacing the ceph sensor holder.........................6 – 47

6.18 Replacing the sensor.............................................6 – 48

6.19 Replacing the light barriers....................................6 – 496.19.1 Replacing light barrier V1_3 ............................... 6 – 51

6.20 Replacing circuit boards ........................................6 – 596.20.1 Measures following replacement of boards........ 6 – 60

6.20.2 Replacing a DX11 .............................................. 6 – 64

6.20.3 Replacing an X-ray tube assembly incl. DX6 ..... 6 – 80

6.20.4 Check jumper on circuit board DX42 (replacement of board DX42) ............................. 6 – 90

6.20.5 Jumper position on circuit board DX42 .............. 6 – 90

6.21 Replacing cables ...................................................6 – 916.21.1 Laying the cable conduit on the rotating element

(applicable to cables L3, L5, L6, L11 and L12) .. 6 – 92

6.21.2 Replacing cable L7 and L8/L108*(in cable track 2)................................................. 6 – 94

6.21.3 Laying cable L1 and the grounding strap(in cable track 1)................................................. 6 – 97

59 38 399 D33526 – 4 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

Tab 6

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 5

Tab 6

6 Repair


The unit must be disconnected from the junction box of the building installation before replacing any parts near the power supply, power switch, board DX 32 or the X-ray tube assembly!

CAUTIONPlease observe the usual precautionary measures for han-dling printed circuit boards (ESD).


NOTEiOpen the PAN and CEPH RESET ADJUSTMENT menus in SIDEXIS and note the old adjustment values before you begin replacing boards or modules (which contain boards).

NOTEiAfter replacing boards or modules containing boards, check to make sure that the programming of the module corresponds to the current software status of the system. The software version for the modules can...

for XGPlus:be accessed through service routine S008.2 or the extended detail query in SIXABCON. You can also check the info screen in advance to determine whether the current software constellation is permissible. If this is not the case, the version number of the entire software is labeled with an asterisk (e.g. V02.20*)

bei XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:be accessed through service routine S008.2 or the extended detail query in SIXABCON.

Perform a software update in case of software incompatibilities (see Section 1.9).

CAUTIONWhen replacing modules, be sure to note which ones contain boards and fol-low the instructions in section "Measures following replacement of boards" starting on page 6-60. Also check whether the current ORTHOPHOS XG CD or the Sirona dealer page contains any additional, up-to-date information on module replacement.

CAUTIONBe sure to observe the information on action required following module replacement. You will find this information at the end of each set of repair instructions.

59 38 399 D33526 – 6 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

6.1 Replacing the height adjustment motor (M1_4)/spindle Tabs 6

6.1 Replacing the height adjustment motor (M1_4)/spindle

6.1.1 Preparing for motor replacement

Remove the sensor and store it in a safe place.

Switch the unit ON.

Moving the unit up and removing the profile covers

Use the UP/DOWN keys on the Easypad (XGPlus) or Multipad (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) to move the slide upward and remove the cover parts (see section 1.14):

– Intermediate piece

– Profile covers, top and bottom

NOTEiTip: When unscrewing the profile cover, press it toward the top of the unit and let it slide down after detaching it.

NOTEiIf the height adjustment motor is inoperative, you can also move the slide man-ually.

Moving the slide manually 1. Loosen the two screws A and remove cover B.

2. Loosen screws C on spindle holder D and turn the spindle holder with a socket wrench (18 mm A/F):

– CW rotation of spindle = slide moves upward

– CCW rotation of spindle = slide moves downward

The spindle and slide can thus be manually moved in the vertical axis.

1.A

A

B

2.

C C

D

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 7

Tab 6 6.1 Replacing the height adjustment motor (M1_4)/spindle

6.1

Securing the slide position Make a mark at the position of the upper limit stop.

3. Loosen nut G on upper profile clamp H and remove upper limit stop J from the stand.

4. Install limit stop J above the lower limit stop so that there is a distance of approx. 560 mm ( 22’’) between the lower edge of the unit and the lower edge of the limit stop.

Use the UP/DOWN keys on the Easypad (XGPlus) or Multipad (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) to move the slide downward.

NOTEiIf the height adjustment motor is inoperative, you can also move the slide man-ually (see page 6-6).

Switch the unit OFF and de-energize it.

4.

GH

J

J

GH

3.

approx. 560 mm

DX41*

* Board DX41 is omitted in unit HW version BA and higher.

approx. 22’’

59 38 399 D33526 – 8 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


Removing the remaining covers Remove the top cover and pull connector X607 off of board DX1.

Now remove the following cover parts:

– Arm cover, top

– Slide cover, top rear

– Slide cover, bottom rear

– Slide cover, frontAttention: FH laser cable (PAN)!

NOTEiTo prevent scratches, also remove the covers of the slide table and the drawer.

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 9


6.1

6.1.2 Removing board DX32

1. Unscrew cover plates E (bottom and top) from connection box F of board DX32.

NOTEiCable L3 can remain on the top cover plate (remove the shield terminal if nec-essary). The cover plate can simply be folded to the side and stored laterally in the stand.

Pull connector X2 off of board DX32 and detach the protective ground wire.

2. Detach cable L2 from the cable tie and from terminal X100 and pull it out of connection box F toward the bottom.

3. Loosen the four screws (G) and remove the connection box including board DX32.

F

E

L3

L2

X100

L3

1.

2.

3.GG

G

G

DX32*

* The drawing shows board DX32 with a unit hardware version ≤ AG.

In order to facilitate removal of board DX32, the bottom edge of the slide should be roughly flush with the upper bracket in the stand.

59 38 399 D33526 – 10 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


6.1.3 Replacing the height adjustment motor/spindle

Removing the spindle 1. Turn spindle holder D (with an 18 mm A/F socket wrench) CCW until the motor comes to rest on the limit stop and spindle L has been turned all the way out of the motor. Remove the straight pin(K).

Remove the spindle (L).

NOTEiTip: First pull spindle L downward along the motor, and then diagonally up-ward and out of the unit.

Removing the defective motor Unplug connector X402 of the motor cable from board DX1, detach the motor cable from the cable harness and carefully pull it out of the stand.

2. Loosen the three screws (M). Remove the motor while carefully pulling the motor cable out of the stand.

Inserting the dampers 3. Attach the new rubber pads to the new motor.They are included in the scope of supply of the HA motor.

1.

D

K

L

M

2.

3.N

N

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 11


6.1

Installing the new motor Install the height adjustment motor in the reverse order of removal. Please observe the following:

NOTEiWhen fastening the motor, make sure that all three screws are tightened uniformly and protrude approx. 3 mm out of the nut.

NOTEiDon't forget to plug all connectors and cables back in again in their original positions and to reattach all cable ties and clamps (see section "Laying cables when replacing the height adjustment motor" on page 6-12).

Make sure that none of the cables are crushed by the cover plates of the DX32 connection box.

NOTEiDon't forget to install the upper limit stop in the marked position after replacing the height adjustment motor.

ATTENTION: What to do after replacement?

– After inserting the new spindle above and below the HA motor, grease it generously with Chesterton 622.

– Check the function of the height adjustment motor with the UP/DOWN keys on the user interface.

– Readjust the travel height (see "Service routine S018" on page 5-109).

59 38 399 D33526 – 12 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


6.1.4 Laying cables when replacing the height adjustment motor

Plugging connector X2 (cable L3) into DX 32

Connecting cable L2 to terminal X100 (DX32)

Plug connector X2(L3) into DX32.

Fasten cable L2 to bottom strain relief with cable tie (on plate DX32). Cable L2 must be run behind the EMC plate of DX32 without any loops.

Don't forget! Screw in the varistor.

NOTEiVaristor no longer required after 1st quar-ter of 2005, since integrated in line filter

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 13


6.1

Motor cable and cable L3

Plug connector X402into DX1

Green mark must lie in recess.

Motor cable

Cable L3

Lay cable in cable harness and secure its position with cable clamps

59 38 399 D33526 – 14 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

6.2 Replacing the ring motor (M1_3) Tabs 6

6.2 Replacing the ring motor (M1_3)

Removing the covers Remove the covers (see section 1.14):

– Top arm cover

Removing the defective motor 1. Detach the motor cable from the cable harness and pull it off of connector X813 on board DX1.

2. Loosen the four screws A on the ring motor and remove the motor including the screws and the serrated washers B.

A

B

C

D

E

F

1.2.

3.

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 15

Tab 6 6.2 Replacing the ring motor (M1_3)

6.2

Reusing the coupling and flywheel 3. Loosen set screws C and D and remove coupling E and absorber F from the defective motor.

Attach the coupling and absorber to the new motor and retighten the set screws.

NOTEiSeal set screws C and D with Loctite 242 before tightening them.

Installing the new motor Insert the new motor including coupling and absorber in the ring.

NOTEiWhile inserting the motor, turn it back and forth slightly until the pinion engages in the ring gear.

Use the screws and serrated washers B to screw the new motor onto the ring securely.

4. Run the motor cable along its original path and plug it back into connector X813 on board DX1 (see "Laying cables when replacing the ring motor" on page 6-16).

NOTEiDon't forget to reattach all cable ties and clamps.

Attaching the covers Reattach the covers.


– Check the function of the ring motor.

– Perform the complete unit adjustment (see chapter 4).

59 38 399 D33526 – 16 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

6.2 Replacing the ring motor (M1_3) Tabs 6

6.2.1 Laying cables when replacing the ring motor

Plug in connectorX813 on DX1.

Lay motor cable ina single loop (from

top to bottom).

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 17

Tab 6 6.3 Replacing the PAN actuators (M1_1/2)

6.3

6.3 Replacing the PAN actuators (M1_1/2)


– Top arm cover

Removing the defective actuator 1. Loosen the actuator cable from the cable holders and pull it off of connec-tors X811 (AK1; M1_1) and X812 (AK2; M1_2) on board DX1.

2. Loosen set screws A on the coupling and the two screws B on the actua-tor holder and pull the actuator including the holder out toward the rear.

Reusing the motor holder (if required) 3. Loosen the four screws (C) and remove the actuator holder from the defective motor.

Place the new actuator in the holder and fasten it with the four screws C.

M1_1 = right

M1_1 = left

A

B

C

NOTEiSeal set screws A with Loctite 242 before fastening them tight.

1.

3.

2.DX1

59 38 399 D33526 – 18 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

6.3 Replacing the PAN actuators (M1_1/2) Tabs 6

Installing the new actuator Install the actuator in the reverse order of removal.

NOTEiDon't forget to plug connectors X811 and X812 back in, lay the cables in their original positions and reattach all cable ties and clamps (see section "Laying cables when replacing actuators (M1_1/2)" on page 6-18).


– Check the function of the actuators.

– Perform the complete unit adjustment (see chapter 4).

6.3.1 Laying cables when replacing actuators (M1_1/2)

Lay cable in a single loop and fasten it with a cable tie.

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 19

Tab 6 6.4 Replacing the headrest

6.4

6.4 Replacing the headrest

Removing the defective headrest 1. While holding the headrest firmly from below, loosen screw A and remove the defective headrest.

Pull cable L18 off of connector X1 on board DX5 (see "Laying cables when replacing the headrests" on page 6-20).

Installing the new headrest Plug cable L18 into connector X1 on board DX5 of the new headrest.

Position the new headrest in the unit and screw it on loosely with screw A until a slight stop is perceptible.


Unit software version V02.28 or higher is required to operate a unit with head-rest version 2 (delivered from 2007 on as spare part (5969741). For this rea-son, be sure to perform a software update after replacing the headrest. A CD-ROM containing software version V02.28 is attached to the spare part.

For XGPlus units:Check the headrest configuration via service routine S017.10 and make sure that the ID is set to "02" (also see section 5.13.8).

A1.

Headrest version 1(will be replaced by headrest version 2 in 2007 and then no longer available as a spare part)

Headrest version 2(will be available (from 2007 on) under the part no.: 5969741)

Vertical

set obliquely toward the back Headrest version 1

59 38 399 D33526 – 20 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

6.4 Replacing the headrest Tabs 6

Aligning the new headrest Switch the unit ON.

Switch the light localizers ON and align the headrest so that the MS light beam strikes the center of the forehead support.

Tighten screw A securely.

NOTEiMake sure that the headrest does not turn when you tighten the screw.


– Check the function of the headrest using the forehead and temple support keys on the user interface.

– No further action is required.

6.4.1 Laying cables when replacing the headrests

29

Plug cable L13 into con-nector X1 (DX5).

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 21

Tab 6 6.5 Replacing the Easypad (XGPlus) or the Multipad (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE)

6.5

6.5 Replacing the Easypad (XGPlus) or the Multipad (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE)

Removing the defective user interface 1. Press into slit A of the housing cover with a screwdriver (do not pry!) and remove the defective user interface from the control panel.

2. Pull cables L9 and L10 off of connectors X102 (L9) and X103 (L10) on board DX7/DX71.

1.

2.

L9 (X102)

L10 (X103)

DX7/DX71

Easypad (XGPlus)

Multipad (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE)

* * Shielded in unit HW version BA and higher (see page 6-25)

A

59 38 399 D33526 – 22 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

6.5 Replacing the Easypad (XGPlus) or the Multipad (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) Tabs 6

Installing the new user interface 3. Check the defective cover whether a grounding strap ist present.

– If not, (for ORTHOPHOS XG3 and XG5) cut off the projekting length B of the gounding strap C from the new cover.

– If so, (for ORTHOPHOS XGPlus) insert grounding strap C from the new cover into the Easypad.Remove old adhesive strip. Clean the adhesive surface and adhere grounding strap C.

Plug the cables of the new user interface into connectors X102 (L9) and X103 (L10) on board DX7/DX71 and clip the new user interface onto the control panel.

CB

C

3.

C

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 23

Tab 6 6.5 Replacing the Easypad (XGPlus) or the Multipad (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE)

6.5


– Since board DX7/DX71 is always replaced along with the user interface, be sure to also observe the “Measures following replacement of boards“ (see section 6.20.1)

- Check the user interface for correct functioning as well as the function of the display elements. (After the unit is switched ON all of the display elements must light up briefly!)

Easypad (XGPlus only): – Perform a software update to the current system version (see section 1.9).

Following replacement of the Easypad, the language set on baord DX7 is set to the factory setting by default (00 = German, English, French, Italian). If the configured unit language set (displayable via service routine S017.5 or the "extended detail query“ in SIXABCON) has any configuration other than 00, this configuration will be copied to DX7 by the update.

59 38 399 D33526 – 24 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

6.6 Replacing the control panel Tabs 6

6.6 Replacing the control panel

Removing the user interface Remove the user interface (see page 6-21).

Removing the defective control panel 1. Swing folding mechanism A for the user interface all the way up. This makes it easier to remove the cover.

2. Press into slit B of the housing cover with a screwdriver (do not pry!) and remove the cover.

3. Detach cables L9 and L10 from the strain reliefs.

4. Rotate the control panel to the center position and loosen the four screws C.

Pull the cables out of the control panel and remove the panel.

Installing the new control panel To install the control panel and the user interface, follow the procedure for removing them in reverse order.

NOTEiDon't forget to plug connectors X102 and X103 back into board DX7/DX71, lay the cables in their original positions and reattach the strain re-liefs (see "Laying cables when replacing the control panel" on page 6-25).


– Check the user interface for correct functioning as well as the function of the display elements. (After the unit is switched ON all of the display elements must light up briefly!)


AB

C

2.

1.4.

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 25

Tab 6 6.6 Replacing the control panel

6.6

6.6.1 Laying cables when replacing the control panel

L9 (gray)

L10

Reattach the strain reliefs.

Up to unit hardware version AG (until approx. Oct. 2006)

L9

Reattach the strain reliefs.

From unit hardware version BA (since approx. Nov. 2006)

(green)

L10 (green)

(gray)

59 38 399 D33526 – 26 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

6.7 Replacing/adjusting the FH light localizer (PAN) Tabs 6

6.7 Replacing/adjusting the FH light localizer (PAN)

Removing the covers Remove the covers (see also section 1.14):

– Top arm cover

1. Pull the cable of the FH laser module off of connector X807 on board DX1.

Detach the cover (see also section 1.14):

– Front slide cover, carefully pulling it together with the FH light localizer off toward the front.

Removing the defective laser module 2. Detach the cable from the strain reliefs.

3. Loosen the two screws (A) and remove the holder including the laser module (FH).

4. Loosen the two screws (B) and carefully pull laser module C out of the holder toward the front.

DX11.

2.

A

A

B

B

C

3.

4.

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 27

Tab 6 6.7 Replacing/adjusting the FH light localizer (PAN)

6.7

Installing the new laser module Insert the new laser module (FH) in the holder and retighten screws B.

NOTEiMake sure that the lines in the laser module run vertically.

Screw the holder securely back onto the cover with screws A and reattach the strain reliefs.

Set the front slide cover down on the top support cover and plug the cable of the new FH laser module into connector X807 on board DX1.

NOTEiBefore reattaching the front slide cover, you must adjust the FH light localizer.

Adjusting the FH light localizer (PAN) Switch the unit ON.

Switch the light localizers ON.

Loosen screws A slightly and align the laser module (FH) including the holder so that the FH light beam runs parallel to the edge of the tube as-sembly light localizer C (visible here in the mirror).

Tighten screws A securely.

NOTEiMake sure that the holder does not turn when you tighten the screws.

Check the light localizer again and perform a correction if necessary.

Attaching the covers Reattach the top arm and front slidecovers.



C

59 38 399 D33526 – 28 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

6.8 Replacing/adjusting the MS light localizer laser module (PAN) Tabs 6

6.8 Replacing/adjusting the MS light localizer laser module (PAN)


– Top arm cover

Pull the cables of the laser modules (FH+MS) off of connectors X807 (FH) and X811 (MS) on board DX1.

Detach the cover (see also section 1.14):

– Front slide cover, carefully pulling it together with the FH light localizer off toward the front.

Removing the defective laser module Detach the cable from the cable holder.

1. Loosen the two screws A and carefully remove the laser module (MS) to-ward the front.

Installing the new laser module Insert the new laser module (MS) in the holder and tighten the screws A loosely.

NOTEiMake sure that the lines in the laser module run horizontally.

Plug the cable of the new MS laser module into connector X811 on board DX1 and run the cable in the cable holder.

NOTEiBefore reattaching the front slide cover, you must adjust the MS light localizer.

DX1

A

1.

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 29

Tab 6 6.8 Replacing/adjusting the MS light localizer laser module (PAN)

6.8

Adjusting the MS light localizer (PAN) Insert a bite block in the support piece.

Switch the unit ON.

Switch the light localizers ON and align the laser module (MS) so that the MS light beam (C) strikes the center of the bite block or support piece.

Tighten screws A securely.

NOTEiBe careful not to turn the laser module any more when tightening the screws.


Attaching the covers Set the front slide cover down on the top support cover.

Plug the cable of the FH laser module back into connector X807 on board DX1.

Reattach the top arm and front slide covers.



29

C

59 38 399 D33526 – 30 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

6.9 Replacing/adjusting the FH light localizer (Ceph) Tabs 6

6.9 Replacing/adjusting the FH light localizer (Ceph)


– Cover of cephalometer

– Outer cover of secondary diaphragm

CAUTIONDo not under any circumstances remove or move the secondary diaphragm! Otherwise the system will require readjustment.

Removing the defective laser module Pull the cable of the Ceph laser module off of connector X407 on board DX91 and detach the cable from the cable ties and holder.

1. Loosen screw A and remove the FH laser module (Ceph).

Installing the new laser module Insert the new laser module (FH) and tighten screw A loosely.

NOTEiMake sure that the lines in the laser module run vertically.

Plug the cable of the FH laser module back into connector X407 on board DX91.

Lay the cable in its original position and secure it there with cable ties.

NOTEiBefore reattaching the cover of the secondary diaphragm, you must adjust the Ceph light localizer.

Cable holder andcable ties

Laser module

A

1.

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 31

Tab 6 6.9 Replacing/adjusting the FH light localizer (Ceph)

6.9

Adjusting the Ceph light localizer (FH) Switch the unit ON.

Switch the light localizers ON.

Align the Ceph (FH) laser module so that FH light beam C runs horizontal between the ear plugs (tolerance: ± 1.5 mm).

Tighten screw A securely.

NOTEiBe careful not to turn the laser module when you tighten the screws.


Attaching the covers Reattach the cover of the secondary diaphragm.

Reattach the cover to the cephalometer.



60 90 12070 80 100 110

C

59 38 399 D33526 – 32 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

6.10 Removing the light localizers from the ring (for the XGPlus and XG 5, if present) Tabs 6

6.10 Removing the light localizers from the ring(for the XGPlus and XG 5, if present)

In XGPlus and XG 5 units with an older serial number, a light localizer is located on the left and on the right bottom side of the ring. Both of these light localizers must be removed for TSA operation. To do this, proceed as follows:

1. Unplug the cables of the light localizers from connectors X405 and X406 on board DX61 and detach the cables from the cable clamps.

2. Unscrew the holders including the light localizers from the ring.

NOTEiDepending on the serial number of the unit, different versions of light localizers may be installed.

CAUTIONFor "TSA ready" units, make sure that cable L20 (TSA motor) and cables L21 (light barriers) are once again correctly installed in the cable clamps (see page 6-45). Tighten the cables slightly if necessary.

X406 X405

Light localizer

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 33

Tab 6 6.11 Replacing the support piece (bite block holder)

6.11

6.11 Replacing the support piece (bite block holder)

Removing the defective support piece 1. Loosen the two screws (A) and remove the support piece.

Installing the support piece Place the support piece on the tube bend and fasten it with the two screws (A).


– Check the system adjustment via a diaphragm test exposure PAN - Symmetry (see page 7-22).

– Perform a complete PAN unit adjustment(see chapter 4).

A

1.

59 38 399 D33526 – 34 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

6.12 Replacing the motor-driven diaphragm (for XGPlus / XG 5) Tabs 6

6.12 Replacing the motor-driven diaphragm (for XGPlus / XG 5)

CAUTIONBe sure to install the diaphragm unit that matches the given unit hardware version (see spare parts list for unit serial number and part number of matching diaphragm). If the wrong diaphragm unit is installed, error code E6 61 70 will be displayed prior to exposure release (see Chapter 2-9).




A

B

1.

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 35

Tab 6 6.12 Replacing the motor-driven diaphragm (for XGPlus / XG 5)

6.12

Removing the defective diaphragm unit Pull cables L11 and L12 off of connectors X501 (L11) and X101 (L12) on board DX61 (see page 6-36).

TSA operation only:Pull cables off of connectors X203, X303, X304, X405 and X406 on board DX61.

1. Loosen the upper screw (A) and the two lower screws (B) and remove the diaphragm unit.

NOTEiIf the two lower screws are not accessible, push the lower slider (B) upward manually. If the slider is in such an unfavorable position that it cannot be pushed upward, then:– Remove board DX61,– Loosen the 4 screws on motor C and raise it together with the spindle.

Installing the new diaphragm unit Start by fastening the new diaphragm unit to the unit with screw A.

Then screw in the two lower screws (B) and carefully tighten them securely (to a torque of 80 Ncm); Caution! Aluminum housing.

Plug cables L11 and L12 onto connectors X501 (L11) and X101 (L12) on board DX61 (see "Cables and connectors for replacement of the mo-tor-driven diaphragm unit" on page 6-36).

For TSA operation:Plug cables back onto connectors X203 (motor cable L20), X303 (light barrier cable L21), X304 (light barrier cable L21), X405 (laser light localiz-er 1 TSA) and X406 (laser light localizer 2 TSA) on board DX61 (see "Ca-bles and connectors for replacement of the motor-driven diaphragm unit" on page 6-36).



– Since board DX61 is always replaced along with the diaphragm unit, also be sure to observe the “Measures following replacement of boards“ (see section 6.20.1).

– Perform a complete unit adjustment (see chapter 4).– Take diaphragm test exposures for possible later evaluation by an expert.

B

DX61

C

DX61

59 38 399 D33526 – 36 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

6.12 Replacing the motor-driven diaphragm (for XGPlus / XG 5) Tabs 6

6.12.1 Cables and connectors for replacement of the motor-driven diaphragm unit

X101 (L12) X501 (L11)

X203(L20)

X304(L21)

X303(L21)

X406 X405

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 37

Tab 6 6.13 Replacing the fixed diaphragm (only XG 3 / 3 PPE)

6.13

6.13 Replacing the fixed diaphragm (only XG 3 / 3 PPE)




Removing the defective diaphragm unit 1. Loosen the two screws (A) (approx. 2-3 turns) and push the fixed diaphragm upward.

Installing the new diaphragm unit Assemble by following the same procedure in reverse order.



– Take PAN diaphragm test exposures (see page 7-17) (e.g. for possible later evaluation by experts).

– Perform the PAN system adjustment (see chapter 4).

A A A A


59 38 399 D33526 – 38 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

6.14 Replacing the X-ray tube assembly Tabs 6

6.14 Replacing the X-ray tube assembly




Removing the diaphragm unit Remove the diaphragm unit (see section 6.12).

Removing the defective tube assembly 1. Loosen the four screws A and remove cover plate B incl. the cable shield-ing (L3). Caution! Also pull cable L3 off of connector X3 and the ground cable off of connector X304 on board DX6. (see page 6-40)

NOTEiThe ferrite core and cable shielding can remain on the cover plate.

Detach cables L5 and L6 from the strain reliefs and pull the cables off of sockets J6 (L5) and J2-J3 (L6) on board DX6 (see page 6-40).

2. Loosen the two rear screws (C) on the tube assembly.

Hold the tube assembly firmly in place (caution: heavy!), loosen the two front screws (D) and remove the tube assembly toward the front.

NOTEiTip: If you leave the two front screws on the rotating element, you can imme-diately hang the tube assembly on them when reinstalling it.

1. 2.

A

B

CD C D

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 39

Tab 6 6.14 Replacing the X-ray tube assembly

6.14

Installing the new tube assembly Hang the new tube assembly on the two front screws of the rotating ele-ment and tighten them securely.

CAUTIONMake sure that the cables of the diaphragm unit once again lie in their original position (see section 6.21 page 6-41), as they could otherwise get in the way while you're attaching the covers later on.

Insert the two rear screws and tighten them firmly.

Plug cables L3, L5 and L6 as well as the ground cable back onto board DX6 and reattach the cables to the strain reliefs.

Attach the cover plate.

Installing the diaphragm unit Install the diaphragm unit (see section 6.12).



– Since board DX6 is always replaced along with the tube assembly, also be sure to observe the “Measures following replacement of boards“ (see section 6.20.1)

– Perform a complete unit adjustment (see chapter 4).

– Perform an acceptance test (applies to Germany only); without consulting an expert

– Take diaphragm test exposures for possible later evaluation by an expert.

59 38 399 D33526 – 40 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

6.14 Replacing the X-ray tube assembly Tabs 6

6.14.1 Cables and connectors for replacement of the tube assembly

Unplug/plug in cable L6 (socketJ2-J3 on board DX6)

Unplug/plug in cable L5 (socketJ6 on board DX6)

Unplug/plug in cable L3(connector X3 on board DX6)

Laying cables cor-rectly on the cover plate

Unplug/plug in ground cable(connector X304 on board DX6)

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 41

Tab 6 6.14 Replacing the X-ray tube assembly

6.14

Cable routed on left side of tube assembly: 2x L21, L11 and TSA laser light localizer

Cable routed on right side of tube assembly: L12, L20 (TSA motor) and TSA laser light local-izer

59 38 399 D33526 – 42 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

6.15 Replacing the fan (tube assembly) Tabs 6

6.15 Replacing the fan (tube assembly)



Replacing the fan 1. Loosen the four screws A and carefully remove the cover plate including the fan. Caution: Cable!

Pull the fan cable off of connector X2 on board DX6.

Install the new fan in the reverse order of removal.


– Check the function of the fan using service routine S005.4 (see section 5.6.2).


A

1.

Connector X2

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 43

Tab 6 6.16 Replacing the PAN (TSA) sensor holder

6.16

6.16 Replacing the PAN (TSA) sensor holder


– Sensor holder cover, large

Remove the sensor.

Removing the defective sensor holder 1. For TSA sensor holder (PAN), XGPlus only: Detach motor cable L20 and both light barrier cables (L21) from the cable tie on the unit and pull the ca-bles off of connectors X203 (L20), X303 and X304 (L21) of the TSA sen-sor holder.

2. Loosen the three screws A and remove the sensor holder. Caution: Cable L13!

3. Loosen the two screws (B) and remove the small sensor holder cover.

4. Loosen the three screws (C) and remove the connection socket.

A

B

C

2.

4.

3.

A

B

C

3.

2.

4.

1.

TSA sensor holder (XGPlus comfort class)

Rigid sensor holder (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE + XGPlus basic class)

1.

59 38 399 D33526 – 44 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

6.16 Replacing the PAN (TSA) sensor holder Tabs 6

5. Detach the shield clamp (L13) on the rear side of the connection socket.

6. Loosen the connector screw connection on the front side of the connec-tion socket and thread the connector to the rear through the connection socket and the sensor holder.

Installing the new sensor holder 7. Install the new sensor holder in the reverse order of removal.

NOTEiDon't forget to plug all connectors and cables back in again in their original position and reattach the cable shields as well as all cable ties and strain re-liefs (see section "Laying cables when replacing the PAN sensor holder" on page 6-45).


– Perform the PAN system adjustment (see section 4.3). The TSA adjustment also must be performed for TSA units!

– Take diaphragm test exposures for possible later evaluation by an expert.

Shield clamp

6.5.

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 45

Tab 6 6.16 Replacing the PAN (TSA) sensor holder

6.16

6.16.1 Laying cables when replacing the PAN sensor holder

Sensor holder, rigid (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) or XGPlus basic version)

59 38 399 D33526 – 46 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

6.16 Replacing the PAN (TSA) sensor holder Tabs 6

TSA sensor holder (XGPlus full version)

Reattach cable ties

Reattach cable shield

Lay cables on the ring!

Draw cable back into sensor holder (no longer appli-cable as from system hardware version BA, approx. from November 2006)

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 47

Tab 6 6.17 Replacing the ceph sensor holder

6.17

6.17 Replacing the ceph sensor holder

1. Remove the sensor.

Removing the defective sensor holder 2. Loosen the three screws A and remove the connection socket B. Caution: Cable L35!

3. Detach the cable shield from terminal C and the connector screw connec-tion (loosen the two screws D from the rear) and thread the connector to the rear through the connection socket.

Installing the new sensor holder Install the new sensor holder in the reverse order of removal.

NOTEiDon't forget to reattach the cable shields.


– Perform the CEPH system adjustment (see section 4.4).

1.

A

B2.

3.

D

D

C

59 38 399 D33526 – 48 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

6.18 Replacing the sensor Tabs 6

6.18 Replacing the sensor


– Since board DX81 is always replaced along with the sensor, also be sure to observe the “Measures following replacement of boards“ (see section 6.20.1)

– Perform a software update of the unit to version V02.20 or higher.

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 49

Tab 6 6.19 Replacing the light barriers

6.19

6.19 Replacing the light barriers

V1_3

V1_1V1_2

V91_2

V91_1

V1_4

V1_3

unit HW version < AG

unit HW version ≥ AG

59 38 399 D33526 – 50 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

6.19 Replacing the light barriers Tabs 6

The following light barriers can be replaced:

In the panoramic X-ray unit Light barrier at actuator 1, ON position: V1_1

Light barrier at actuator 2, ON position: V1_2

Light barrier at ring motor, starting position of rotation: V1_3

Light barrier at HA motor, height adjustment: V1_4

In the cephalometer Light barrier for patient diaphragm position detection, ceph: V91_1

Light barrier for sensor position detection, ceph: V91_2


After replacing V1_1, 2 and 3: – Perform a complete unit adjustment (see chapter 4).

After replacing V1_4:– Perform a function check.

After replacing V91_1 and 2:– Execute S034.4 and S034.5 (see pages 5.19.1 ff.) – Check the CEPH adjustment by taking diaphragm test exposures:Fixed

point of rotation and Quickshot– Perform a CEPH unit adjustment if necessary (see chapter 4).

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 51


6.19

6.19.1 Replacing light barrier V1_3

Removing light barrier V1_3 Remove the covers (see also section 1.14):

– Top arm cover

1. Loosen the two clamping screws A on the tie rods and remove the tie rods by pulling them B upward.

2. Pull the light barrier cables (V1_1, V1_2 and V1_3) off of connectors X802, X803 and X804 and the ring motor cable off of connector X813 on board DX1.

1.

A

A

B

Pull light barrier cables off of con-nectors X802, X803 and X804 on

board DX1

Pull ring motor cable off of con-nector X813 on board DX1

2.

59 38 399 D33526 – 52 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


NOTEiThe three light barrier cables are bundled with a flexible tube and fastened to the basic unit next to board DX1 or on the upper wing plate with two cable clamps.

Detach the cable harness (flexible tube) from the cable clamps and re-move the flexible tube.

Remove the ring motor (see page 6-14).

3. Loosen the screw (C) on the wing plate (Caution: The eccentric spring is prestressed!). Unhook the spring and release it carefully. Remove the eccentric spring D.

4. Detach the remaining screws from the wing plates and initially remove the upper wing E.

3. C

D

4.

E

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 53


6.19

5. Loosen the screws from the bearing covers of the actuator spindles and detach the spindles. Now you can remove the lower wing plate (F).

Position the motor mount ring so that the tensioning roller is positioned above a recess (so that the roller can be removed from below).

6. Detach the retaining ring and the washer. Remove tensioning roller G incl. eccentric bolt (downward).

5.

F

6.

G

59 38 399 D33526 – 54 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


7. Loosen the screws on the right guide profile (on spring side) H and re-move the profile including tension spring J.

CAUTIONLook out for bearing shells K. They may fall out after the profile is removed.

8. Remove bearing shells K.

9. Loosen the screws on motor mount ring L and remove motor housing M.

7. - 9.

H J

K

L

M

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 55


6.19

10. Loosen the two screws on light barrier V1_3 and remove it.

10.

V1_3

M

59 38 399 D33526 – 56 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


Installing light barrier V1_3 Screw new light barrier V1_3 onto motor housing M securely.

Reattach motor housing M to motor mount ring L and screw them together again with the four screws.

CAUTIONSeal the screws with Loctite 242.

Reinsert the left part of the bearing shell and bring the motor mount ring along with the motor mount back into position.

Reinsert the right part of the bearing shell K with the guide profile H and the tension spring J and tighten the profile screws loosely.

Reattach tensioning roller G to the motor housing with the eccentric bolt from below and fasten the eccentric bolt from above using a washer and a retaining ring.

Pull the rotary ring (with motor mount ring) into the frontmost position and fasten the front screw of guide profile H securely.

Now push the rotary ring (with motor mount ring) into the rearmost posi-tion (from the column) and fasten the rear screw of guide profile H secure-ly.

Slide the rotary ring back and forth another 1 to 2 times to make sure that it glides smoothly in the guide.

NOTEiCheck to make sure that the guide profile is still sufficiently greased following assembly. Grease the profile with Chesterton 622 if necessary.

Reinsert the lower wing plate F.

Insert both spindles with spindle nuts and screw the bearing cover back on tight.

Reinsert upper wing plate E and refasten the wing plates with the eight screws (Note Tighten screw C for fastening the eccentric spring only loosely!).

Attach eccentric spring D to the eccentric bolt of the tensioning roller and reattach it to screw C on the upper wing plate with a prestress of 2½ turns. Tighten screw C securely.

Reinstall the ring motor (see page 6-15).

CAUTIONNote the correct procedure for laying the cables of the ring motor.

Now perform the cabling (see page 6-57).

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 57


6.19

Cabling V1_1, V1_2 and V1_3

Run the light barrier cables together next to the ring motor and pull the flexible tube over them.

11. Secure the flexible tube at the motor end with a cable tie and fasten it to the wing plate with the cable clamp.

12. Twist the flexible tube (only the tube, not the cables!) clockwise at the con-nector end, secure it with a cable tie and fasten it to the basic unit next to board DX1 with the cable clamp.

13.

CAUTIONIn its installed state, the cable harness (flexible tube) must exhibit a tendency to move upward and form a loop during travel of the rotary ring. It must dip into the unit!Also make sure that the cable harness is refastened to the cable clamps in its original position.

Properly run cable harness

11. 12.

13.

59 38 399 D33526 – 58 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


Plug the ring motor cable and the light barrier cables back into connectors X813, X802, X803 and X804 on board DX1.


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 59

Tab 6 6.20 Replacing circuit boards

6.20

6.20 Replacing circuit boards

CAUTIONPlease observe the usual precautionary measures for handling printed circuit boards (ESD).Touch a ground point to discharge static electricity before touching any boards.

CAUTIONReplacement of printed circuit boards DX6 and DX11:Never replace both boards at the same time. After replacing one of these boards, first proceed as specified in section 6.20.1 and then restart the unit. Only then may you begin replacement of the other module.

CAUTIONPrior to circuit board replacement:Open the PAN and CEPH RESET ADJUSTMENT menus in SIDEXIS and write down the adjustment values before you start replacing the boards.

CAUTIONReplacement of circuit board DX11:– If the old DX11 is still working:

Open the "extended detail query"in SIXABCON, search for the "Language Set ID" (listed in "Extended Configuration DX7") and write down the configuration of theLanguage Set Index. If it differs from 00 the Language Set Index has to be resetafter inserting a new DX11, using the service routine S017.5 (see page 5-86).

– The replacement of circuit board DX11 also causes the loss of userpreference settings (patient symbols, quickshot pre-selections etc.). Point this out to the user or set the original values up again after the replacement of the circuit board, provided they could still be queried prior to the replacement.

CAUTIONPlease be sure to read the notes in Section "Measures following replacement of boards" (see page 6-60)!

This Service Manual describes all measures required after the replacement of modules or circuit boards, provided they were known at the time of publication. You will find more up-to-date information and supplements concerning this subject on the latest ORTHOPHOS XG CD and on the Sirona dealer page on the Internet. For this reason, you should always check for the latest informa-tion on the replacement of modules and performing updates before you start replacing any modules or boards.

NOTEiThe connectors on the boards are labeled on delivery of the system.

Tip: Check the designations on the connectors when pulling off the cables and label them correctly if necessary.

59 38 399 D33526 – 60 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

6.20 Replacing circuit boards Tabs 6

6.20.1 Measures following replacement of boards

CAUTIONAfter replacing boards or modules containing boards, check to make sure that the software version of the module corresponds to the current software status of the system. The software version for the modules can...

for XGPlus:be accessed through service routine S008.2 or the extended detail query in SIXABCON. You can also check the info screen in advance to determine whether the current software constellation is permissible. If this is not the case, the version number of the entire software is labeled with an asterisk (e.g. V02.20*)

for XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE:be accessed through service routine S008.2 or the extended detail query in SIXABCON.

Perform a software update or downgrade (see Section 1.9) in case of software incompatibilities.

Always perform the measures described below in the given sequence and do not carry out any other actions between the steps.

DX32

DX61*

DX11

DX1

DX91

DX41**DX42

see page 5-9

DX71

* not with XG 3 / 3 PPE** from system hardware version BA

does not apply to circuit board DX41

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 61


6.20

The following table provides an overview of various possible replacement sit-uations and cross-references to detailed descriptions of the actions required for the corresponding situations following board replacement.

Board Constellation Measures Page

DX1 Inserting a new DX1

ORTHOPHOS XGPlus

System software version V02.20 or higher

Switch the unit ON.

Perform a software update of the unit to version V02.27 or higher as described in section 1.9.

1-22

ORTHOPHOS XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE

DX11 Replacing a DX11

NOTEiThe circuit board DX11 with software version V02.22 or higher requires SIDEXIS software version V01.45 or higher for the update. Consequently, it is necessary to update the entire unit to software version V02.22 or higher or SIDEXIS V01.45 or higher.

Inserting a new DX11

ORTHOPHOS XGPlus

System software version V02.20

Please proceed as described in sec-tion 6.20.2, Case A.

6-64


ORTHOPHOS XGPlus


Please proceed as described in sec-tion 6.20.2, Case B.

6-67

Inserting a DX11 from another unit with soft-ware version V02.22 or higher

ORTHOPHOS XGPlus


Please proceed as described in sec-tion 6.20.2, Case C.

6-70


ORTHOPHOS XG 5


Please proceed as described in sec-tion 6.20.2, Case D.

6-72

Inserting a DX11 from another unit with soft-ware version V02.20 or higher

ORTHOPHOS XG 5 / 3


CAUTIONNever use a module from another unit in an XG 3 PPE unit or vice versa.

Please proceed as described in sec-tion 6.20.2, Case E.

6-75




Please proceed as described in sec-tion 6.20.2, Case F.

6-77

59 38 399 D33526 – 62 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


DX6

(Tube assembly)

Replacing an X-ray tube assembly incl. DX6

Inserting a new X-ray tube assembly

ORTHOPHOS XGPlus


Please proceed as described in sec-tion 6.20.3, Case G.

6-80


ORTHOPHOS XGPlus


Please proceed as described in sec-tion 6.20.3, Case H.

6-83

Inserting an X-ray tube assembly from an-other unit with software version V02.22

ORTHOPHOS XGPlus


Please proceed as described in sec-tion 6.20.3, Case I.

6-85




Please proceed as described in sec-tion 6.20.3, Case J.

6-86

Inserting an X-ray tube assembly from an-other unit with software version V02.20

ORTHOPHOS XG 5/3


CAUTIONNever use a module from another unit in an XG 3 PPE unit or vice versa.

Please proceed as described in sec-tion 6.20.3, Case K.

6-88

DX61

(Diaphragm unit)

Inserting a new DX61 Check the compatibility between the software status of the modules and that of the overall system. Perform an update or a downgrade if neces-sary.

NOTEiPlease note that the specific diaphragm unit required depends on the unit serial numbers specified in the spare parts list.

1-24

DX7

(Easypad)

Inserting a new Easypad incl. DX7

ORTHOPHOS XGPlus

System software status V02.20 or higher

It isessential that you perform a software update to a system version ≥ V02.25 (see section 1.9).

NOTEiAfter the replacement of the Easypad, the language settings on circuit board DX7 are at the factory default (00 = German, English, French,Italian). If the configured system lan-guage set (displayable via service rou-tine S017.5 or the “extended detail que-ry“ in SIXABCON) has a configuration other than 00, this configuration will be copied to board DX7 by the update func-tion.

1-24


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 63


6.20

* circuit board DX41 no longer applies in system hardware version BA.Circuit board DX41 is available as a spare part for systems up to hardware version AG.

DX71

(Multipad)


1-24

DX32

(Stand)

Inserting a new DX32 No further action is required.

DX41*

(Stand)


1-24

DX42

(Remote control)


1-24

To system hardware version < BA: Set jumper X109 and X110 to "Con-figuration with DX41“ (inside jumper) (see also Section 6.20.4).

6-90

DX81

(Sensor)

Using a new sensor Perform an update to an overall soft-ware version of V02.25 or higher.

1-24

DX91

(Ceph)

Inserting a new DX91 Check the compatibility between the software status of the module and that of the overall system. Perform an update or a downgrade if neces-sary.

1-24

Perform service routine S034, test steps 4 and 5.

5-134

Perform the ceph adjustment. 4-56


59 38 399 D33526 – 64 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


6.20.2 Replacing a DX11

Case A: New DX11,ORTHOPHOS XGPlus

System software status V02.20

CAUTIONAfter a new DX11 is inserted, the IP address is initially reset to the factory setting. Make sure that no second system is running on the same IP address before switching the system to a new IP address.


NOTEiDo not acknowledge any error messages at this point.

2. Install the current SIDEXIS software version (V01.53 or higher).

NOTEiIf the current SIDEXIS version is a patch version, the previous officially released main version of SIDEXIS has to be installed before the current version can be installed.

3. Update the software to the latest version via the automatic update opti-on(see SIRONA internet website, Dealer domain (under Product Info ' X-ray Systems) (see also Section 1.9.6).

NOTEiThe current update file can be found on the ORTHOPHOS XG Software CD. This CD is supplied along with every spare DX11 PC board and is also inclu-ded in the language-specific set. The contents of this CD can also be down-loaded (under Product Info X-ray Systems) from the Dealer domain of the SIRONA internet website at www.sirona.com .

4. If several devices are installed in the network:Set the IP address with the help of SIXABCON.

5. Switch the unit OFF.Wait approximately 1 minute. Then switch the unit ON again.

The error message E1 10 03 (format flash file system) is displayed.


The formatting of the flash file system is started automatically. Error mes-sage E1 10 04 is displayed during the entire process (approx. 5 - 6 min.). When the formatting is finished, the error message is automatically ac-knowledged by the system and error message E6 11 07 (undefined sys-tem class) is displayed.


The access level for the service menu (level 4) is automatically started.

E1 10 03 R

E1 10 04

E6 11 07

5 - 6 min.

R

E6 11 07 RR

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 65


6.20

8. Press and hold down the Service key until the patient symbol keys light up (approx. 2 s).

9. Then press the patient symbol keys in the following order within 4 s: b – d – a.

Once the key combination has been entered correctly, service routine 017, test step 1 (select/confirm system class) is started automatically. The Memory button is lit.

NOTEiAcknowledge any additional error messages with the R key .

10. Confirm the “Comfort“ system class (01):

To do this, first press the Memory button (R key lights up) and then the R key .

11. Quit the service routine via the double arrow key .


Error message E6 15 05 (undefined system serial number) is displayed.





16. Start service routine S008.3, check the unit serial number and confirm it if it is correct (see page 5-50).


CAUTIONIn case of a wrong serial number, cancel the update and contact the Sirona Customer Service Center!




a b d Leve

l 4

c

approx. 2 s R

?

1

2

3

+- 01

R

R

E6 15 05 RR

E6 15 04 RR

E6 15 04 RR

59 38 399 D33526 – 66 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008



20. Start service routine S008.4 and confirm the unit equipment.

21. Determine the ring type based on the system serial number.

PAN unit serial numbers up to 20056 = old ring type = 01

PAN unit serial numbers from 20057 = new ring type = 02

PAN/CEPH unit serial numbers up to 40104 = old ring type = 01

PAN/CEPH unit serial numbers from 40105 = new ring type = 02

22. Start service routine S034.7 and select the corresponding ring type (see page 5-145).

23. Start service routine S017 and perform the system configuration (test step 2-17) (see page 5-78).

NOTEiFor systems with hardware version< BA (until October 2006):– Circuit board DX41 must be configured with service routine S017.9.– Review the installed headrest version and adjust the configuration, using

service routine S017.10 if necessary (see page 5.13.8).

NOTEiInform the customer about the new possibilities of the software status, such as welcome screen (XGPlus only) or acoustic exposure signal. Activate these functions if they are required.

24. If the minimum travel height of the system must be limited:Set the travel height with service routine S018.2. (see page 5-110).

25. Perform another software update to the current system software version as described in section 1.9.3. This updates all modules in accordance with the configuration.

26. Perform the complete system adjustment (see chapter 4):

– PAN adjustment




This generates an XML file (with the system parameters) which is saved under the network name of the system in the PDATA/P2K_Config folder (see also section 1.10 on page 1-32).


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 67


6.20

Case B: New DX11,ORTHOPHOS XGPlus System software status V02.22 or higher






3. Perform a software update to the latest software version via the automatic update option (see SIRONA internet website, Dealer domain (under Pro-duct Info X-ray Systems) (see also Section 1.9.6).

NOTEiThe current update file can be found on the ORTHOPHOS XG Software CD. This CD is supplied along with every spare DX11 PC board and is also inclu-ded in the country set. The contents of this CD can also be downloaded (under Product Info X-ray Systems) from the Dealer domain of the SIRONA internet website at www.sirona.com

NOTEiIf the DX11 used already has the same software version as the overall unit, a software update to this version must nevertheless be performed so that an ad-ministrative entry can be made in the memory of the DX11.







E1 10 03 R

E1 10 04

E6 11 07

5 - 6 min.

R

E6 11 07 RR

59 38 399 D33526 – 68 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008




Once the key combination has been entered correctly, service routine 017, test step 1 (select/confirm system class) is started automatically. The Memory button is lit.













NOTEiIn systems that already run with a system software version V02.27 or higher, please check that there is a XML file in the PDATA/P2K_Config with the net-work name of the system (Extended details). This file contains up-to-date in-formation about the previous system configuration! See also section 1.10, on page 1-32).

a b d Leve

l 4

c

approx. 2 sR

?

1

2

3

+- 01

R

R

E6 15 05 RR

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 69


6.20










NOTEiInform the customer about the new possibilities of the software status, such as welcome screen (XGPlus only) or acoustic exposure signal. Activate these functions if they are required.




– PAN adjustment






59 38 399 D33526 – 70 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


Case C: DX11 from an external device,ORTHOPHOS XGPlus System software status V02.22 or higher

CAUTION– The replacement of a DX11 from an external device is possible if

theDX11 board and the system have at least the software version V02.22.

– The replacement is only possible within the same system class, i.e. the DX11 board must come from a XGPlus system if it is to be installed in another XGPlus system

CAUTIONAfter inserting the board, you must reconfigure the IP address to match the IP address of the existing X-ray component. Before you set the unit to the correct IP address, make sure that this address has not been assigned to any other device.





3. Perform a software update to a software version V02.25, however, ideally to the latest software version via the automatic update option (see SIRO-NA internet website, Dealer domain (under Product Info X-ray Systems) (see also Section 1.9.6).

NOTEiThe current update file can be found on the ORTHOPHOS XG Software CD. This CD is supplied along with every spare DX11 PC board and is also inclu-ded in the language-specific set. The contents of this CD can also be down-loaded (under Product Info X-ray Systems) from the Dealer domain of the SIRONA internet website at www.sirona.com

NOTEiIf the DX11 used already has the same software version as the overall unit, a software update to this version must nevertheless be performed so that an ad-ministrative entry can be made in the memory of the DX11.







8. Start service routine S008.3 (see page 5-50).

E6 15 05 RR

E6 15 04 RR

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 71


6.20

9. Get the unit serial number from the rating plate of the unit and enter it (see page 5-50).

NOTEiAny serial number which is unknown to the unit will not be accepted by the unit. The serial number entered must be identical with the one on the rating plate of the unit. If an inadmissible serial number is entered, the input will not be accepted and the serial number can be entered again.















– PAN adjustment






59 38 399 D33526 – 72 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


Case D: New DX11,ORTHOPHOS XG 5System software status V02.20



CAUTIONDo not acknowledge any error messages displayed at this point!





CAUTIONIf the DX11 used already has the same software version as the overall unit, a software update to this version must nevertheless be performed so that an ad-ministrative entry can be made in the memory of the DX11.








E1 10 03

E1 10 04

E6 11 07

5 - 6 min.

RR

E6 11 07 RR

R

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 73


6.20

7. Press and hold down the Service key until the LEDs above the patient symbol keys light up (approx. 2 s).

8. Then press the patient symbol keys in the following order within 4 s:b – d – a.

Once the key combination has been entered correctly, service routine 017, test step 1 (select/confirm system class) is started automatically. automatically. The LED above the Memory key lights up.

9. Confirm the “Basic“ system class (02):

To do this, first press the Memory button (LED above the R key lights up) and then the R key .

10. Quit the service routine via the Top arrow key above selection field 3.




13. Start service routine S008.3 and confirm the system serial number (see page 5-50).

14. Quit the service routine via the up arrow key above selection field 3.


16. Start service routine S034.7 and select ring type 02 (see page 5-145).

approx. 2 s

a b dc

R

1 2 3

______02_______

R

E6 15 05 RR

59 38 399 D33526 – 74 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008



NOTEiFor systems with hardware version< BA (until October 2006):Circuit board DX41 must be configured with service routine S017.9 .



– PAN adjustment

– CEPH adjustment, if installed





båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 75


6.20

Case E: DX11 from an external device,ORTHOPHOS XG 5 / 3 (not XG 3 PPE)System software status V02.20 or higher.

CAUTION– The replacement of a DX11 from an external device is possible if

the DX11 board and the system have at least the software version V02.20.

– The replacement is only possible within the same system class, i.e. DX11 must come from an XG 5 or XG 3 device if it is to be installed inan XG 5 or XG 3 system.

CAUTIONAfter inserting the board, you must reconfigure the IP address to match the IP address of the existing X-ray component. Before you set the unit to the correct IP address, make sure that this address has not been assigned to any other device.



2. Perform a software update to a software version V02.25, however, ideally to the latest software version via the automatic update option (see SIRO-NA internet website, Dealer domain (under Product Info X-ray Systems) (see also Section 1.9.6).











E6 15 05 RR

59 38 399 D33526 – 76 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008




10. Start service routine S017 and check the system configuration or perform the system configuration (test step 2-23) (see page 5-78).

NOTEiFor the XG 3: Service routine S017.17 must be set according to the serial number of the unit (see page 5-103).



– PAN adjustment






båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 77


6.20

Case F: New DX11,ORTHOPHOS XG 5/3/3 PPESystem software status V02.22 or higher.





NOTEiIf the current SIDEXIS version is a patch version, the previous officiallyreleased main version of SIDEXIS has to be installed before the current version can be installed.











E1 10 03

E1 10 04

E6 11 07

5 - 6 min.

RR

E6 11 07 RR

R

59 38 399 D33526 – 78 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008







10. Quit the service routine via the Top arrow key above selection field 3.







approx. 2 s

a b dc

R

1 2 3

______02_ _________

R

E6 15 05 RR

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 79


6.20




NOTEiFor systems with hardware version< BA (until October 2006):Circuit board DX41 must be configured with service routine S017.9.

NOTEiFor the XG 3: Service routine S017.17 must be set according to the serial number of the unit (see page 5-103).




– PAN adjustment





59 38 399 D33526 – 80 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


6.20.3 Replacing an X-ray tube assembly incl. DX6

Case G: New X-ray tube assembly,ORTHOPHOS XGPlus System software status V02.20



2. Perform a software downgrade (via the main version) of the X-ray tube assembly or board DX6 to software status V02.20 as described in section 1.9.3.

CAUTIONAt this place do not perform any software update to a higher version!


Error message E6 11 07 (undefined system class) is displayed.


The access level for the service menu is automatically started.




Once the key combination has been entered correctly, service routine 017, test step 1 (select/confirm system class) is started automatically. automatically. The Memory button is lit.




E6 11 07 RR

R

a b d Leve

l 4

c

approx. 2 s

?

1

2

3

+- 01

R

R

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 81


6.20














17. Start service routine S008.4 and confirm the unit equipment.




NOTEiIf the current SIDEXIS version is a patch version, the previous officially re-leased main version of SIDEXIS has to be installed before the current version can be installed.

21. Perform a software update to Version V02.27 or higher (automatic up-date) (see also section 1.9.5).


– PAN adjustment



23. Perform an acceptance test (applies to Germany only); without consulting an expert

E6 15 05 RR

E6 15 04 RR

E6 15 04 RR

59 38 399 D33526 – 82 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008





båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 83


6.20

Case H: New X-ray tube assembly,ORTHOPHOS XGPlus System software status V02.22 or higher.


2. If the software status of the newly installed DX6 board is not compatible with the current overall system software version, perform a software up-date to the current system version as described in section 1.9.3.








Once the key combination has been entered correctly, service routine 017, test step 1 (select/confirm system class) is started automatically. automatically. The Memory button is lit.







E6 11 07 RR

R

a b d Leve

l 4

c

approx. 2 s

?

1

2

3

+- 01

R

R

E6 15 05 RR

59 38 399 D33526 – 84 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008








NOTEiIf the current SIDEXIS version is a patch version, the previous officially released main version of SIDEXIS has to be installed before the currentversion can be installed.



– PAN adjustment







båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 85


6.20

Case I: X-ray tube assembly from an external device,ORTHOPHOS XGPlus System software status V02.22 or higher.

CAUTION– The replacement of an X-ray tube assembly from an external device is

possible if the X-ray tube assembly and the system have at least the software version V02.22.

– The replacement is only possible within the same system class, i.e. the X-ray tube assembly must come from a XGPlus system if it is to be installed in another XGPlus system


2. Perform a software update to a software status ≥ V02.25.












– PAN adjustment







E6 15 05 RR

E6 15 04 RR

59 38 399 D33526 – 86 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


Case J: New X-ray tube assemblyORTHOPHOS XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPESystem software status V02.20 or higher.


CAUTIONAt this place do not perform any software update to a higher version! (Important for the configuration!) The tube assembly must first be brought to the existing system software status.

2. Perform a software update to the overall system software status (automat-ic update) as described in section 1.9 in order to bring the tube assembly firstly to the existing system software status.









E6 11 07 RR

R

approx. 2 s

a b dc

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 87


6.20












NOTEiIf the current SIDEXIS version is a patch version, the previous officiallyreleased main version of SIDEXIS has to be installed before the current version can be installed.



– PAN adjustment






R

1 2 3

______02_ _________

R

E6 15 05 RR

59 38 399 D33526 – 88 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


Case K: X-ray tube assembly from external system,ORTHOPHOS XG 5 / 3 (not XG 3 PPE)System software status V02.20 or higher.

CAUTION– The replacement of an X-ray tube assembly from an external device is

possible if the X-ray tube assembly and the system have at least the software version V02.20.

– The replacement is only possible within the same system class, i.e. X-ray tube assembly must come from an XG 5 or XG 3- system if it is to be installed in an XG 5 or XG 3 system




NOTEiIf the current SIDEXIS version is a patch version, the previous officially re-leased main version of SIDEXIS has to be installed before the current version can be installed.













E6 15 05 RR

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 89


6.20


– PAN adjustment






59 38 399 D33526 – 90 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


6.20.4 Check jumper on circuit board DX42 (replacement of board DX42)

From system hardware version BA (November 2006), the DX42 board will have two jumpers which are configured through the system hardware version with or without board DX41.

If board DX42 is supplied as a spare part (from November 2006), the jumpers will be set to operation without circuit board DX41. If a new DX42 circuit board (supplied during/after November 2006) is to be inserted in a system with a system hardware version <BA as a spare part, the jumpers must be reconfig-ured prior to installation in accordance with the following steps.

6.20.5 Jumper position on circuit board DX42

Unit operation without DX41(factory setting from November 2006,hardware system version ≥ BA)

Unit operation with DX41(factory setting until October 2006,system HW version < BA)

DX42

DX

41 IN

DX

41 IN

X110X109

Jumper outside

DX

41 IN

DX

41 IN

X110X109

Jumper inside

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 91

Tab 6 6.21 Replacing cables

6.21

6.21 Replacing cables

CAUTIONSwitch the unit OFF before you start replacing cables or removing connectors.

CAUTIONBe careful not to twist the cables or kink the fiber-optic light guides when in-stalling them.

NOTEiAn overview of all cables can be found in section 1.12.

Always check the cables before replacing them (see section 3-17).

The cables are labeled with small flags. They specify the designation and part number of the cable.

The plugs and sockets on the cables are designated both on the boards and cables.Check the designations of the cables when pulling them off.

Some of the cables are marked with green adhesive tape. Mark the corre-sponding positions on the unit before removing an old cable. Lay the new ca-ble so that the cable markings again come to rest at the corresponding posi-tions marked on the unit while removing the old cable.

59 38 399 D33526 – 92 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

6.21 Replacing cables Tabs 6

6.21.1 Laying the cable conduit on the rotating element(applicable to cables L3, L5, L6, L11 and L12)

CAUTIONThe connectors and cables must be protected by inserting them in the fabric tube supplied with the cables.

Preparations

Remove the covers.

Pull the connectors off of board DX6.

For L12: Protect the tongue of connector RJ45 by wrapping it with insulat-ing tape. Make sure that the contacts don't get sticky or stuck together!

For L3: Remove the connector of the cable with tool W1.

Pull off the flexible tube and the spiral spring.

Remove the defective cable and run the new cable up to the rotary ring in the original position.

Use insulating tape to fasten the end of the grounding strap to cable L12.

1. Bunch the cables together to form a loom. Fasten the defective cable to the loom and use it as a pull wire to pull the loom through the fabric tube (A). Pull the fabric tube over the connector and as far over the cable look as possible.

2. Use the pull wire to pull the fabric tube into the spiral spring.

1.

2.

W1

A

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 93


6.21

3. Slide the flexible tube over the spiral spring. Remove the fabric tube and the pull wire. Fasten the cable loom or flexible tube, reattach the connec-tors and refit the covers.

Tu

be

asse

mb

ly s

ide

Sen

sor

sid

e

3.

59 38 399 D33526 – 94 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


6.21.2 Replacing cable L7 and L8/L108*(in cable track 2)

Removing cables L7 and L8/L108* from board DX1

Switch the unit ON.

Move the slide downward to a pleasant working position using the UP/DOWN keys on the Easypad/Multipad.

Switch the unit OFF again.

Remove the covers (see section 1.14):

– Arm

Remove the two cross braces and the cover plate of board DX1.

Pull fiber optic cable L7 and cable L8/L108* off of board DX1.

CAUTIONImmediately after pulling off the cables, wrap the detent of connector X303 (cable L8/L108*) with adhesive tape to protect it against breaking off.

Moving the unit up and removing the profile covers

Switch the unit ON.

Move the slide upward using the UP/DOWN keys on the Easypad.

Switch the unit OFF again.

Remove the covers (see section 1.14):

– Intermediate piece

– Profile covers (top and bottom)

NOTEiTip: When unscrewing the upper profile cover, press it against the unit and let it slide down after detaching it.

If the height adjustment motor is inoperative, you can also move the slide man-ually.

Removing board DX32 Remove board DX32 (see section 6.1.2).

*) unit HW version ≥ AG

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 95


6.21

Removing the cable track 1. Detach fiber optic cable L7 and cable L8/L108* from the cable clamps at the rear of the unit and pull the cables through the slit in the slide toward the front into the stand.

2. Unscrew the angle brackets on both sides of the cable track.

3. Remove the motor-side end piece from the cable track.

Remove both cable covers (on the right and on the left in the stand) and pull the cable track (behind the motor) down and out of the stand.

Detaching old cables from the cable track

4. If cable L7 is defective:Unscrew cable L7 from the interface board and remove the shielding.

NOTEiThis step is not required if cable L7 is intact and therefore will be reused. Un-less it is not possible to lay down the cable track flat near the stand (see next step)

Remove the cable ties from the cable track and lay the cable track down on a flat surface stretched out.

5. Carefully pull both cables (together) out of the cable track and out of the fabric tube.

CAUTIONAt the same time, be sure to check the position of connector X303 on cable L8/L108* (see photo above).


1. 2. 3.

5.

X303

4.

59 38 399 D33526 – 96 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


Drawing new cables into the cable track If cable L8/L108* is defective:Wrap the detent of connector X303 on new cable L8/L108* with adhesive tape to protect it against breaking off.

Lay the cable track down on a flat surface stretched out.

6. Fasten the two (new) cables together with adhesive tape above the flag la-bels.

7. Push both cables (together) into the cable track up to the cable markings.

CAUTIONPush the green cable. The white cable is carried along. In this way, you can prevent the sensitive fiber optic cable from being damaged.

NOTEiNew cables have no cable markings. Orientate yourself according to the mark-ing on the second (old) cable and make sure that both cables protrude equally far out of the cable track once they have been drawn in. Then make a mark on the new cable.

Reinstalling the cable track in the unit 8. Before installing the cable track in the stand, fasten the cables to both ends of the cable track using cable ties.

CAUTIONThe cable ties should only fix the position of the cables. They must not be fas-tened too tightly, as overtightening them could damage fiber optic cable L7.

The actual installation of the cable track is performed in the reverse order of its removal.


6. 7. 8.

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 6 – 97


6.21

6.21.3 Laying cable L1 and the grounding strap(in cable track 1)

The procedure for replacing cable L1 and the grounding strap is basically analogous to the procedure described in chapter 6.21.2.

59 38 399 D33526 – 98 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


ORTHOPHOS XG 7 Maintenance

59 38 399 D33527 – 2 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

Tab 7

Contents

7.1 Checking the height adjustment..............................7 – 4

7.2 Checking the forehead and temple supports ..........7 – 6

7.3 Checking the sensor holder (pan and ceph) ...........7 – 7

7.4 Checking the support piece (bite block holder) .......7 – 9

7.5 Checking the light localizers..................................7 – 10

7.6 Checking the X-ray images ...................................7 – 12

7.7 Checking the tube data .........................................7 – 137.7.1 kV actual value and radiation time ..................... 7 – 13

7.7.2 Tube current verification..................................... 7 – 13

7.7.3 Fan and temperature.......................................... 7 – 16

7.8 Checking the diaphragm .......................................7 – 177.8.1 Dismantling the fixed diaphragm

(XG 3 / 3 PPE only)7 – 17

7.8.2 Diaphragm test exposures ................................. 7 – 18

7.8.3 Pan diaphragm test exposure ............................ 7 – 19

7.8.4 Pan symmetry test exposure.............................. 7 – 22

7.8.5 Ceph – Fixed point of rotation(not for XG 3 / 3 PPE)7 – 26

7.8.6 Quickshot test exposure(XGPlus and full version only) ............................. 7 – 29

7.8.7 TSA sensor (XGPlus and full version only) ............................. 7 – 32

7.9 Checking the cables for damage...........................7 – 35

7.10 Checking the idling rollers .....................................7 – 36

7.11 Checking the grounding straps .............................7 – 37

7.12 Checking the cable shields ...................................7 – 38

7.13 Checking the protective ground wires ...................7 – 39

7.14 Checking the device leakage current ....................7 – 43

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 7 – 3

Tab 7

7 Maintenance


The unit must be disconnected from the junction box of the building installation before replacing any parts near the power supply, power switch, board DX 32 or the X-ray tube assembly!

CAUTION– Switch the X-ray unit OFF before connecting a measuring instrument.– Select the correct current/voltage type and adjust the measuring range to

match the expected readings.– Perform continuity tests only on units which are switched off.– Observe the prescribed cool-down intervals if several exposures must be

taken to check a measurement.

CAUTIONPlease observe the usual precautionary measures for handling boards (ESD).


59 38 399 D33527 – 4 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

7.1 Checking the height adjustment Tabs 7

7.1 Checking the height adjustment

Check the threaded rod and motor for abrasion

Perform a visual inspection of the motor and the threaded rod for abrasion.

If abrasion clearly has occurred:

Replace the height adjustment motor including spindle (see Page 6-6)

Check whether the height adjustment produces atypical running noises

Use the UP/DOWN keys on the Easypad (XGPlus) or Multipad (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) to move the unit up and down throughout its entire travel range.

If the height adjustment is mechanically defective, atypical running noises may occur:

Speed-dependent hammering noises: Bearing on the height adjustment motor is damaged

Replace the height adjustment motor including spindle (see Page 6-6)

Check whether precise, jolt-free height adjustment is possible

Use the UP/DOWN keys on the Easypad (XGPlus) or Multipad (XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE) to move the unit up and down and watch the movement of the slide: The slide must begin moving with a soft start and then speed up its movement.

If precise height positioning with a soft start is not possible:

Lubricate the spindle with a light coat of Chesterton 622

NOTEiIf the X-ray unit is not used for a longer period of time, a slight jolt may occur the first time it starts moving. However, the next time it starts moving, it must execute a jolt-free soft start.

Spindle

HA motor

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 7 – 5

Tab 7 7.1 Checking the height adjustment

7.1

Check whether the height adjustment limit switches are functioning properly

Manually actuate both limit switches one after the other while the height adjustment motor is running: The motor must stop.

If the limit switches are not functioning:

Check the corresponding microswitch and replace if necessary

Check cable L19, replace if necessary

Check whether an audible signal can be heard during height adjustment

Run the unit up and down: An audible signal must sound.

If no audible signal sounds:

Replace board DX1 (see Page 6-59)

Actuator

Limit switch

50

59 38 399 D33527 – 6 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

7.2 Checking the forehead and temple supports Tabs 7

7.2 Checking the forehead and temple supports

Check whether the forehead support moves easily and without jolting throughout its travel range

Move the forehead support and observe its position.

If the forehead support cannot be positioned easily and without jolting:

Replace the headrest (see section 6.4)

Check whether the temple supports move easily and symmetrically

Move the temple supports and observe their position.

If the temple supports cannot be positioned symmetrically and without jolting:

Replace the headrest (see section 6.4).

Headrest version 1(will be replaced by headrest version 2 in 2007 and then no longer available as a repair part)

Headrest version 2(will be available under the part no. 5969741 (from 2007 on))

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 7 – 7

Tab 7 7.3 Checking the sensor holder (pan and ceph)

7.3

7.3 Checking the sensor holder (pan and ceph)

Sensor holderPan

Sensor

for operation with TSA sensor(XGPlus only)

Sensor holderCeph

Sensor

Locking button

PAN sensor holder, rigid PAN sensor holder

59 38 399 D33527 – 8 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

7.3 Checking the sensor holder (pan and ceph) Tabs 7

Check whether the sensor locks and unlocks easily and is firmly seated in the holder

Carefully insert the sensor upward into the holder: The sensor must snap in place audibly.

Check the sensor for firm seating.

Press the locking button and carefully pull the sensor downward out of the holder: The sensor must be easy to remove.

If the sensor cannot easily be inserted in or removed from the holder, or is seated too loosely in the holder:

Check the magnets on the sensor for dirt or foreign particles and clean them or remove any foreign particles if necessary

Replace the sensor holder (see Page 6-43)

Replace the sensor

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 7 – 9

Tab 7 7.4 Checking the support piece (bite block holder)

7.4

7.4 Checking the support piece (bite block holder)

Check whether the bite block, contact segment and chin rest can be fitted securely in the bite block holder

Insert the bite block, contact segment and chin rest one after the other in the bite block holder and check them to make sure they are firmly seated.

If loosely seated:

Check the bite block, contact segment and/or chin rest for damage; re-place with new parts if necessary

Replace the support piece (see Page 6-33)

Support piece

59 38 399 D33527 – 10 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

7.5 Checking the light localizers Tabs 7

7.5 Checking the light localizers

Check whether the FH light localizer (PAN) can be adjusted easily

Adjust the FH light localizer on the PAN with slider A.

If the light localizer cannot be moved easily:

Lubricate the slider (rail) with a light coat of Vaseline

FH light localizer PAN

MS light localizer Light localizer CephPAN

A = FH light

MS lightlocalizer

localizer

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 7 – 11

Tab 7 7.5 Checking the light localizers

7.5

Checking the position of the light lines (FH and MS) on the PAN

Switch the light localizers on and check the positions of the light lines:

– The horizontal light line (FH) must be running horizontally

– The vertical light line (MS) must be running vertically through the cen-ter of the forehead support down to the center of the support piece

NOTEiTip: When checking and adjusting the light localizers use the following as reference lines:

For the FH light localizer: Edge of the tube assembly light localizerFor the MS light localizer: Support piece, inserted bite block or

Forehead support

If the light beam alignment is not correct:

Adjust the light localizers (see chapter 6)

Checking the position of the light lines (FH) on the Ceph

Switch the light localizers on and check the positions of the light lines:

The horizontal light line (FH) must be running horizontally between the temple supports at the height of the ear plugs

NOTEiTip: When checking or adjusting the light localizer, you may use a PA or AP view to assess the light beam on the ear plugs.

FH

29

MS

60 90 12070 80 100 110

FH

59 38 399 D33527 – 12 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

7.6 Checking the X-ray images Tabs 7

7.6 Checking the X-ray images

Check whether the X-ray images taken by the dentist are OK

Check to see whether the X-ray images taken by the dentist exhibit an un-exposed border on all 4 sides.

Check whether the X-ray images show normal definition.

Check whether the density of the X-ray images is OK.

If the quality of the X-ray images is unsatisfactory in some way:

Check the adjustment and readjust the system if necessary (see sec-tion 4)

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 7 – 13

Tab 7 7.7 Checking the tube data

7.7

7.7 Checking the tube data

7.7.1 kV actual value and radiation time

Select service routine S002.3 for the exposure (radiation without rotary movement, radiation time selectable, see page 5-26) and set the following parameters:

– Radiation time: 1 s

– kV value: 66 kV

Release radiation and check the kV actual value and radiation time spec-trometrically, e.g. using a Mult-O-Meter.

If the measured values deviate from the values set above (1 s, 66 kV) by more than ± 10 %:

‡ Replace the tube assembly (see Page 6-38)

NOTEiFor the XG 3/3 PPE system version, sensor positioning must be performed un-til the beam strikes the sensor precisely. If the sensor is positioned correctly, the corresponding values can be compared with the setpoint values.

7.7.2 Tube current verification

WARNINGThe electronics of the X-ray tube assembly are always connected to line volt-age.

Always switch the X-ray unit off and wait until V203 is no longer illuminated be-fore contacting the test leads.

WARNINGThe test leads and measuring instruments used must have a dielectric strength of at least 1000V!

Be sure to use a battery-powered measuring instrument with shock-hazard-protected sockets.

Use only test leads with shock protection.

WARNINGBe sure to switch the X-ray unit off before removing the jumper for the mA measuring jack.

59 38 399 D33527 – 14 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

7.7 Checking the tube data Tabs 7

1. Remove the covers of the tube assembly.

2. Remove jumper A from the MA+/MA– measuring points on board DX6. Connect a digital ammeter to MA+ and MA– and select range 20 mADC.

3. Reattach the cover and tighten the screw securely.

MA–MA+

20mADC

com.

Board DX6

·A

400VDC

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 7 – 15

Tab 7 7.7 Checking the tube data

7.7

4. Switch the unit ON å.Wait 1 min. for self-adjustment of the unit.Press the R key ç to return the X-ray tube head into the initial position.

Select 66 kV/8 mA. Make SIDEXIS XG ready for exposure.

As soon as program P1 and 66 kV/8 mA have been selected, the unit is ready for exposure.

Measurement 5. Press and hold down the exposure key until a meter reading is obtained.

The ammeter should indicate 8 mA ± 1.6 mA. Record the display reading.

NOTEiDisplay: 1mA corresponds to a tube current of 1mA, permissable tolerance +/-20%.

If the measured value deviates from the permissible value (1 mA) by more than ± 20 %:

‡ Replace the tube assembly (see 6-38)

If the specified value is obtained, switch the unit OFF.

6. Remove the upper cover and the meter leads.

Replace jumper!

Reattach the covers of the tube assembly.

XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPEXGPlus

59 38 399 D33527 – 16 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

7.7 Checking the tube data Tabs 7

7.7.3 Fan and temperature

Check whether the fan is functioning Check the function of the fan using service routine S005.4 (see Page 5-31)

If the fan is defective:

‡ Replace the fan (see Page 6-42)

Check whether the temperature sensor is supplying plausible values

Read the temperature in the single tank via service routine S005.5 (see page 5-33)

If the displayed temperature reading is not plausible:

‡ Replace the tube assembly (see Page 6-38)

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 7 – 17

Tab 7 7.8 Checking the diaphragm

7.8

7.8 Checking the diaphragm

7.8.1 Dismantling the fixed diaphragm (XG 3 / 3 PPE only)

Check the fixed diaphragm for completeness.

Then release the diaphragm test exposures (see page 7-18ff.).


59 38 399 D33527 – 18 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

7.8 Checking the diaphragm Tabs 7

7.8.2 Diaphragm test exposures

The diaphragm test exposures are used for a quick check of the system adjustment. The TEST EXPOSURE menu is started without a service pass-word. Diaphragm test exposures can thus be performed by the user as well.

Menu: Test exposure

The TEST EXPOSURE menu is started from SIDEXIS XG:

EXTRAS ‡ CONSTANCY TEST ‡ XCXP ‡ SELECT X-RAY DEVICE ‡ SERVICE EXPO-SURE ‡ DIAPHRAGM TEST EXPOSURE

NOTEiWhen you open the TEST EXPOSURE menu, the unit switches from the user mode to the PC service mode logged by the PC.

In the PC service mode, the control options that are available on the Easypad are determined by SIDEXIS and the currently selected service routine. General control of the unit (as in the user mode) is not possible in this mode.

You can switch between the PAN - DIAPHRAGM, PAN - SYMMETRY, CEPH - FIXED POINT OF ROTATION and TSA - SENSOR menus by clicking the corresponding tab with the mouse. To quit the TEST EXPOSURE menu, click CANCEL.

NOTEiThe Ceph - Fixed point of rotation and TSA - Sensor tabs are not present in the XG 3/3 PPE system version.

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 7 – 19


7.8

7.8.3 Pan diaphragm test exposure

Menu: Test exposure ‡ Pan diaphragm

NOTEiThe exposure is performed without a needle phantom.

Opening PAN - DIAPHRAGM 1. Select the PAN - DIAPHRAGM submenu.



59 38 399 D33527 – 20 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008



XGPlus: Display on the Easypad Service routine S030.2 and its specific exposureparameters are displayed on the Easypad touchscreen.

XG 5 / 3 / 3 PPE: Display on the Multipad The single-line display of the Multipad shows the exposure parametersof service routine S030.2.



XGPlus:


XG5 / 3 / 3 PPE:



?

1

2

3

+- 60 kV/3 mA

0.20 s

S30

2

1 2 3

60/3____0.20____

R


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 7 – 21


7.8




NOTEiIf these criteria are not fulfilled (B), the pan diaphragm must be adjusted. (see chapter 4)

Adjustment: ok

B

Adjustment: not ok

A

59 38 399 D33527 – 22 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


7.8.4 Pan symmetry test exposure

Menu: Test exposure ‡ Pan diaphragm

Preparations Insert the needle phantom in the bite block holder of the panoramic X-ray unit (see page 4-9).

CAUTIONIt is essential that the needle phantom is removed from bite block holder of the panoramic X-ray unit again before a Ceph exposure is taken; otherwise the phantom may collide with the sensor.

Opening PAN - SYMMETRY 1. Select the PAN - SYMMETRY submenu.



båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 7 – 23


7.8






XGPlus:


XG5 / 3 / 3 PPE:



?

1

2

3

+- 60 kV/3 mA

14.1 s

S10

2

1 2 3

60/3____14.1____

R


59 38 399 D33527 – 24 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008



Adjustment: not ok (length measurement with SIDEXIS)

S2

C

A2 = 44.3 ± 0.5 mm

A1 = 88.6 mm ± 1 mm


± 0.75 mm

ZOOM: 1:1A

B

A2 = 44.3 ± 0.5 mmA2 A2

± 0.75 mm

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 7 – 25


7.8

– The shadow of the center needle, the needle image and the auxil-iary line must be coincident and located behind each other. A tolerance (offset of needle from the central auxiliary line) of ± 0.75 mm is permissible (A).


– Distances A2 must be identical, each being 44.3 ± 0.5 mm.


NOTEiIf one of these criteria is not fulfilled (C), the pan symmetry must be adjusted. (see chapter 4)

Remove the needle phantom from the bite block holder of the unit.

59 38 399 D33527 – 26 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


7.8.5 Ceph – Fixed point of rotation(not for XG 3 / 3 PPE)

Menu: Test exposure ‡ Ceph - Fixed point of rotation



1. Select the CEPH - FIXED POINT OF ROTATION submenu.

NOTEiThe QUICKSHOT check box must not be selected.



båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 7 – 27


7.8






XGPlus:


XG5:



?

1

2

3

+- 80 kV/14 mA

0.60 s

S10

5

1 2 3

80/14___0.60____

R


59 38 399 D33527 – 28 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008





NOTEiIf these criteria are not fulfilled (B), the ceph fixed point of rotation must be ad-justed (see chapter 4).

Adjustment: ok

B

Adjustment: not ok

A

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 7 – 29


7.8

7.8.6 Quickshot test exposure(XGPlus and full version only)

Menu: Test exposure ‡ Ceph - Quickshot



1. Select the CEPH - FIXED POINT OF ROTATION submenu.

Opening QUICKSHOT 2. Activate the QUICKSHOT check box.

59 38 399 D33527 – 30 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008










?

1

2

3

+- 80 kV/14 mA

0.30 s

S10

8

R


båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 7 – 31


7.8




NOTEiIf these criteria are not fulfilled (B), the ceph quickshot must be adjusted (see chapter 4).

B

Adjustment: ok

A

Adjustment: not ok

59 38 399 D33527 – 32 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008


7.8.7 TSA sensor (XGPlus and full version only)

Menu: Test exposure ‡ TSA sensor

NOTEiThe exposure is performed without a needle phantom.

Opening TSA - SENSOR 1. Select the TSA - SENSOR submenu.



båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 7 – 33


7.8







?

1

2

3

+- 60 kV/3 mA

0.20 s

S30

4

R


59 38 399 D33527 – 34 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008



– The exposed diaphragm area must lie horizontally centered in the image field (A).


NOTEiIf these criteria are not fulfilled (B), the TSA sensor must be adjusted (see chapter 4).

Adjustment: ok Adjustment: not ok

A B

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 7 – 35

Tab 7 7.9 Checking the cables for damage

7.9

7.9 Checking the cables for damage

Check whether the cables feeding the unit are OK

Perform a visual check of the power cable, protective ground wire, control cables and data cables.

If cables are externally damaged:

‡ Replace the respective cables (see Page 6-91)

59 38 399 D33527 – 36 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

7.10 Checking the idling rollers Tabs 7

7.10 Checking the idling rollers

Check whether the idling rollers are OK Rotate ring B by hand and check it for smooth and easy running.

If the ring does not run smoothly and easily:

Remove the housing covers and check the idle rollers for dirt and for-eign particles. Clean and remove foreign particles if necessary.

B

Idling roller

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 7 – 37

Tab 7 7.11 Checking the grounding straps

7.11

7.11 Checking the grounding straps

Check whether the grounding straps have complete and firm contact

Perform a visual and “hands-on” inspection of the ground straps to ensure that they have complete and firm contact at the positions marked.

If the grounding straps do not have proper contact:

‡ Fasten them properly

If the grounding straps are damaged:

‡ Replace the grounding straps

59 38 399 D33527 – 38 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

7.12 Checking the cable shields Tabs 7

7.12 Checking the cable shields

Check whether the cable shielding is OK

Perform a visual and “hands-on” inspection of the cable shields to ensure that they have complete and firm contact at the positions marked.

If the cable shields do not have proper contact:

‡ Fasten them properly

Shield on housing DX32

Shield on the tube assembly

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 7 – 39

Tab 7 7.13 Checking the protective ground wires

7.13

7.13 Checking the protective ground wires


Switch OFF the line voltage at the main switch of the building installation.

Disconnect the power cable and the second protective ground wire from the building installation.

Remove the following cover parts (see section 1.14):

– Profile cover (10)

– Tube assembly cover, front (65)

– Tube assembly cover, rear (70)

Measuring setup for protective ground wire test

V

A ~ A

BCDE

Ammeter Power sourceMeasuring pointCentral ground wire

Measuring points B-E

Voltmeter

59 38 399 D33527 – 40 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

7.13 Checking the protective ground wires Tabs 7

Check whether the ground wire resistance complies with the specifications

A power source with a current of at least 0.2 A and a no-load voltage of 24 V max. and 4 V min. is required.

Connect the power source between the measuring points specified in the table for at least 5 s and measure:

– the voltage drop with the voltmeter

– the current with the ammeter and

– calculate the resistance using the formula R = U/I

Measuring point A: Central ground wire

Protective ground wire test between...

A and B GNYE wire 0,1Ω

A and C 2. Protective ground wire

0,1Ω

A and D Housing DX32 0,2Ω

A

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 7 – 41

Tab 7 7.13 Checking the protective ground wires

7.13

Measuring points B and C: GNYE power connection and 2nd ground wire

Second protective

Power cablePE

Orthophos XG

Po

wer

cab

le

Sec

on

dP

rote

ctiv

e g

rou

nd

wir

e

Sec

on

dP

rote

ctiv

e g

rou

nd

wir

e

to t

he

Ort

ho

ph

os

XG

Po

wer

cab

leto

th

e O

rth

op

ho

s X

G

B C B CB

C

A

ground wire

59 38 399 D33527 – 42 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

7.13 Checking the protective ground wires Tabs 7

Measuring points D and E: Board cage DX32 and tube assembly

housing

NOTEiIf the resistance exceeds the value specified in the adjacent table, check whether the protective ground wire is fastened according to specifications:

– Check whether the flat washer, toothed lock washer and cable lug are fitted on the protective ground wire in the right order (see page 7-40) and whether the nuts of the ground wire connections are tightened securely.

If the ground wire is not fastened according to specifications, fasten the ground wire properly.(see page 7-40).

Do not connect the power cable and the second ground wire to the build-ing installation yet, but perform a measurement of the device leakage current first (see section 7.14).

E

DTube assembly

BoardcageDX32

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 7 – 43

Tab 7 7.14 Checking the device leakage current

7.14

7.14 Checking the device leakage current


NOTEiA high resistance measuring voltage source at line frequency and a measur-ing circuit compliant with the requirements of IEC 601 are required.Complete test units, e.g. the "Bender tester", fulfill these requirements.

If you have not done it already...

Switch OFF the line voltage at the main switch of the building installation.

Disconnect the power cable and the second protective ground wire from the building installation.

Remove the following cover parts (see section 1.14):

– Profile cover (10)

59 38 399 D33527 – 44 D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

7.14 Checking the device leakage current Tabs 7

Measuring setup for testing the device leakage current

Check whether the power switch of the unit is turned ON.

Connect a high-resistance measuring voltage source between the short-circuited power cable (B) and ground wire A.

Measure the voltage drop across MD.

NOTEiThe measured value must not exceed 5 mA.

If the leakage current is not OK, perform troubleshooting according to section 3.6.

Reconnect the unit to the building installation (see the Installation Instruc-tions for the ORTHOPHOS XG).

Power cableto the Orthophos XG

B

V

~

L

N

PE

A

Voltmeter

208 V / 230 V± 10%

MD

1kΩ

10kΩ0.015μF

Voltage source

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008 7 – 45

Tab 7 7.14 Checking the device leakage current

7.14

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

Service Manual History D3352

Version 1: Software version V02.17, ORTHOPHOS XGPlus/Ceph and not yet all errors and service routines described.

Version 2: Software versions V02.18.1 (XG 5) and V02.19 (XGPlus), system version XG 5,complete revision.

Version 3: Software version V02.20, service routine S034.7, error messages added, chapter update added, additional general revision

Version 4: Software version V02.22, TSA, service routines S017.12/13/14 and S020, chapter update added, additional general revision

Version 5: Software version V02.24, system version XG 3, Ceph right-hand arm, service routines S017.15 and S021.3, chapter update added, additional general revision

Version 6: Software version V02.25

Version 7: Software version V02.27; new service routines S005.7, S007.5, S012.2/3/4, S017.9S018.5/6, S032.10 and S033.10, optimized error lists, troubleshooting chapter added (CAN bus diagnosis, sensor data path), additional general revision

Version 8 Software version V02.28; system hardware version BA, DX41 omitted, new headrest; new fixed diaphragm; XG 3 PPE "pay per exposure" concept (USA only); new service routines S014, S015, S017.10, S017.22 and S017.23, optimized error lists, troubleshooting chapter extended, additional general revision

Version 9 Software version V02.28.1

Version 10 Software version V02.30

Version 11 Software version V02.31

Version 12 Chapter 6 "Repair", sections "Replacing the light barriers" and "Replacing cables in the cable tracks" changed and corrections in Chapter 3 "Troubleshooting".

Version 13 General: Software version V02.32, Chapter 2: Error message E6 61 70 added, Chapter 5: Service routine S017.17, Chapter 6: Section "Replacing the tube bend" omitted, Section "Measures following replacement of boards" changed.

båÖäáëÜ

59 38 399 D3352D3352.076.01.13.02 07.2008

tÉ=êÉëÉêîÉ=íÜÉ=êáÖÜí=íç=ã~âÉ=~åó=~äíÉê~íáçåë=ïÜáÅÜ=ã~ó=ÄÉ=êÉèìáêÉÇ=ÇìÉ=íç=íÉÅÜåáÅ~ä=áãéêçîÉãÉåíëK

«=páêçå~=aÉåí~ä=póëíÉãë=dãÄe=OMMQ péê~ÅÜÉW=ÉåÖäáëÅÜ= mêáåíÉÇ=áå=dÉêã~åóaPPROKMTSKMNKNPKMO===MTKOMMU ûKJkêKW= NNM=N40 fãéêáã¨=Éå=^ääÉã~ÖåÉ

páêçå~=aÉåí~ä=póëíÉãë=dãÄe=

áå=íÜÉ=rp^Wc~Äêáâëíê~≈É=PN páêçå~=aÉåí~ä=póëíÉãë=ii`aJSQSOR=_ÉåëÜÉáã QUPR=páêçå~=aêáîÉI=pìáíÉ=NMM lêÇÉê=kç RV=PU=PVV=aPPROdÉêã~åó `Ü~êäçííÉI=k`=OUOTPïïïKëáêçå~KÇÉ rp^

Sirona Orthophos XG Dental X-Ray - Service manual.pdf

Documents

Transcript of Sirona Orthophos XG Dental X-Ray - Service manual.pdf